E5CN-H - Temperature Controller OMRON - Free user manual and instructions

★ ★ ★ ★ ★ 6.0/10 📄 374 pages EN 💬 AI Question

USER MANUAL E5CN-H OMRON

Preface The ESCN-H, ESAN-H, and E5SEN-H are Digital Controllers. The main functions and characteristics of these Digital Controllers are as follows: + Use the universal inputs to input from thermocouples or temperature- resistance thermometers, or to input analog voltage or analog current inputs. - Either standard or heating/cooling control can be performed. + Both auto-tuning and self-tuning are supported. + Event inputs can be used to switch banks, switch between RUN and STOP status, switch between automatic and manual operation, start/reset the simple program function, and perform other operations. + Heater burnout detection, heater short (HS) alarms, and heater overcur- rent (OC) functions are supported. (Applicable to ESCN-H, E5AN-H, and E5EN-H models with heater burnout detection function.) + Communications are supported. (Applicable to ESCN-H, E5SAN-H, and E5EN-H models with communications.) + User calibration of the sensor input is supported. + User calibration of transfer output is supported. (Applicable to E5SCN-H, E5AN-H, and E5EN-H models with transfer outputs.) + Use position-proportional control. (Applicable to the E5AN-H and E5EN- H.) + Use a remote SP input (Applicable to the ESAN-H and ESEN-H.)

• The structure is waterproof (IP66). + Conforms to UL, CSA, and IEC safety standards and EMC Directive. + The PV display color can be switched to make process status easy to understand at a glance. This manual describes the E5SCN-H, ESAN-H, and E5EN-H. Read this manual thoroughly and be sure you understand it before attempting to use the Digital Controller and use the Digital Controller correctly according to the information provided. Keep this manual in a safe place for easy reference. Refer to the following manual for further information on communications: ESCN-H/ESAN-H/E5EN-H Digital Control- lers Communications Manual Advanced Type (Cat. No. H159). Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information. Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient opera- tion of the product. 1,2,3... 1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc. © OMRON, 2008 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is con- stantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice, Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual, Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.

Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the products. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments. ETS Limitations of Liab ity WARRANTY OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON. OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NON- INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.

LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY

OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT LIABILITY. In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted. IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WEÈRE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR. Application Considerations

OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the combination of the products in the customer's application or use of the products. At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use. The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products: + Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in this manual. + Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations. + Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property. Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products. NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS À WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM. PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any consequence thereof.

Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when tolerances are shown. PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. lt may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability.

ERRORS AND OMISSIONS

The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions. vii

Safety Precautions H Definition of Precautionary Information HE Symbols viii The following notation is used in this manual to provide precautions required to ensure safe usage of the product. The safety precautions that are provided are extremely important to safety. Always read and heed the information provided in all safety precautions. The following notation is used. Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not AN ZONE avoided, is likely to result in minor or moderate injury or in property damage. Symbol Meaning General Caution Indicates non-specific general cautions, warnings, and dangers. Caution Electrical Shock Caution Indicates possibility of electric shock under specific conditions. Prohibition Indicates non-specific general prohibitions. General Caution Indicates non-specific general cautions, warnings, and dangers. Mandatory Caution la]

H Safety Precautions AUTI Do not touch the terminals while power is being supplied. Doing so may occasionally result in minor injury due to electric VAN shock. Do not allow pieces of metal, wire clippings, or fine metallic shav- ings or filings from installation to enter the product. Doing so may occasionally result in electric shock, fire, or malfunction. Do not use the product where subject to flammable or explosive gas. Otherwise, minor injury from explosion may occasionally occur. Never disassemble, modify, or repair the product or touch any of the internal parts. Minor electric shock, fire, or malfunction may occasionally occur. CAUTION - Risk of Fire and Electric Shock a) This product is UL listed as Open Type Process Control Equipment. It must be mounted in an enclosure that does not allow fire to escape externally. b) When using more than one shutoff switch, always turn OFF all the shutoff switches to ensure that no power is being supplied before servicing the product. c) Signal inputs are SELV, limited energy. (See note 1.) d) Caution: To reduce the risk of fire or electric shock, do not interconnect the outputs of different Class 2 circuits. (See note 2.) If the output relays are used past their life expectancy, contact fusing or burning may occasionally occur. Always consider the application conditions and use the output relays within their rated load and electrical life expectancy. The life expectancy of output relays varies considerably with the output load and switching conditions. Note 1: An SELV circuit is one separated from the power supply with double insulation or reinforced insulation, that does not exceed 30 V r.m.s. and 42.4 V peak or 60 VDC. Note 2: A class 2 power supply is one tested and certified by UL as having the current and voltage of the secondary output restricted to specific levels.

CAUTION Tighiten the terminal screws to between 0.74 and 0.90 N-m. Loose screws may occasionally result in fire. Set the parameters of the product so that they are suitable for the system being controlled. If they are not suitable, unexpected operation may occasionally result in property damage or accidents. A malfunction in the Digital Controller may occasionally make control operations impossible or prevent alarm outputs, resulting in property damage. To maintain safety in the event of malfunction of the Digital Controller, take appropriate safety measures, such as installing a monitoring device on a separate line. When inserting the body of the Digital Controller into the case, confirm that the hooks on the top and bottom are securely engaged with the case. If the body of the Digital Controller is not inserted properly, faulty contact in the terminal section or reduced water resistance may occasionally result in fire or malfunction. When connecting the Control Output Unit to the socket, press it in until there is no gap between the Control Output Unit and the socket. Otherwise contact faults in the connector pins may occa- sionally result in fire or malfunction.

Precautions for Safe Use Be sure to observe the following precautions to prevent operation failure, malfunction, or adverse affects on the performance and functions of the product. Not doing so may occasionally result in unexpected events.

1) The product is designed for indoor use only. Do not use the product outdoors or in any of the following

locations. -+ Places directly subject to heat radiated from heating equipment. -+ Places subject to splashing liquid or oil atmosphere. -+ Places subject to direct sunlight. -+ Places subject to dust or corrosive gas (in particular, sulfide gas and ammonia gas). -+ Places subject to intense temperature change. + Places subject to icing and condensation. *+ Places subject to vibration and large shocks.

2) Use and store the Digital Controller within the rated ambient temperature and humidity.

Gang-mounting two or more Digital Controllers, or mounting Digital Controllers above each other may cause heat to build up inside the Digital Controllers, which will shorten their service life. In such a case, use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventilation to cool down the Digital Controllers.

3) To allow heat to escape, do not block the area around the product. Do not block the ventilation holes on

4) Be sure to wire properly with correct polarity of terminals.

5) Use specified size (M3.5, width 7.2 mm or less) crimped terminals for wiring. To connect bare wires, use

stranded or solid copper wires with a gage of AWG24 to AWG14 (equal to cross-sectional areas of 0.205 to 2.081 mm). (The stripping length is 5 to 6 mm.) Up to two wires of same size and type, or two crimp terminals can be inserted into a single terminal.

6) Do not wire the terminals which are not used.

7) To avoid inductive noise, keep the wiring for the Digital Controller's terminal block away from power cables

carry high voltages or large currents. Also, do not wire power lines together with or parallel to Digital Controller wiring. Using shielded cables and using separate conduits or ducts is recommended. Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise (in particular, motors, transformers, solenoids, magnetic coils or other equipment that have an inductance component). When a noise filter is used at the power supply, first check the voltage or current, and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the Digital controller. Allow as much space as possible between the Digital Controller and devices that generate powerful high frequencies (high-frequency welders, high-frequency sewing machines, etc.) or surge.

8) Use this product within the rated load and power supply.

9) Make sure that the rated voltage is attained within two seconds of turning ON the power using a switch or

relay contact. If the voltage is applied gradually, the power may not be reset or output malfunctions may occur.

10) Make sure that the Digital Controller has 30 minutes or more to warm up after turning ON the power

before starting actual control operations to ensure the correct temperature display.

11) When using self-tuning, turn ON power for the load (e.g., heater) at the same time as or before supplying

power to the Digital Controller. If power is turned ON for the Digital Controller before turning ON power for the load, self-tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved.

12) A switch or circuit breaker should be provided close to this unit. The switch or circuit breaker should be

Within easy reach of the operator, and must be marked as a disconnecting means for this unit.

13) Always turn OFF the power supply before pulling out the interior of the product, and never touch nor apply

shock to the terminals or electronic components. When inserting the interior of the product, do not allow the electronic components to touch the case.

14) Do not use paint thinner or similar chemical to clean with. Use standard grade alcohol.

15) Design system (control panel, etc.) considering the 2 second of delay that the controller's output to be set

16) The output may turn OFF when shifting to certain levels. Take this into consideration when performing

17) The number of EEPROM write operations is limited. Therefore, use RAM write mode when frequently

overwriting data during communications or other operations.

18) Always touch a grounded piece of metal before touching the Digital Controller to discharge static

electricity from your body.

19) Do not remove the terminal block. Doing so may result in failure or malfunction.

20) Control outputs that are voltage outpuis are not isolated from the internal circuits. When using a grounded

thermocouple, do not connect any of the control output terminals to ground. (Doing so may result in an unwanted circuit path, causing error in the measured temperature.)

21) When replacing the body of the Digital Controller, check the condition of the terminals. If corroded

terminals are used, contact failure in the terminals may cause the temperature inside the Digital Controller to increase, possibly resulting in fire. If the terminals are corroded, replace the case as well.

22) Use suitable tools when taking the Digital Controller apart for disposal. Sharp parts inside the Digital

Controller may cause injury.

23) Check the specifications of the Control Output Unit and assemble it correctly.

24) When mounting the Control Output Unit, read and follow all relevant information in the product catalogs

25) When applying Lloyd's standards, install the Digital Controller according to the requirements given in

Shipping Standards. © Service Life Use the Digital Controller within the following temperature and humidity ranges: Temperature: -10 to 55°C (with no icing or condensation), Humidity: 25% to 85% If the Controller is installed inside a control board, the ambient temperature must be kept to under 55°C, including the temperature around the Controller. The service life of electronic devices like Digital Controllers is determined not only by the number of times the relay is switched but also by the service life of internal electronic components. Component service life is affected by the ambient temperature: the higher the temperature, the shorter the service life and, the lower the temperature, the longer the service life. Therefore, the service life can be extended by lowering the temperature of the Digital Controller. When two or more Digital Controllers are mounted horizontally close to each other or vertically next to one another, the internal temperature will increase due to heat radiated by the Digital Controllers and the service life will decrease. In such a case, use forced cooling by fans or other means of air ventila- tion to cool down the Digital Controllers. When providing forced cooling, however, be careful not to cool down the terminals sections alone to avoid measurement errors. © Ambient Noise To avoid inductive noise, keep the wiring for the Digital Controller's terminal block wiring away from power cables carrying high voltages or large currents. Also, do not wire power lines together with or parallel to Digital Controller wiring. Using shielded cables and using separate conduits or ducts is rec- ommended. Attach a surge suppressor or noise filter to peripheral devices that generate noise (in particular, motors, transformers, solenoids, magnetic coils or other equipment that have an inductance compo- nent). When a noise filter is used at the power supply, first check the voltage or current, and attach the noise filter as close as possible to the Digital Controller. Allow as much space as possible between the Digital Controller and devices that generate powerful high frequencies (high-frequency welders, high-frequency sewing machines, etc.) or surge. xii

© Ensuring Measurement Accuracy When extending or connecting the thermocouple lead wire, be sure to use compensating wires that match the thermocouple types. When extending or connecting the lead wire of the platinum resistance thermometer, be sure to use wires that have low resistance and keep the resistance of the three lead wires the same. Mount the Digital Controller so that it is horizontally level. If the measurement accuracy is low, check to see if input shift has been set correctly. © Waterproofing The degree of protection is as shown below. Sections without any specification on their degree of pro- tection or those with IPL10 are not waterproof. Front panel: IP66 Rear case: IP20, Terminal section: IP00 xiii

Precautions for Operation

It takes approximately two seconds for the outputs to turn ON from after the power supply is turned ON. Due consideration must be given to this time when incorporating Digital Controllers into a control panel or similar device. Make sure that the Digital Controller has 30 minutes or more to warm up after turning ON the power before starting actual control operations to ensure the correct temperature display. When executing self-tuning, turn ON power for the load (e.g., heater) at the same time as or before supplying power to the Digital Controller. If power is turned ON for the Digital Controller before turning ON power for the load, self-tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved. When starting operation after the Digital Controller has warmed up, turn OFF the power and then turn it ON again at the same time as turning ON power for the load. (Instead of turning the Digital Controller OFF and ON again, switching from STOP mode to RUN mode can also be used.) Avoid using the Controller in places near a radio, television set, or wireless installing. The Controller may cause radio disturbance for these devices. Shipping Standards The ESLIN-H Digital Controllers comply with Lloyd's standards. When applying the standards, the following installation and wiring requirements must be met in the application. H Application Conditions

1) Installation Location

The ES[IN-H Digital Controllers comply with installation categories ENV1 and ENV2 of Lloyd's stan- dards. They must therefore be installed in a location equipped with air conditioning. They cannot be used on the bridge or decks, or in a location subject to strong vibration.

2) Wiring Conditions

xiv Install the recommended ferrite core and wrap the line around it three turns for the applicable lines (e.g., power supply cable line and signal lines) of the models listed in the following table. (See illustra- tions.) Install the ferrite cores as close to the terminal block of the ESC IN-H as possible. (As a guideline, the ferrite core should be within 10 cm of the terminal block.) © Lines Requiring Ferrite Cores Model Signal line or power supply line onto which a ferrite core is installed E5CN, E5CN-U, or E5SCN-H | Input power supply line E5EN, E5AN, E5EN-H, or Input power supply line and 1/0 lines (control outputs 1 and 2, communica- E5AN-H tions, event inputs EV1, EV2, EV3, and EVA, transfer output, and external power supply (not provided on Advanced-type Digital Controllers (E5L1N-H))) © Recommended Ferrite Core Manufacturer Seiwa Electric Manufacturing Co., Ltd. Model E04RA310190100

@ Ferrite Core Connection Examples

Auxiliary outputs (relay outputs) Auxiliary output 2 Aukiliary output 1

Preparations for Use Be sure to thoroughly read and understand the manual provided with the product, and check the fol- lowing points. Timing Check point Details Purchasing the prod- uct Product appearance After purchase, check that the product and packaging are not dented or otherwise damaged. Damaged internal parts may prevent optimum control. Product model and speci- fications Make sure that the purchased product meets the required specifica- tions. Setting the Unit Product installation loca- tion Provide sufficient space around the product for heat dissipation. Do not block the vents on the product. Wiring Terminal wiring Do not subject the terminal screws to excessive stress (force) when tightening them. Make sure that there are no loose screws after tightening terminal screws to the specified torque of 0.74 to 0.90 N-m. Be sure to confirm the polarity for each terminal before wiring the termi- nal block and connectors. Power supply inputs Wire the power supply inputs correctly. Incorrect wiring will result in damage to the internal circuits. Operating environ- ment Ambient temperature The ambient operating temperature for the product is -10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing). To extend the service life of the product, install it in a location with an ambient temperature as low as possible. In locations exposed to high temperatures, if necessary, cool the products using a fan or other cooling method. Vibration and shock Check whether the standards related to shock and vibration are satis- fied at the installation environment. (Install the product in locations where the conductors will not be subject to vibration or shock.) Foreign particles Install the product in a location that is not subject to liquid or foreign particles entering the product.

Conventions Used in This Manual Meanings of Abbreviations The following abbreviations are used in parameter names, figures and in text explanations. These abbreviations mean the following: Symbol Term PV Process value SP Set point sv Set value AT Auto-tuning ST Self-tuning HB Heater burnout HS Heater short (See note 1.) OC Heater overcurrent LBA Loop burnout alarm EU Engineering unit (See note 2.) RSP Remote SP LSP Local SP Note: (1) À heater short indicates that the heater remains ON even when the control output from the Digital Controller is OFF because the SSR has failed or for any other reason. (2) “EU” stands for Engineering Unit. EU is used as the minimum unit for engineering units such as °C, m, and g. The size of EU varies according to the input type. For example, when the input temperature setting range is -200 to +1300°C, 1 EU is 1°C, and when the input temperature setting range is -20.0 to +500.0°C, 1 EU is 0.1°C. For analog inputs, the size of EU varies according to the decimal point position of the scaling setting, and 1 EU becomes the minimum scaling unit. Xvii

How to Read Display Symbols The following tables show the correspondence between the symbols displayed on the displays and alphabet characters. The default is for 11-segment displays. = Cir LH}

The Character Select parameter in the advanced function setting level can be turned OFF to display the following 7-segment characters.

About this Manual: This manual describes the E5CN/AN/EN-H Digital Controllers and includes the sections described below. Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to set up or operate an E5SCN/AN/EN-H Digital Controller. -Overview

Section 1 introduces the features, components, and main specifications of the ESCN/AN/EN-H Digital

Section 2 describes the work required to prepare the ESCN/AN/EN-H Digital Controllers for operation,

including installation and wiring. -Basic Operations

Section 3 describes the basic operation of the E5CN/AN/EN-H Digital Controllers, including key oper-

ations to set parameters and descriptions of display elements based on specific control examples.

Section 5 describes the individual parameters used to set up, control, and monitor operation.

*Operations for Applications

Section 4 describes scaling, the SP ramp function, and other special functions that can be used to

make the most of the functionality of the ESCN/AN/EN-H Digital Controllers.

Section 5 describes the individual parameters used to setup, control, and monitor operation.

Section 6 describes how the user can calibrate the ESCN/AN/EN-H Digital Controllers.

° Appendix The Appendix provides information for easy reference, including lists of parameters and settings. \ WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in per- sonal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given. xxi

Names of Parts Section 1-1 ESEN-H Operation indicators CMRON No. 1 display Temperature unit No.2 display No. 3 display Operation indicators Mode Key FT Up Key ti à PF (Function (Auto/ Manual)) Key Infrared Communications Light Receiver Level Key Down Key 1-1-2 Explanation of Indicators No. 1 Display Displays the process value or parameter name. Lights for approximately one second during startup. No. 2 Display Displays the set point, parameter operation read value, or the variable input value. Lights for approximately one second during startup. No. 3 Display Displays MV (valve opening), soak time remain, or bank number. (ESAN/EN-H Only) Lights for approximately one second during startup. Operation Indicators 1,2,3... 1. SUB1 (Sub 1) Lights when the function set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment param- eter is ON. SUB2 (Sub 2) Lights when the function set for the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment param- eter is ON. SUB3 (Sub 3) Lights when the function set for the Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment param- eter is ON.

2. HA (Heater Burnout, Heater Short Alarm, Heater Overcurrent Detection

Output Display) Lights when a heater burnout, heater short alarm, or heater overcurrent occurs.

8. OUT1 (Control Output 1)

Lights when the control output function assigned to control output 1 turns ON. For a current output, however, OFF for a 0% output only. With position-proportional models, OUT1 lights when the "open" output turns ON.

Temperature Unit OUT2 (Control Output 2) Lights when the control output function assigned to control output 2 turns ON. For a current output, however, OFF for a 0% output only. With position-proportional models, OUT2 lights when the "close" output turns ON.

Lights when operation is stopped. During operation, this indicator lights when operation is stopped by an event or by key input using the RUN/STOP function.

5. CMW (Communications Writing)

Lights when communications writing is enabled and is not lit when it is dis- abled.

6. MANU (Manual Mode)

Lights when settings change protect is ON (i.e., when the A] and F1 Keys are disabled by protected status.

Lights when the SP Mode parameter is set to Remote SP Mode. The temperature unit is displayed when parameters are set to display a tem- perature. The display is determined by the currently set value of the Tempera- ture Unit parameter. £ indicates °C and F indicates °F. This indicator flashes during ST operation. It is OFF when an analog input is set. Indicates whether infrared communications is enabled. Lights when communi- cations is enabled. Not lit when infrared communications is disabled. + Infrared Communications Light Receiver Used when infrared cable is used. 1-1-3 Using the Keys PF (Function (Auto/ Manual)) Ke (ESAN/EN-H Only) [OI Key F9 Key This section describes the basic functions of the front panel keys. This is a function key. When it is pressed for at least 1 second, the function set in the PF Setting parameter will operate. Example: When A-M (auto/manual) is selected in the PF Setting parameter (initial value: A-M), the key operates as an auto/manual switch, switching between Auto Mode and Manual Mode. If the key is pressed for more than 1 second (regardiess of key release timing), the mode will switch. Press this key to move between setting levels. The setting level is selected in the following order: operation level: adjustment level, initial setting level, com- munications setting level. Press this key to change parameters within a setting level. The parameters can be reversed by holding down the key (moving one per second in reverse order). Each press of this key increments the value displayed on the No. 2 display or advances the setting. Holding the key down speeds up the incrementation. Each press of this key decrements values displayed on the No. 2 display or reverses the setting. Holding the key down speeds up the incrementation.

1/0 Configuration and Main Functions Section 1-2 [O] + © Keys Press these keys to change to the protect level. For details on operations involving holding these keys down simultaneously, refer to 1-3 Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations. For details on the protect level, refer to

Program end output Communications [function Note Functions can be assigned individually for each output by changing the set values for the Control Output 1 Assignment, the Control Output 2 Assignment, the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment, and the Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameters in the advanced function setting level.

1/0 Configuration and Main Functions

M: Option Unit can be mounted.

5. Power Supply Voltage

—500: With terminal cover Option Units E53- 0

Control output 2 (voltage output for driving SSR) P: Power supply for sensor C: Current output Function 2 Blank: None H: Heater burnout/Heater short/ Heater overcurrent detection (CT1) HH:__ Heater burnout/Heater short/ Heater overcurrent detection (CT2) B: Two event inputs 03: RS-485 communications HO3: Heater burnout/Heater short/ Heater overcurrent detection (CT1) + RS-485 communications HB: Heater burnout/Heater short/ Heater overcurrent detection (CT1) + Two event inputs HHO3: Heater burnout/Heater short/ Heater overcurrent detection (CT2) + RS-485 communications HO1: Heater burnout/Heater short/ Heater overcurrent detection (CT1)/ RS-232C communications F: Transfer output BF: Two event inputs/Transfer output Version N2: Available only to models released after January 2008

1/0 Configuration and Main Functions

1 oc alam EH input error Remote SP input error Program end output Communications function Alarm output 2 _ ——| Alarm output 1 U LU Functions can be assigned individually to each output by changing the set val- ues for the Control Output 1 Assignment, Control Output 2 Assignment, Auxil- iary Output 1 Assignment, Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment, and Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment parameters in the advanced function setting level.

1/0 Configuration and Main Functions

communications H: Advanced

ENO2: RS-422 Blank: Standard or heating/cooling control communications P: Position-proportional control ENO3: RS-485 communications

6. Option 1 (for driving SSR) +

Blank: None 24 VDC (NPN) H: Heater burnout/Heater short/ Q4: Voltage output (for driving SSR) + Heater overcurrent detection (CT1) 24 VDC (PNP) HH:__ Heater burnout/Heater short/ Heater overcurrent detection (CT2) C3: Current output + . 4 to 20 mA DC

7. Option 2 C3D: Current output +

B: Two event inputs 0 to 20 mA DC BF: Event input + Transfer output V34: Linear voltage output + : 0 to 10 VDC

M: Option Unit can be mounted. 0 to 5 VDC

10. Case Color N: Available only for

-500: With Terminal Cover 1-2-2 Main Functions Input Sensor Types This section introduces the main E5SLIN-H functions. For details on particular functions and how to use them, refer to SECTION 3 Basic Operation and fol- lowing sections. + The following input sensors can be connected.: Thermocouple: K, J,T, E, L, U, N,R,S, B, W, PLII Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100, JPt100 Current input: 4 to 20 mA DC, 0 to 20 mA DC Voltage input: 1 to 5 VDC, 0 to 5 V DC, 0 to 10 V DC

1/0 Configuration and Main Functions Section 1-2 Control Outputs Alarms Control Adjustment Event Inputs Heater Burnout, HS Alarm, and Heater Overcurrent Communications Functions Note + A control output can be a relay output, voltage output (for driving SSR), linear voltage output, SSR output, or current output, depending on the model. + With the ESCN-HLI2[ 1], auxiliary output 2 is used as control output (cool- ing) when heating/cooling control is selected. (lt is also possible to allo- cate a different output.) Therefore, use auxiliary output 1 if an auxiliary output is required while using heating/cooling control. + Set the alarm type and alarm value or the alarm value upper and lower limits. + If necessary, a more comprehensive alarm function can be achieved by setting a standby sequence, alarm hysteresis, auxiliary output close in alarm/open in alarm, alarm latch, alarm ON delay, and alarm OFF delay. + lfthe Input Error Output parameter is set to ON, the output assigned to alarm 1 function will turn ON when an input error occurs. + If the Remote SP Input Error Output parameter is set to ON, the output assigned to the alarm 1 function will turn ON when an input error occurs. + Optimum PID constants can be set easily by performing AT (auto-tuning) or ST (self-tuning). + With the E53-CNCIBLIN2 for the E5CN-H (for two event inputs), the E5SAN/EN-HCIBLIME]-500 for E5SAN/EN-H (for two event inputs) or the ESAN/EN-HCIBLIMI-500 with the E53-AKB for the ESAN/EN-H (for four event inputs), the following functions can be executed using event inputs: switching banks, switching RUN/STOP, switching between automatic and manual operation, starting/resetting the program, inverting direct/reverse operation, switching SP modes, 100% AT execute/cancel, 40% AT exe- cute/cancel, setting change enable/disable, communications writing enable/disable and canceling the alarm latch. With the E53-CNCIHCIN2 or E53-CNCIHHIIN2 for the ESCN-H, or the E5AN/EN-HOIUIHUI-500 or ESAN/EN-HU I IHHI1-500, the heater burnout detection function, HS alarm function, and heater overcurrent detection function can be used. Communications functions utilizing CompoWay/F (See note 1.), SYSWAY (See note 2.), or Modbus (See note 3.) can be used. RS-485 Interface Use the E53-CNLIO8N2 for the E5CN-H, or the E53-ENO3 for the E5AN/ EN-H. RS-232C Interface Use the E53-CNL101N2 for the E5CN-H, or the E53-ENO1 for the E5AN/ EN-H. RS-422 Interface Use the E53-ENO2 for the ESAN/EN-H. (1) CompoWay/F is an integrated general-purpose serial communications protocol developed by OMRON. It uses commands compliant with the well-established FINS, together with a consistent frame format on OMRON Programmable Controllers to facilitate communications be- tween personal computers and components. (2) SYSWAY communications do not support alarm 3. (3) Modbus is a communications control method conforming to the RTU Mode of Modbus Protocol. Modbus is a registered trademark of Schneider Electric.

1/0 Configuration and Main Functions Section 1-2 Transfer Output Remote SP Inputs Infrared Communications

(4) The E5CN-H does not support the RS-422 interface. À 4 to 20-mA transfer output can be used with the E53-CNLIFN2 for the E5SCN-H, or the ESAN/EN-HU IL IF-500. Remote SP inputs can be used with the E5AN-H and ESEN-H. When Support Software, such as CX-Thermo version 4.00 or later (EST2-2C- MVA or later), is used, the personal computer can be connected to the Digital Controller using infrared communications.

Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations Section 1-3 1-3 Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations Parameters are divided into groups, each called a level. Each of the set val- ues (setting items) in these levels is called a parameter. The parameters on the ESCN/AN/EN-H are divided into the following 9 levels. When the power is turned ON, all of the display lights for approximately one second. | Power ON )

Start in manual mode. Start in automatic mode. Operation k—: Adjustment Level Level Press the Key less than 1 5. Press the O1 Key less than 1 s. Press the [O] Key or the PF Key for at least 1 5. #4 Press the [O+ £e Keys for at least s. Press the will flash after 1st second) Press the [O Key or at least 3 s while A- is displayed. {A-A wil flash after st second) Manual Control Level Bank Setting Level PID Setting Level Manual mode Press the than ? s. Press the PF Key for at leastit s. #4 Protect Level Monitor/Settng Item Level Note: The time taken to move to the protect level can be adjusted Press the [CO] Key for at by changing the Press the [O] Key Last Hi S. (Display will flash “Move to protect level for at least 1 s. — After 1t second) time” setting tions Setting Level Key lo less Ian + s. Control stops. Press the Press the [D] Key for at least 1 s. Input password while AKaY is displayed. (Set value -169) Advanced Function Setting Level Input password [== Control in progress [mm Control stopped Calibration Level [MN] Not displayed for some models leve chance Note (1) Your can return to the operation level by executing a software reset. (2) You cannot move to other levels by operating the keys on the front panel from the calibration level. You must turn OFF the power supply. (3) From the manual control level, key operations can be used to move to the operation level only. Level Control in progress | Control stopped Protect level Can be set. — Operation level Can be set. — Adjustment level Can be set. — Bank setting level Can be set. —

Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations Section 1-3 Protect Level Operation Level Adjustment Level Bank Setting Level PID Setting Level

Level Control in progress | Control stopped PID setting level Can be set. Manual control level Can be set. Monitor/setting item level Can be set. — Initial setting level — Can be set. Advanced function setting level |--- Can be set. Calibration level — Can be set. Communications setting level — Can be set. Of these levels, the initial setting level, communications setting level, advanced function setting level, and calibration level can be used only when control is stopped. Control outputs are stopped when any of these four levels is selected. (4) When the PF Setting is set to A-M in models with a PF Key (E5AN/EN-H) (5) When the PF Setting is set to PFDP in models with a PF Key (E5AN/EN-

+ To switch to the protect level from the operation level, the adjustment level, bank setting level, or PID setting level, simultaneously hold down the [O] and © Keys for at least 3 seconds. (See note.) This level is for pre- venting unwanted or accidental modification of parameters. Protected lev- els will not be displayed, and so the parameters in that level cannot be modified. Note The key pressing time can be changed in Move to Protect Level pa- rameter (advanced function setting level). The operation level is displayed when the power is turned ON. You can move to the protect level, initial setting level, or adjustment level from this level. Normally, select this level during operation. While operation is in progress, items such as the PV and manipulated variable (MV) can be monitored, and the set points, alarm values, and alarm upper and lower limits can be monitored and changed. To move to the adjustment level, press th Key once (for less than 1 s). This level is for entering set values and offset values for control. In addi- tion to AT (auto-tuning), communications write enable/disable switching, hysteresis settings, SP settings, and input offset parameters, it includes HB alarm, HS alarm, OC alarm, and PID constants. From the adjustment level, it is possible to move to the bank setting level, initial setting level, or protect level. To move to the bank setting level from the adjustment level, press the Key once (for less than 1 s). This level is used to input parameters such as set points, alarm values, and PID set numbers. From the bank setting level, it is possible to move to the PID setting level, the initial setting level, or the protect level. To move to the PID setting level from the bank setting level, press the Key once (for less than 1 s). This level is used to input parameters such as the PID values for each PID set, MV upper and lower limits, and automatic selection range upper and lower limits. From the PID setting level, it is possible to move to the opera- tion level, the initial setting level, or the protect level.

Setting Level Configuration and Key Operations Section 1-3 Monitor/Setting Item Level Manual Control Level Initial Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level Communications Setting Level Calibration Level + To switch to the monitor/setting item level, press the PF Key from the operation level, adjustment level, bank setting level, or PID setting level. The contents set for monitor/setting items 1 to 5 can be displayed. You can move from the monitor/setting item level to the operation level or initial setting level. (E5AN/EN-H only.) When the Key is pressed for at least 3 seconds from the operation level's auto/manual switching display, the manual control level will be dis- played. (The MANU indicator will light.) When the PF Setting is set to A-M (auto/manual) and the PF Key is pressed for more than one second from the operation level, adjustment level, bank setting level, or PID setting level the manual control level will be displayed. (E5AN/EN-H only.) This is the level for changing the MV in manual mode. To return to the operation level, press the Key for at least one second. lt is also possible to return to the operation level by pressing the PF Key for more than one second when the PF Setting is set to A-M. To move to the initial setting level from the operation level, the adjustment level, bank setting level, PID setting level, or monitor/setting item level, press the [0] Key for at least 3 seconds. The PV display flashes after one second. This level is for specifying the input type and selecting the control method, control period, setting direct/reverse operation, setting the alarm types, etc. You can move to the advanced function setting level or commu- nications setting level from this level. To return to the operation level, press the Key for at least one second. To move to the communications setting level, press thi Key for less than one second. (When moving from the initial setting level to the operation level, all the indicators will light.) Note Pressing the [0] Key for at least 8 seconds in the operation level's auto/manual switching display will move to the manual control level, and not the initial setting level. To move to the advanced function setting level, set the Initial Setting/Com- munications Protect parameter in the protect level to O (the default) and then, in the initial setting level, input the password (-169). From the advanced function setting level, it is possible to move to the cali- bration level or to the initial setting level. This level is for setting the automatic display return time and standby sequence, and it is the level for moving to the user calibration and other functions. To move to the communications setting level from the initial setting level, press the Key once (for less than 1 s). When using the communica- tions function, set the communications conditions in this level. Communi- cating with a personal computer (host computer) allows set points to be read and written, and manipulated variables (MV) to be monitored. To move to the calibration level, input the password (1201) from the advanced function setting level. The calibration level is for offsetting error in the input circuit. + You cannot move to other levels from the calibration level by operating the keys on the front panel. To cancel this level, turn the power OFF then back ON again.

Communications Function Section 1-4 1-3-1 Selecting Parameters + Within each level, the parameter is changed in order (or in reverse order) each time the Le] Key is pressed. (In the calibration level, however, param- eters cannot be changed in reverse order.) For details, refer to SECTION 5 Parameters. 1 Moves in order after F2 key While the Eal key is being held À ! is pressed (if key is down, the parameter will move « 1 released within 1 s). each second in reverse order. Parameter 1

Parameter 2 Parameter 2 À After € key hai n been held dow ! for2s Y : Parameter 3 1 | Parameter 3 Hold down the E& key! After key] : during this interval. After 2 key ha: is pressed PECEECC ELEC EEE : been held dowr forts.

If you press the [# Key at the final parameter, the display returns to the top parameter for the current level. To change parameter settings, specify the setting using the A] or F1 Key, and either leave the setting for at least two seconds or press the Fe Key. This saves the setting. When another level is selected after a setting has been changed, the con- tenits of the parameter prior to the change is saved. When you turn the power OFF, you must first save the settings (by press- ing the F2 Key). The settings are sometimes not changed by merely pressing the [A] or F1 Keys. Communications Function The ESCN/AN/EN-H Digital Controllers are provided with a communications function that enables parameters to be checked and set from a host computer. If the communications function is required, use a model that has that function (ESCN-HLIML1-500 with an E53-CNLIO1N2 or E53-CNLIO3N2, E5AN-H/EN- HEIME-500 with an E53-ENO1, E58-ENO2, or E53-EN03). For details on the communications function, see the separate Communications Manual Advanced Type. Use the following procedure to move to the communications setting level.

1. Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation lev-

el to the initial setting level.

Communications Function Section 1-4

2. Press the [0] Key for less than one second to move from the initial setting

level to the communications setting level.

3. Select the parameters as shown below by pressing the ©e) Key.

4. Press the E or F1 Key to change the parameter setting.

FH PGEL] Protocol Seting E L-Na] Communications Unit No. BE Lpo] Communications Baud Rate E_LEN Communications Data Length He 1] (See note.) E ShcE] Communications Stop Bits EE 2] (See note.) E PRE Communications Parity E Gdh Send Data Wait Time Note The Protocol Setting parameter is displayed only when CompoWay/F commu- nications are being used. Setting Communications Maïch the communications specifications of the ESCN/AN/EN-H and the host Data computer. If a 1:N connection is being used, ensure that the communications specifications for all devices in the system (except the communications Unit No.) are the same. Parameter name Symbol Setting (monitor) value Selection symbols Default Unit Protocol Setting PSEL CompoWay/F (SYSWAY), | LHF, Mad CompoWay/F | None Modbus (SYSWAY) Communications U-Na 0 to 99 1 None Unit No. Communications bPS 1.2, 24, 4.8,9.6, 192, Le,24,48,96, 196,384 [96 kbps Baud Rate 38.4, 57.6 676 Communications LEN 7,8 7 Bits Data Length Communications SbcE 1,2 2 Bits Stop Bits Communications PRES None, Even, Odd NaNE, EVEN, add Even None Parity Send Data Wait SdWE 0 to 99 20 ms Time

Communications Function Section 1-4

Preparations This section describes the work required to prepare the ESCN-H, ESAN-H, and ESEN-H Digital Controllers for operation, including installation and wiring. 2-1 2-2

Group Mounting (See note.) (96 x number of Units — 3.5) +12 120 min. Group mounting is not possible when an SSR output is used for control output 1 or 2 and an E53-C3N or E53-C3DN Output Unit is used. Mount at the intervals shown in the following diagram. Note 110 min.

Installation Section 2-1 ESEN-H Individual Mounting Group Mounting (See note.) {48 x number of Units — 2.6) 10 l 1

Note Group mounting is not possible when an SSR output is used for control output 1 or 2 and an E53-C3N or E53-C3DN Output Unit is used. Mount at the intervals shown in the following diagram. 60 min.

+ Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers. + The recommended panel thickness is 1 to 5 mm for E5SCN-H, and 1 to 8 mm for ESAN/E5EN-H. + Units must not be group mounted vertically. In addition, group mounting is not possible when an SSR output is used for control output 1 or 2 and an E53-C3N or E53-C3DN Output Unit is used. (Observe the recommended mounting intervals.) + When group mounting several Controllers, ensure that the surrounding temperature does not exceed the ambient operating temperature listed in the specifications.

Installation Section 2-1 2-1-3 Mounting E5CN-H E53-COV17 Terminal Cover Adapter Mounting to the Panel 1,2,3... 1. For waterproof mounting, waterproof packing must be installed on the Controller. Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers. Waterproof packing is not necessary when there is no need for the waterproofing function.

2. Insert the ESCN-H into the mounting hole in the panel.

8. Push the adapter from the terminals up to the panel, and temporarily fasten

4. Tighten the two fastening screws on the adapter. Alternately tighten the

two screws little by little to maintain a balance. Tighten the screws to a torque of 0.29 to 0.39 N-m.

Installation Section 2-1 Mounting the Terminal Cover Make sure that the "UP" mark is facing up, and then attach the E53-COV17 Terminal Cover to the holes on the top and bottom of the Digital Controller. E5AN/EN-H Mounting Bracket Panel Terminal Cover (E53-COV16) Waterproof packing E5AN-H Mounting Bracket Terminal Cover (E53-COV16) Waterproof packing ESEN-H

1,2,3.. Mounting to the Panel

1. For waterproof mounting, waterproof packing must be installed on the

Controller. Waterproofing is not possible when group mounting several Controllers. Waterproof packing is not necessary when there is no need for the waterproofing function.

2. _Insertthe ESAN/E5EN-H into the square mounting hole in the panel (thick-

ness: 1 to 8 mm). Attach the Mounting Brackets provided with the product to the mounting grooves on the top and bottom surfaces of the rear case.

3. Use a ratchet to alternately tighten the screws on the top and bottom

Mounting Brackets little by little to maintain balance, until the ratchet turns freely. Mounting the Terminal Cover Slightly bend the E53-COV16 Terminal Cover to attach it to the terminal block as shown in the following diagram. The Terminal Cover cannot be attached in the opposite direction. Slightly bend the E53-COV16 Terminal Cover in the direction shown by the arrows to attach it to the terminal block. Enlarged Illustration of Terminal Section 2-1-4 Removing the Digital Controller from the Case E5CN-H The body of the Digital Controller can be removed from the case to set Output Units or to perform maintenance. Check the specifications of the case and Digital Controller before removing the Digital Controller from the case. Tool insertion hole Flat-blade screwdriver O) {Unit: mm)

1,2,3.. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the two tool insertion holes (one on the top and one on the bottom) to release the hooks. Insert the flat-blade screwdriver in the gap between the front panel and rear case, and pull out the front panel slighily. Hold the top and bottom of the front panel and carefully pull it out toward you, without applying unnec- essary force. When inserting the body of the Digital Controller into the case, make sure the PCBs are parallel to each other, make sure that the sealing rubber is in place, and press the ESCN-H all the way to the rear case. While pushing the E5CN-H into place, push down on the hooks on the top and bottom sur- faces of the rear case so that the hooks are securely locked in place. Be sure that electronic components do not come into contact with the case. Keep the PCBS parallel to leach other and insert them into the rear case. Bottom View of the ESCN-H

1,2,3... 1. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the two tool insertion holes (one on the top and one on the bottom) to release the hooks.

2. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver in the gap between the front panel and rear

case (two on the top and two on the bottom), and use it to pry and pull out the front panel slightly. Then, pull out on the front panel gripping both sides. Be sure not to impose excessive force on the panel.

Installation Section 2-1 Gap between the Front Panel and Rear Case Gap between the Front Panel and Rear Case Four gaps, two on the top and two on the bottom Four gaps, two on the top and two on the bottom WE OÙ HE QUE Top View of ESAN-H Top View of ESEN-H

8. When inserting the body of the Digital Controller into the case, make sure

the PCBs are parallel to each other, make sure that the sealing rubber is in place, and press the ESAN/EN-H toward the rear case until it snaps into position. While pressing the ESAN/EN-H into place, press down on the hooks on the top and bottom surfaces of the rear case so that the hooks securely lock in place. Make sure that electronic components do not come into contact with the case. Keep the PCBs parallel to each other and insert them into the rear case. Keep the PCBS parallel to each other and insert them into the rear case. Bottom View of the ESAN-H Bottom View of the ESEN-H Mounting Output Units Before Performing the + Confirm the type of Output Units that are to be set. Setup + For details on types of Output Units and the main specifications, refer to Output Units on page 32. + For position-proportional models and models with SSR outputs, the Out- put Units are already set. This setting operation is not required. + When setting the Output Units, draw out the body of the Controller from the case and insert the Output Units into the sockets for control output 1 and 2. Setting Procedure + Check the socket positions to be set using the following diagram.

1. While lifting the hooks securing the PCB on the front panel, remove the

PCB to which the sockets are attached. Hooks securing PCB E5AN-H E5EN-H

3. Forthe E5SAN-H, use the enclosed clamps to secure the Output Units. Do

not use clamps for the E5EN-H.

4. Setthe PCB backinits original location, and make sure that the hooks se-

curing the PCB are firmly in place. Contirm that he hack securng the POB are Conti that he ook irmiy in place on the top seurhg the PCB are m. fi in placo on he top and bottom.

Wiring Terminals 2-2 Wiring Terminals Check the terminal arrangements for ESCN-H terminals 1 to 15 and E5AN/ EN-H terminals 1 to 30 as marked on the product label and on the side of the case. 2-2-1 Terminal Arrangement ESCN-H Controllers Control output 1 Relay output 250 VAC, 3 A Auxliary outputs (resistive load) Auxiliary outputs (relay outputs) 250 VAC, 3 À + (relay outputs) Voltage output —r—| © (@) —— (resistive load) F2 VOC 81 ma, Sonoronpurt @ @\ rO MAR A oaer burnout alarm, heater Linear voltage output DO NOT bo NOT Auxiliary output 1 short, heater overcurrent alarm, 0 to 10 VAC USE USE À, ©) @ ® or input error is sent to the Load 1 kQ max 5 output to which the alarm 1 Garentouput D © © ns function is assigned! to 20 m ut por Supply DO NOT 8, + 100 to 240 VAC 4 to 20 mA DC BON @) Œ] Fe + 24 VAGNDC (no polariy) Load 600 Q@ max. Option Units E53-CNBN2 E53-CNQBN2 E53-CNHBN2 E53-CNBFN2 Event Inputs Event Inputs and Event Inputs Event Inputs and Control Output 2 and CT Transfer Output

Control Output 2 Control Output 2 and Communications and CT2 Transfer Output (RS-232) RS-232C RS-232C

Communications {RS-232) and CT 4 to 20 mA DC (Load 600 @ max)

Communications (RS-232) and Control Output 2 E53-CNO3N2 E53-CNQ03N2 E53-CNHO3N2 E53-CNHHO3N2 E53-CNQHN2 Communications Communications (RS-485) Communications Communications Control Output 2 (RS-485) and Control Output 2 (RS-485) and CT {RS-485) and CT2 and CT

Control oupurz (D 12 VDC 21 mA Control output 2 12 VDC 21 mA Wire all voltage input terminals correcily. The Controller may fail if voltage input terminals are wired incorrectly.

(resistive load) À heater burout alarm, SSR failure, heater overcurrent alarm, input error, or Remote SP Input Error is sent to the output to which the alarm 1 function is assigned. Event input/ Models with Position- Î Transfer output/ proportional Control H Remote SP

Wire all voltage input terminals correcily. The Controller may fail if voltage input terminals are wired incorrectly.

Wiring Terminals Section 2-2 2-2-2 Precautions when Wiring + Separate input leads and power lines in order to prevent external noise. + Use AWG24 (cross-sectional area: 0.205 mm?) to AWG14 (cross-sec- tional area: 2.081 mm) twisted-pair cable (stripping length: 5 to 6 mm). + Use crimp terminals when wiring the terminals. + Use the suitable wiring material and crimp tools for crimp terminals. + Tighten the terminal screws to a torque of 0.74 to 0.90 N-m. + Use the following types of crimp terminals for M3.5 screws.

Note Do not remove the terminal block. Doing so will result in malfunction or failure. 2-2-3 Wiring In the connection diagrams, the left side of the terminal numbers represents the inside of the Controller and the right side represents the outside. Power supply + With the E5CN-H, connect to terminals 9 and 10; with the E5AN-H and ESEN-H, connect pins 1 and 2. The following table shows the specifica- tions. Input power supply E5CN-H E5SAN/EN-H 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz | 8.5 VA 12 VA 24 VAC, 50/60 Hz 5.5 VA 8.5 VA 24 VDC (no polarity) 35W 5.5W + These models have reinforced insulation between the input power supply, the relay outputs, and other terminals. Input + Make the connections as shown below, using terminals 3 to 5 for the E5CN-H and pins 17 to 20 for the E5SAN/EN-H, and matching the input types. Do not use. Ex, de 6 4 —Dont + É + use. Thermocouple … Plalinum resistance inemometer Analog input E5SCN-H Do not as Do not à __ Do not TT use. use. use. Do not + vont À ae TA de (9 F (9)e—1 ps | Ce Dont — Donot ae ae Em rare Thermocouple thermometer Analog input ESAN/EN-H Note When wiring a voltage input, check the connected terminals care- fully to make sure there are no mistakes. Incorrect wiring can cause the Unit to fail.

Control Output 1 + Outputs are sent from terminals 1 and 2 with the ES5SCN-H and from pins 3 and 4 with the ESAN/EN-H. The following diagrams show the available outputs and their internal equalizing circuits. F1] hop Relay Voltage (for ring SSR) Eu Dinear Dear boltage E5SCN-H 4 4 ot

il A v GND g+ GND ® Relay SSR E53-Q4 (PNP) E53-Q3 (NPN) E53-V34N E53-C3N E53-QN (PNP) E53-V35N E53-C3DN E5AN/EN-H + The following table shows the specifications for each output type. E5CN-H Output type Specifications Relay 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 100,000 operations Voltage (for driv- | PNP type, 12 VDC +15%, 21 mA (with short-circuit protec- ing SSR) tion) Current DC 4 to 20 mA/DC 0 to 20 mA, resistive load: 600 Q max. Resolution: Approx. 10,000 Linear voltage 0 to 10 VDC, resistive load: 1 kQ max. Resolution: Approx. 10,000 E5AN/EN-H Output type Specifications SSR 75 to 250 VAC, 1 A (See note.) Relay (Position- | 250 VAC 1 A (including inrush current) proportional mod- els) Note The SSR output (control output 1 or control output 2) ratings are as follows: + Rated load voltage: 75 to 250 VAC - Rated load current: 1 A (resistance load) Use the load current within the derating curve. - A zero cross function is not supported.

ndition 8 Load current (A) for Derating Curve for SSR current output 1 or 2 Output Models

Ambient temperature (°C) Condition A: SR output 100% ON Condition B: SSR output 50% ON, control cycle: 2 s = Output Units Model Output Type | Output Specifications method E53-RN Relay ON/OFF |250 VAC, 5 A (resistive load), Electrical life: 100,000 operations E53-QN Voltage (PNP) E53-Q3 Voltage (NPN) E53-Q4 Voltage (PNP) ON/OFF ON/OFF ON/OFF PNP type, 12 VDC, 40 mA (with short-circuit protection) NPN type, 24 VDC, 20 mA (with short-circuit protection) PNP type, 24 VDC, 20 mA (with short-circuit protection) E53-C3N 4 to 20 mA Linear DC 4 to 20 mA, resistive load: 600 Q max. E53-C3DN |0 to 20 mA Linear Resolution: Approx. 10,000 DC 0 to 20 mA, resistive load: 600 Q max. Resolution: Approx. 10,000 E53-V34N |0 to 10 V Linear |0 to 10 VDC, resistive load: 1 kQ min. E53-V35N |0to5V Linear Resolution: Approx. 10,0000 to 5 VDC, resis- tive load: 1 KO min. Resolution: Approx. 10,000 + The ESCN-H voltage output (for driving SSR) is not electrically isolated from the internal circuits. When using a grounding thermocouple, do not connect any of the control output terminals to the ground. (If a control out- put terminal is connected to the ground, errors will occur in the measured temperature as a result of leakage current.) ESAN/EN-H voltage outputs (for driving SSR), however, are functionally isolated from the internal cir- cuits. If high levels of noise or surge are imposed between the output terminals of an SSR output, short-circuit faults may occasionally occur. If the output becomes permanently shorted, there is the danger of fire due to overheat- ing of the heater. Design safety into the system, including measures to prevent excessive temperature rise and spreading of fire.

Wiring Terminals Section 2-2 + Take countermeasures such as installing a surge absorber. As an addi- tional safety measure, provide error detection in the control loop. (Use the Loop Burnout Alarm (LBA) and HS alarm that are provided for the E5LIN- H.) Varistor

@—— as — Ÿ Varistor e

Select a surge absorber that satisfies the following conditions. SSR output Voltage used Varistor voltage Surge resistance 100 to 120 VAC 240 to 270 V 1,000 A min. 200 to 240 VAC 440 to 470 V Control Output 2 + Outputs are sent from terminals 11, 12, 14, and 15 with the ESCN-H, and from pins 5 and 6 with the E5SAN/EN-H. The following diagrams show the available outputs and their internal equalizing circuits. Voltage (for driving SSR)__ Voltage (for driving SSR) ESCN-H Relay ssR E53-Q4 (PNP) E53-Q3 (NPN) E53-V34N E53-C3N E53-QN (PNP) E53-V35N E53-C3DN E5AN/EN-H + The following table shows the specifications for each output type. E5CN-H Output type Specifications Voltage (for driv- | PNP type, 12 VDC +15%, 21 mA (with short-circuit protec- ing SSR) tion) E5AN/EN-H Output type Specifications SSR 75 to 250 VAC 1 A (See note.) Relay (Position- | 250 VAC 1 A (including inrush current) proportional mod- els) Note The SSR output (control output 1 or control output 2) ratings are as follows: + Rated load voltage: 75 to 250 VAC - Rated load current: 1 A (resistance load) Use the load current within the derating curve.

- A zero cross function is not supported. Load current (A) for Derating Curve for SSR urrent output 1 or 2 Output Models

Goncition 8 55°C Condition A: SSR output 100% ON Ambient temperature (°C) Condition B: SSR output 50% ON, control cycle: 2 s = Output Units Model Output Type | Output Specifications method E53-RN Relay ON/OFF _ |250 VAC, 5 A (resistive load), Electrical life: 100,000 operations E53-QN | Voltage (PNP) [ON/OFF | PNP type, 12 VDO, 40 mA (with short-cirouit E53-Q3 | Voltage (NPN) [ON/OFF | protection) E53-Q4 | Voltage (PNP) |ON/OFF | NPN type, 24 VDC, 20 mA (with short-cireuit protection) PNP type, 24 VDC, 20 mA (with short-circuit protection) E53-C3N |4 to 20 mA Linear DC 4 to 20 mA, resistive load: 600 Q max. E53-C3DN |0 to 20 mA Linear Resolution: Approx. 10,000 DC 0 to 20 mA, resistive load: 600 Q max. Resolution: Approx. 10,000 E53-V34N |0 to 10 V Linear 0 to 10 VDC, resistive load: 1 kQ min. E53-V35N |0to5V Linear Resolution: Approx. 10,0000 to 5 VDC, resistive load: 1 kKQ min. Resolution: Approx. 10,000 + The ESCN-H voltage output (for driving SSR) is not electrically isolated from the internal circuits. When using a grounding thermocouple, do not connect any of the control output terminals to the ground. (If a control out- put terminal is connected to the ground, errors will occur in the measured temperature as a result of leakage current.) ESAN/EN-H voltage outputs (for driving SSR), however, are functionally isolated from the internal cir- cuits. Control output 2 of the E5CN-H is a voltage output (for driving SSR) only, and outputs across terminals 11(+) and 12(-), or 14(+) and 15(-). Control output 1 (voltage output for driving SSR) and control output 2 (voltage output for driving SSR) are not isolated. If high levels of noise or surge are imposed between the output terminals of an SSR output, short-circuit faults may occasionally occur. If the output becomes permanently shorted, there is the danger of fire due to overheat- ing of the heater. Design safety into the system, including measures to prevent excessive temperature rise and spreading of fire.

Auxiliary Outputs 2, and 3 + Take countermeasures such as installing a surge absorber. As an addi- tional safety measure, provide error detection in the control loop. (Use the Loop Burnout Alarm (LBA) and HS alarm that are provided for the E5LIN- H.) Varistor SSR output —ñ#— Ê— a+ — Ÿ Varistor ï Select a surge absorber that satisfies the following conditions. Voltage used Varistor voltage Surge resistance 100 to 120 VAC 240 to 270 V 1,000 A min. 200 to 240 VAC 440 to 470 V + On the ESCN-HL1211-500, auxiliary output 1 (SUB1) is output across ter- minals 7 and 8, and auxiliary output 2 (SUB2) is output across terminals 6 and 8. + On the ESAN/EN-HL12[1-500, auxiliary output 1 (SUB1) is output across terminals 9 and 10, auxiliary output 2 (SUB2) is output across terminals 7 and 8. + On the ESAN/EN-H[1311-500, auxiliary output 1 (SUB1) is output across terminals 9 and 10, auxiliary output 2 (SUB2) is output across terminals 7 and 8, and auxiliary output 3 (SUB3) is output across terminals 14, 15 and 16. + When the Input Error Output parameter is set to ON, the output assigned to the alarm 1 function turns ON when an input error occurs. + If the Remote SP Input Error Output parameter is set to ON, the output assigned to the alarm 1 function will turn ON when an RSP input error occurs. + When the HB alarm, HS alarm, or heater overcurrent alarm is used with the E5SCN-H (with E53-CNLIH/HHLIN2), alarms are output to the output assigned to the alarm 1 function. + When the HB alarm, HS alarm, or heater overcurrent alarm is used with the E5AN-H/EN-H, alarms are output across terminals 9 and 10. + On the ESCN-H, when heating/cooling control is used, auxiliary output 2 becomes control output (cooling). + On the E5AN-H and E5EN-H, when heating/cooling control is used, con- trol output 2 becomes the control output (cooling). + For models that have a heater burnout alarm, an OR of the alarm 1 func- tion and the HB alarm, HS alarm, or heater overcurrent alarm is output. If the alarm 1 function is to be used for HB alarm only, set the alarm 1 type to O (i.e., do not use alarm 1 function). - The following diagrams show the internal equalizing circuits for auxiliary outputs 1, 2, and 8.

Wiring Terminals Section 2-2

ALM1, 2, 8 can be output to auxiliary output 1, 2, 8 or changed with the advanced function setting level. - The relay specifications are as follows: E5CIN-H (SUB1, SUB2) SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A

E5CIN-H (SUB3) SPDT, 250 VAC, 3 A

Event Inputs + The E5LIN-HL I ]B supports event inputs. When event inputs 1/2 are to be used, connect to terminals 11 to 13, and when event inputs 8/4 are to be used, connect to terminals 23 to 25. @) @ EVI GD+ “+Evi €3 EV3 a EV1 © EV2 (E) EV2 2) EV4 E) EV2 @ (E) Æ) E53-CNLBLIN2 E53-AKB (for ESAN/EN-H) ESAN-H/EN-HCIBLIML-500 (for ESCN-H) + Use event inpuis under the following conditions: + The outflow current is approximately 7 mA. Contact inputON: 1 kQ max., OFF: 100 kKQ min. No-contact inputON: Residual voltage 1.5 V max.; OFF: Leakage current 0.1 mA max. Polarities during no-contact input are as follows: O+ Lien © EV2 Two Event Inputs: Two Event Inputs: Two Additional Event Inputs: E53-CNLIBLIN2 ESAN/EN- E53-AKB in ESAN/EN- (for ESCN-H) HÜBLIML-500 HOBCIMC-500 (for ESAN/EN-H) (for ESAN/EN-H)

Wiring Terminals Section 2-2 CT Inputs + When the HB alarm, HS alarm, or heater overcurrent alarm is to be used With the ESCN-HLIML1-500 with an E53-CNLIH/HHUIN2 Option Unit, con- nect a current transformer (CT) across terminals 14 and 15 or terminals 13 and 15 (no polarity). + When the HB alarm, HS alarm, or heater overcurrent alarm is to be used with the ESAN/EN-HLTIH1-500 or ESAN/EN-HUIIHHI1-500, connect a current transformer (CT) across terminals 14 and 15 or terminals 15 and 16 (no polarity).

TT | Ta ë cT cTi (E) © @ ) E53-CNCIHLIN2 E53-CNLIHHLIN2 ESAN/EN-HILIHLI-500 ESAN/EN-HL IL IHHLI-500 for ESCN-H) Transfer Output + On the E5CN-HEIME1-500 with an E53-CNLIFN2, the transfer output is output across terminals 14 and 15. + On the ESAN/EN-HI 1 1F-500, transfer output is output across terminals 27 and 28. Current Current

(for E5CN-H) Output type Specifications Current 4 to 20 mA DC, Load: 600 @ max., Resolution: 10,000 Even with models that do not have a transfer output, control outputs 1 or 2 can be used as a simple transfer output if it is a current output or linear output. For details on the operation, refer to 4-14 Using the Transfer Output. Remote SP Input + The E5SAN-H and ESEN-H support remote SP inputs. To use remote SP, connect to terminals 29 and 30. 4 to 20 mA E5AN/EN-H Remote SP inputs are not electrically isolated from the internal circuits. When using a grounding thermocouple, do not connect any of the remote SP input terminals to the ground. (If a remote SP input terminal is connected to the ground, errors will occur in the measured temperature as a result of leakage current.)

Wiring Terminals Section 2-2 Communications RS-485 + When communications are to be used with the E53-CNLI03N2 for the E5CN-H, or E53-ENO3 for the E5SAN/EN-H, connect communications cable across terminals 11 and 12 or 21 and 22. De+ B(+) 142 A) €) — 84) @3)—Do notuse. | RS-485 RS-485 EDe—+ B(+) — AC @-— 40 Eat) E53-CNL IO3N2 (for ESCN-H) E53-ENO3 (for ESAN/EN-H) Specify both ends of the transmission path including the host computer as end nodes (that is, connect terminators to both ends). The minimum terminal resistance is 54 Q. Communications Unit Connection Diagram E5CN-H Host computer RS-485 Shield

LV ESCN-H (No. 1) FG 5 H ESCN-H (No. 31) A <B: [1] Mark : ! ! À > B: [0] Space î LOT : Terminator (120 Q, 1/2 W) E5AN/EN-H Host computer RS-485 Shield EL | ÿ ESAN/EN-H (No. 1) ESAN/EN-H (No. 31) FG RS-485 RS-485 No. | Abbreviation No. | Abbreviation 22] A() 221 At B (+) Il 21| 84) 12[ A0 2] AC H] À <B: [1] Mark HRRT ECC) À > B: [0] Space E) Terminator (120 Q, 1/2 W) + The RS-485 connection can be either one-to-one or one-to-N. À maxi- mum of 32 Units (including the host computer) can be connected in one- to-N systems. The maximum total cable length is 500 m. Use AWG24 (cross-sectional area: 0.205 mm) to AWG14 (cross-sectional area:

2.081 mm?) shielded twisted-pair cable.

Cross-sectional area of conductor AWG24: 0.205 mm? AWG14: 2.081 mm?

sG 7 RS (RTS) | 7 ER (DTR) | 20 L. CS (CTs)| 8 FG 17 + A 1:1 connection is used. The maximum cable length is 15 m. To extend the transmission path, use the OMRON Z3R RS-232C Optical Interface. + Use AWG24 (cross-sectional area: 0.205 mm?) to AWG14 (cross-sec- tional area: 2.081 mm) shielded twisted-pair cable. Cross-sectional area of conductor AWG24: 0.205 mm? AWG14: 2.081 mm? RS-422 (E5AN/EN-H Only) + When communications are to be used with the E53-ENO2 for the E5AN/ EN-H, connect Communications Cable across terminals 11 to 13 and 21 to 22. @—e* + | RS42 EDe—_—

Using the Support Software Port Section 2-3 Host computer ESANÆEN-H (No.1) ESAN/EN-H (No.31) RS422 RS-422 | Two Terminators RS-422 Shielded cable No. (240 0, 1/2W) _ No. RDA 22] spa 22] spa ADB D 21] s08 RE — 21] s08

*<A1:1 or 1:N connection is used. When a 1:N connection is used, a maxi- mum of 32 nodes including the host computer can be connected. + Use AWG24 (cross-sectional area: 0.205 mm?) to AWG14 (cross-sec- tional area: 2.081 mm) shielded twisted-pair cable. Cross-sectional area of conductor AWG24: 0.205 mm? AWG14: 2.081 mm? 2-3 Using the Support Software Port Use the communications port for Support Software to connect the personal computer to the Digital Controller when using EST2-2C-MV4 CX-Thermo or a version of CX-Thermo higher than 4.00, or other Support Software. The E58- CIFQ1 USB-Serial Conversion Cable is required to make the connection. For information concerning the models that can be used with CX-Thermo, contact your OMRON sales representative. Procedure Use the following procedure to connect the Digital Controller to the personal computer using the USB-Serial Conversion Cable. The USB-Serial Conver- sion Cable is used to communicate with the COM port of the personal com- puter. To perform communications using USB-Serial Conversion Cable, set the communications port (COM port) number to be used for the software to the COM port assigned to the Cable. 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power to the Digital Controller. Note If the Cable is connected when the power to the Digital Controller is OFF, power will be supplied from the personal computer and im- pose a load on the internal circuits of the Digital Controller.

2. Connect the Cable.

Connect the personal computer's USB port with the Support Software port on the Digital Controller using the Cable.

Using the Support Software Port Section 2-3 + Digital Controller Connection Method Communications port Personal computer's USB port == pl 2" Support Software

E5EN-H E5AN-H Le) — Communications port ip sl Communications port for Support Software for Support Software STI Bottom view of E5AN-H Bottom view of ESEN-H Note Hold the connector when inserting or disconnecting the Cable.

8. Install the driver.

Install the driver to enable the Cable to be used with the personal comput- er. Installation When the Cable is connected with the personal computer, the OS detects the product as a new device. At this time, install the driver using the instal- lation wizard. For details on installation methods, refer to the user's man- ual for the E58-CIFQ1 USB-Serial Conversion Cable.

4. Setting Setup Tool Communications Conditions

Set the communications port (COM port) number to be used for the CX- Thermo Setup Tool to the COM port number assigned to the USB-Serial Conversion Cable. Refer to the E58-CIFQ1 USB-Serial Conversion Cable Instruction Manual and Setup Manual for details on how to check the COM port assigned to the USB-Serial Conversion Cable. The communications conditions for Setup Tool COM ports are fixed as shown in the table below. Set the communications conditions for the CX- Thermo Setup Tool according to the following table. Parameter Set value Communications Unit No. o1 Communications baud rate 38.4 (kbps) Communications data length 7 (bits) Communications stop bits 2 (bits) Communications parity Even

Using Infrared Communications Section 2-4 2-4 Using Infrared Communications Procedure

1,2,3.. When a Setup Tool, such as CX-Thermo version 4.00 or later (EST2-2C-MV4 or later), is used, the personal computer and Digital Controller can be con- nected using infrared communications. Using infrared communications enables the personal computer and Digital Controller to be connected from the front panel while ensuring a dust-tight and drip-tight structure. Use a USB- Infrared Conversion Cable, and connect it to the USB port at the personal computer. Infrared communications are supported only for the E5SAN-H and ESEN-H. The infrared communications port and the Setup Tool port cannot be used at the same time. For information concerning the models that can be used with the CX-Thermo, contact your OMRON sales representatives. Use the following procedure to connect the Digital Controller to the personal computer using the USB-Infrared Conversion Cable. The USB-Infrared Con- version Cable is used to communicate with the COM port on the personal computer. To perform communications using the USB-Infrared Conversion Cable, set the communications port (COM port) number to be used for the Setup Tool (such as CX-Thermo) to the COM port assigned to the Cable.

1. Connecting the USB-Infrared Conversion Cable to the Personal Computer

Connect the USB-Infrared Conversion Cable to the USB port on the per- sonal computer.

2. Install the driver

Install the driver to enable the USB-Infrared Conversion Cable to be used with the personal computer. Installation When the Cable is connected with the personal computer, the OS will detect is as a new device. At this time, install the driver using the installa- tion wizard. For details on installation methods, refer to the Instruction Sheet and Setup Manual for the E58-CIFIR USB-Infrared Conversion Cable.

8. Enabling Digital Controller Infrared Communications

Mount the Digital Controller to the panel and wire it. Turn ON the power supply for the Digital Controller, go to the adjustment level, and set the In- frared Communications Use parameter to ON. When this parameter is set to ON, the Ir indicator on the front panel of the Digital Controller will light. This enables connecting to a personal computer using infrared communi- cations.

SEC Lit when Infrared Communications Use parameter is set to ON. ESEN-H Series ESAN-H Series

Using Infrared Communications Section 2-4

Connecting the USB-Infrared Conversion Cable to the Digital Controller Mount the enclosed adapter to the Digital Controller. Hold the USB-Infra- red Conversion Cable with the label side facing up, and insert the Cable into the adapter to the line specified on the label. Mounting adapters

ALU NN À E5EN-H Series E5AN-H Series -__ insert up to the line Line on label Setting the Setup Tool Communications Conditions Set the communications port (COM port) number to be used for the CX- Thermo Setup Tool to the COM port number assigned to the USB-Infrared Conversion Cable. Refer to the E58-CIFIR USB-Infrared Conversion Cable Instruction Sheet and Setup Manual for details on checking the COM port assigned to the USB-Infrared Conversion Cable. The communications conditions for infra- red COM ports are fixed as shown in the table below. Set the communica- tions conditions for the CX-Thermo Setup Tool according to the following table. Parameter Set value Communications Unit No. o1 Communications baud rate 38.4 (kbps) Communications data length 7 (bits) Communications stop bits 2 (bits) Communications parity Even Checking the Settings After completing all data transfers, be sure that the data is correct. Finally, remove the USB-Infrared Conversion Cable and mounting adapter from the Digital Controller and set the Infrared Communications Use parameter to OFF. Operation can now be started. Turn ON the Infrared Communications Use parameter only when connect- ed to the Setting Tool through infrared communications. Leave it set to OFF during normal operation.

Using Infrared Communications

Initial Setting Examples Section 3-1 3-1 Initial Setting Examples Initial hardware setup, including the sensor input type, alarm types, control periods, and other settings is done using parameter displays. The [O] and Keys are used to switch between parameters, and the amount of time that you press the keys determines which parameter you move to. This section describes 3 typical examples. Explanation of Examples Changing Parameters — mage means that there are parameters. BLN-E--- Continue pressing the 1 key to change parameters until you reach the intended parameter. Changing Numbers B CNEL E 254 ï ions i > EM E) Numeric data and selections in each = 5 _E1)} screen can be changed by using the [Al and M keys. Example 1 Input type: 5 (K thermocouple, Setup Procedure -200.0°C to 1.300.0°C)| (PowerON_) ( Power ON ) Control method: ON/OFF control Alarm type: 2 (upper limit) Alarm value 1: 20°C (deviation) Set point: 100°C Operation LU Level _ F 25.Hlrvsr Initial Setting Level | Control stops. Initial Setting Level

Sarone Checkthat ÆFNEL N ONOFF speciications control method is É_L OEE || control ONOF control EB G#6f)| op pu Œæ control Check alarm pe A} E | Alarm 1 Type: 2 Set alarm type El 2 Operation Level Use means Press the [I key for at least 1 s. Control starts:

keys oser. gpl |PVSP: 1000 Porc 00 ï Confiminat [5 R-G}}Running Operation conrol is running. vois running. E. pur| Stopped: 5k3P Level El 'ppé SE. T Use ihe(Siand [EF A} - ] Set alarm values keys to settheE PTE À latarm Value 1: 200 gemveueto (Es 200 [ER | I (Star operation ) Start operation.

Initial Setting Examples

ST control specifications Set alarm type stopped E 25.1 Adjustment E 25 Level Se The sé point flaghes dk AT ex Aauto-tuning (AT) execution: Alter AT is (When PID sopped control is # AE selected) Ë SFF During AT execution | 5 AE [el Es 4) Operation Level Set al

Start operation Operation Level PUISP Initial Setting Level Press he 1 key tor at least 3 s. Control stops. Usehemans À S keys to Input Type: 9 select the input pe. Use the EI and TNET Says suc DL NEL ONOFF attf] control: PID control pidl|on TE controi Use ne and EF GE] Toexecute à À When ON, sel-tuning MikeystosetsTÉ ZE] ST: operates. to OFI 5 àFF] To cancel Check te E LP] onto Period. À itis recommended that 20 seconds Control period. “og (Heat 22 | be set for a relay output and 2 = I <71 (Unit: Seconds) | Seconds for an $SR voltage output Check te IL aambpe. AL <JPnam 1 pe: è Press the 11 key for at least 1 s. Operation Level Control starts: Use the EI and Slesioset À Corus 1500 the SPt0 1500. nn 1609) Press he OTkey Adjustment (for less than 1 s). To cxecuis Level 1O0AT. To execute 100% AT (auto-tuning), Execute AT. EH AEioexecue select AE -2. To execute 40% AT, De ge] SAT: select RE - !. To cancel AT, select 5 Jocancel :. ÿ GFF: (AT cancel) Press the LC] key less than 1 S). Confirm that the set point is 150°C. vis Confirm that control is running Use the EI and Skeystoset the alarm value EBs to 80°C. Running Stopped latam 305 Value 1 Start operation.

Initial Setting Examples

280°C Setup Procedure Pow Initial Setting Level Set input specifications Set control specifications Set travel time Adjustment Level Start operation

Press the [O] key for at least 3 Control stops. Operation Level PVISP Initial Setting Level Check input type. CNE] imput Type: 5 Check that control Er E7] Floaiins [FIGE] control EfLôt]| close control: £L3S UseeSand@ F leve LE PElTraime 45 travelime 1045. [Æs 45 Operation Level Press the [O] key for at least 1 s:

Use theSand ET 26.0] pvssp: keys to selihe Eu Sen SPo2s00 0. EBeS00) 2500 Press the [D] ke Adjustment (for less than 1 s). Level Use he and GPRE léebsahesr À patate E

Press the [O] key (for less than 1 $) Operation Level ET 560 BE EM PVISP: Éesc500| 2600 Confim that E F5) Ruming [eur controls running. neuf || stoppe S&P Start operation. Control start:

Setting the Input Type Section 3-2 3-2 Setting the Input Type The Controller supports 3 input types: platinum resistance thermometer, ther- mocouple, and analog inputs. Set the input type that matches the sensor that is used. 3-2-1 Input Type The following example shows how to set a K thermocouple for -20.0 to 500.0°C. Operating Procedure Operation Level 1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation TA level to the initial setting level. E 501 3 E LIL BE 00

Press the [=] Key to enter the set value of the desired sensor. When you use a K thermocouple (-20.0 to 500.0°C), enter 6 as the set Initial Setting Level NL Input Type

+ The default is 5. - Ifa platinum resistance thermometer is mistakenly connected while a set- ting for other than a platinum resistance thermometer is in effect, S.ERR Will be displayed. To clear the S.ERR display, check the wiring and then turn the power OFF and back ON.

Selecting the Temperature Unit Section 3-3 3-3 Selecting the Temperature Unit 3-3-1 Temperature Unit Operating Procedure Operation Level Et 2m E 2 [mm Hi

(es ani 5 [=] Temperature BE a- Unit Den r (aies) L - Either °C or °F can be selected as the temperature unit. + Set the temperature unit in the Temperature Unit parameter of the initial setting level. The default is £ (°C). The following example shows how to select °C as the temperature unit.

1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation

level to the initial setting level.

8. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key for at least one second.

3-4 Selecting PID Control or ON/OFF Control 2-PID Control ON/OFF Control Two control methods are supported: 2-PID control and ON/OFF control. Switching between 2-PID control and ON/OFF control is executed by means of the PID ON/OFF parameter in the initial setting level. When this parameter is set to Pc d, 2-PID control is selected, and when set to aNaFF, ON/OFF con- trol, is selected. The default is P£ 4. ON/OFF control is not displayed for posi- tion-proportional models. PID control is set by AT (auto-tuning), ST (self-tuning), or manual setting. For PID control, set the PID constants in the Proportional Band (P), Integral Time (1), and Derivative Time (D) parameters. In ON/OFF control, the control output is turned ON when the process value is lower than the current set point, and the control output is turned OFF when the process value is higher than the current set point (reverse operation).

Setting Output Specifications Section 3-5 3-5 Setting Output Specifications The following table shows the parameters related to outputs. Each of the parameters is described in detail following the table. Parameter Standard Position- models proportional models cp Control Period (Heating) e c-cp Control Period (Cooling) e orev Direct/Reverse Operation e e outl Control Output 1 Assignment e out2 Control Output 2 Assignment e subl Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment e e sub2 Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment e e sub3 Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment e (@: Supported) 8-5-1 Control Periods + Set the output periods (control periods). Though a shorter period provides C pal Eng) 0 better control performance, it is recommended that the control period be set to 20 seconds or longer for a relay output to preserve the service life m TE Control Period of the relay. After the settings have been made in the initial setup, readjust LL (Cooling) the control period, as required, by means such as trial operation. + Set the control periods in the Control Period (Heating) and Control Period (Cooling) parameters in the initial setting level. The default is 20 seconds. + The Control Period (Cooling) parameter is used only for heating/cooling control. + When the control output is used as a current output or linear voltage out- put, the Control Period settings cannot be used. + The control period can be set for standard models only. 3-5-2 Direct and Reverse Operation + Direct operation increases the manipulated variable whenever the pro- cess value increases. Reverse operation decreases the manipulated vari- able whenever the process value increases. Manipulated variable Manipulated variable 100%) 100% 0% 0% = À — Low Set Value High Low Set Value High temperature temperature temperature temperature Direct operation Reverse operation

Setting Output Specifications Section 3-5 For example, when the process value (PV) is lower than the set point (SP) in a heating control system, the manipulated variable increases according to the difference between the PV and SP. Accordingly, reverse operation is used in a heating control system. Direct operation is used in a cooling con- trol system, in which the operation is the opposite of a heating control sys- tem. + Direct/reverse operation is set in the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter in the initial setting level. The default is a#-F (reverse operation). Operating Procedure In this example, the input type, temperature unit, direct/reverse operation, and control period (heat) parameters are checked. Input type = 5 (K thermocouple) Temperature unit = £ (°C) Direct/reverse operation = a#-F (reverse operation) Control period (heat) = 20 (seconds) Operation Level 1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation EF level to the initial setting level. = Er El LILI Es 49 Initial Setting Level 2. The input type is displayed. When the input type is being set for the first time, 5 (K thermocouple) is set. To select a different sensor, press the D - Input Type a ’ (= pp L |MPEU OP or A Ke: E LINE Y. Be 5 E 111] Temperature 8. Select the Temperature Unit parameter by pressing the ©) Key. The de- (=. © 7 Li Unit fault is © (°C). To select F (°F), press the [A] Key. [mm [ns (mimi) Lt E F 1] Control Period 4. Select the Control Period (Heating) parameter by pressing the Key. E L P (Heating) The default is 20. Hs 20 E = mr 1, |DirectReverse 5. Select the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter by pressing the Key. © OL |Operation The default is aF-F (reverse operation). To select af -d (direct opera- Eee ä8-R tion), press the Key. Operation Level 6. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key for at least one second. ET 11 lPVSP E Ju FES 09 3-5-3 Assigned Output Functions + Function assignments can be changed by changing the settings for con- trol and auxiliary output assignments. + The default function assignments for each output are shown below. Parameter name Symbol Initial status Control Output 1 Assignment oùt Control output (heating) Control Output 2 Assignment oùte Not assigned. Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment SÜb ! Alarm 1

Setting Output Specifications Section 3-5 Example: E5CN-H Parameter name Symbol Initial status Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment Sübe Alarm 2 Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment SUb3 Alarm 3 (ESAN/ÆEN-H only) + Each output is automatically initialized as shown below by changing the control mode. Parameter name Symbol Without control output 2 With control output 2 Standard Heating/cooling Standard Heating/cooling Control Output 1 oùt Control output Control output Control output Control output Assignment (heating) (heating) (heating) (heating) Control Output 2 oùte Not assigned. Not assigned. Not assigned. Control output Assignment (See note 1.) (See note 1.) (cooling) Auxiliary Output 1 SÜb ! Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Alarm 1 Assignment (See note 2.) (See note 2.) (See note 2.) (See note 2.) Auxiliary Output 2 Sübe Alarm 2 Control output Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Assignment (cooling) Note (1) There is no control output 2 and no parameter assignment is displayed for that output. (2) The Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter becomes the program end output unless the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF. EH Alarms lt will be specified in this section when an alarm must be assigned, i.e., when an alarm must be set for the Control Output 1 or 2 Assignment parameters, or for the Auxiliary Output 1 or 3 Assignment parameters. For example, if alarm 1 is set for the Control Output 1 Assignment parameter, then alarm 1 has been assigned. Assigning a work bit to either control output 1 or 2 or to auxiliary output 1 to 3 is also considered to be the same as assigning an alarm. For example, if work bit 1 is set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter, then alarms 1 to 3 have been assigned. Operating Procedure This procedure sets the following control and auxiliary output assignments. Control output 1: Control output (heating); Control output 2: Control output (cooling); Auxiliary output 1: Alarm 1; Auxiliary output 2: Alarm 2 Operation Level 1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation FF level to the initial setting level. ET 20 nes 9 E Lu Fes (00.9 Initial Setting Level 2. Select the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter by pressing the B —n _ L Input Type Key. BE LIN DIDIen 6 [esjenm [es]

Initial Setting Level Standard or Heating/Cooling

Setting Output Specifications

Initial Setting Level Move to Ad- vanced Function Setting Level on Setting Level Parameter Initialization on Setting Level Control Output 1 Assignment on Setting Level —| Control Output 2 Assignment on Setting Level Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Advanced Functi on Setting Level

Note The following output assignments do not need to be set because they are set automatically by changing the control mode, but they are shown here as a reference for checking the assignments for each out- put.

4. Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press-

ing the [e] Key. (For details on moving between levels, refer to 4-8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level.)

5. Press the M Key to enterthe password (“-169”), and move from the initial

setting level to the advanced function setting level.

(When H-£ is selected for the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter, the setting will be £ -a.)

10. Select the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter by pressing the

(The default is ALM 1.

13. Press the A] or F1 Key to set ALME.

Setting the Set Point (SP) Section 3-6 Initial Setting Level 14. Press the Key for at least one second to move from the advanced BE =. L Input Type function setting level to the initial setting level. E LIN BEE 5 Operation Level 15. Press the [O] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting = — level to the operation level. ET cn PVISP p BE Lu BES 'O00 ar utput + When “close in alarm” is set, the status of the auxiliary output is output Opening or Closingin unchanged. When “open in alarm” is set, the status of the auxiliary output Alarm function is reversed before being output. + Each auxiliary output can be set independently. + These settings are made in the Auxiliary Output 1 to 3 Open in Alarm parameters (advanced function setting level). + The default is N-a: Close in Alarm. + When “open in alarm” is set for the alarm 1 output, the open in alarm sta- tus is also applied to heater burnout, HS alarm, heater overcurrent, and input error outputs. Auxiliary output Auxiliary Indicators functions 1 to 3 output (SUB1 to SUB3) Close in Alarm | ON ON Lit OFF OFF Not lit Open in Alarm | ON OFF Lit OFF ON Not lit - The alarm output will turn OFF (i.e., the relay contacts will open) when power is interrupted and for about two seconds after the power is turned ON regardiess of the setting of the Auxiliary Output 1 to 3 Open in Alarm parameter. 3-6 Setting the Set Point (SP) Operation Level The operation level is displayed when the power is turned ON. The process DE ñ value (PV) is at the top of the display, and the set point (SP) is at the bottom. 5 CU Es 00 Operation Level For Controllers that support a No. 3 display (E5AN/E5EN-H), the contents DE set in the PV/SP Display Screen Selection parameter (advanced function È A setting level) are displayed below the PV and SP. mn nn The MV is displayed as the default. For details, refer to 3-11 Setting the No. Len ñ _ 3 Display. OOD LILI 3-6-1 Changing the SP + The set point cannot be changed when the Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter is set to 3. For details, refer to 4-9 Using the Key Protect Level.

Operating Procedure Operation Level

[ei im) U.U Bank Setting Level Display Bank Selection Bank 3 SP 1 Bank 3 SP 1 + To change the set point, select the bank number in the Display Bank Selection parameter in the bank setting level, and press the A] or F1 Key in the SP parameter (in the bank setting level) for each bank to set the desired set value. The new set point will be selected two seconds after the new value has been specified. -+ Ifthe SP parameter is changed in the operation level, the change will be reflected in the set point for the current bank. + The bank function can be used to change eight set points. For details, refer to Banks on page 129. In this example, the set point in bank 3 is changed from 0°C to 200°C.

2. The current bank number will be displayed.

Key to move the bank setting level.

5. Press the [Al and F1 Keys to set 200.0.

3-7 Using ON/OFF Control In ON/OFF control, the control output turns OFF when the temperature being controlled reaches the preset set point. When the manipulated variable turns OFF, the temperature begins to fall and the control turns ON again. This oper- ation is repeated over a certain temperature range. At this time, how much the temperature must fall before control turns ON again is determined by the Hys- teresis (Heating) parameter. Also, what direction the manipulated variable must be adjusted in response to an increase or decrease in the process value is determined by the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter. 3-7-1 ON/OFF Control + Switching between 2-PID control and ON/OFF control is performed using the PID ON/OFF parameter in the initial setting level. When this parame- ter is set to FL d, 2-PID control is selected, and when it is set to aNaF, ON/ OFF control is selected. The default is PL d. + ON/OFF control can be set for standard models only.

Using ON/OFF Control Section 3-7 Hysteresis + With ON/OFF control, hysteresis is used to stabilize operation when switching between ON and OFF. The control output (heating) and control output (cooling) functions are set in the Hysteresis (Heating) and Hystere- sis (Cooling) parameters, respectively. In standard control (heating or cooling control), the setting of the Hystere- sis (Heating) parameter in the adjustment level is used as the hysteresis regardless of whether the control type is heating control or cooling con- trol. Reverse operation Hysteresis (heating) OFF PV Set point Three-position In heating/cooling control, a dead band (an area where both control out- Control puts are 0) can be set to either the heating or cooling side. This makes it possible to use 3-position control. Reverse operation Dead band Hysteresis (heating) | t Hysteresis (cooling) Heating Cooling side side OFF > PV Set point Parameters Symbol Parameter: level Application S-HC Standard or Heating/Cooling: Initial setting level | Specifying control method CNEL PID ON/OFF: Initial setting level Specifying control method GREY Direct/Reverse Operation: Initial setting level Specifying control method C-db Dead Band: Adjustment level Heating/cooling control Hg5 Hysteresis (Heating): Adjustment level ON/OFF control CHyS Hysteresis (Cooling): Adjustment level ON/OFF control 3-7-2 Settings To execute ON/OFF control, set the Set Point, PID ON/OFF, and Hysteresis parameters. Setting the PID ON/OFF Parameter Operating Procedure The following example shows how to change the PID ON/OFF parameter to aNaF in the initial setting level. Operation Level 1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation FT level to the initial setting level. ET 20 m)Pv 3 E LIL BEs (O0

PID-ON/OFF 4. Use the A] and F1 Keys to set onof.

5. To return to the operation level, press the

Next, set the set point value. Key for at least one second. Setting the SP Operating Procedure In this example, the set point is set to 200.0. The set value (i.e., the SP) is Shown at the bottom of the display. Operation Level 1. Select the Process Value/Set Point parameter in the operation level. CS] 11 |PV/SP ETES) 2. Use the [Al and F1 Keys to set the SP. (In this example, it is set to 200.0.) EC PAL The new set value can be saved by pressing the Ee] Key, or it will go into Be AH effect after two seconds have elapsed. (The new set point will be reflected in the current bank.) Next, set the hysteresis. Setting the Hysteresis Operating Procedure Set the hysteresis to 2.0°C. Operation Level 1. Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level. [Ta PV/SP (mi) [1 E cou BE 2000 Adjustment Level 2. The Adjustment Level Display parameter will be displayed in the adjust- [a Adjustment ment level. G {Adi Level Display [= mc [es jenm ET ILE |Hysteresis 8. Select the Hysteresis (Heating) parameter by pressing the € Key. E H 212 |(Heating) Des 1m [enjmn | mn LEE ET vu 4. Press the [A] and F1 Keys to set the hysteresis (2.0 in this example). Ei- E H y a ther press the ©e] Key or wait for at least two seconds after setting the hys- Ë m teresis value to confirm the setting. (ei) 2.0

5. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key.

+ When AT is executed, the optimum PID constants for the set point at that time are set automatically. À method (called the limit cycle method) for forcibly changing the manipulated variable and finding the characteristics of the control object is employed. + Either 40% AT or 100% AT can be selected depending on the width of MV variation in the limit cycle. In the AT Execute/Cancel parameter, specify RE -2 (100% AT) or AE - ! (40% AT). To cancel AT, specify aff (AT can- cel). Only 100% AT can be executed for heating and cooling control or for float- ing control for position-proportional models. AT cannot be executed when control has stopped or during ON/OFF con- trol. The results of AT are reflected in the Proportional Band (P), Integral Time (1), and Derivative Time (D) parameters for the PID set at the time AT exe- cution starts. For details on PID sets, refer to PID Sets on page 129. PID Setting Level OT PID* Proportional Band EXP

= ni BE 85 [=] — | PID* Integral Time E *i EEs 2130 PID* Derivative Time Con nn AU (4: 1 t0 8) AT is started when either AE -2 (100% AT) or AE - { (40% AT) is specified for the AT Execute/Cancel parameter. During execution, the AT Execute/Cancel parameter on the No. 1 display flashes. When AT ends, the AT Execute/Can- cel parameter turns OFF, and the No. 1 display stops flashing.

AT Execute/Cancel[E [a] (al D — L = BE = AE No. 1 display Rs _GFF Es +12 100% AT execution in progress If you move to the operation level during AT execution, the No. 2 display flashes to indicate that AT is being executed. PVISP Eu un mn Et 70m B ca E Ru EE 00.0 HE — OL No. 2 display

AT execution in progress Only the Communications Writing, RUN/STOP, AT Execution/Cancel, and Pro- gram Start parameters can be changed during AT execution. Other parame- ters cannot be changed.

Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, Manual Setup) Section 3-8 AT Calculated Gain The AT Calculated Gain parameter sets the gain for when PID values are cal- culated using AT. When emphasizing response, decrease the set value. When emphasizing stability, increase the set value. AT Hysteresis The AT Hysteresis parameter sets the hysteresis when switching ON and OFF for the limit cycle operation during auto-tuning. Limit Cycle MV Amplitude The Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter sets the MV amplitude for limit cycle operation during auto-tuning. Note Disabled for 100% AT. nm 40% AT The width of MV variation in the limit cycle can be changed in the Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter, but the AT execution time may be longer than for 100% AT. The limit cycle timing varies according to whether the deviation (DV) at the start of auto-tuning execution is less than 10% FS. Deviation > 10% FS Deviation < 10% FS Limit Cycle MV PV Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 40% Amplitude 40% Deviation: Deviation: ' 1 10%FS

10%FS + 7 Time AT started AT ended AT started AT ended 100% AT Operation will be as shown in the following diagram, regardiess of the devia- tion (DV) at the start of AT execution. To shorten the AT execution time, select 100% AT. pv Limit Cycle MV Amplitude 100%

AT started AT ended Note The Limit Cycle MV Amplitude parameter is disabled. Operating Procedure This procedure executes 100%AT. Adjustment Level 1. Press the O Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level. E AT Execute/ Press the € Key to select the AT Execute/Cancel parameter. E RE Cancel Een _afF [=] 2. Press the AI Key to select AE -2. The No. 1 display for AT Execute/Cancel BE RE will flash during AT execution. Een AE-e

8. afF will be displayed when AT ends.

4. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key.

3-8-2 ST (Self-tuning)

ST (self-tuning) is a function that finds PID constants by using step response tuning (SRT) when Digital Controller operation begins or when the set point is changed. Once the PID constants have been calculated, ST is not executed when the next control operation is started as long as the set point remains unchanged. ST (self-tuning) is enabled when the ST parameter is set to ON in the initial setting level. When the ST function is in operation, be sure to turn the power supply of the load connected to the control output ON simultaneously with or before starting Controller operation. When executing self-tuning, turn ON power for the load (e.g., heater) at the same time as or before supplying power to the Digital Controller. If power is turned ON for the Digital Controller before turning ON power for the load, self- tuning will not be performed properly and optimum control will not be achieved. ST can be set for standard models only. This procedure executes self-tuning (ST).

1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation

level to the initial setting level.

2. Select the ST parameter by pressing the © Key.

3. Press the [A Key to select aN. ON is the default.

4. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key for at least one second.

The temperature display flashes during self-tuning (ST) execution. PID Constants When control characteristics are already known, PID constants can be set directly to adjust control. PID constants are set in the Proportional Band (P), Integral Time (l), and Derivative Time (D) parameters, according to the Dis- play PID Selection parameter setting in the PID setting level. Changing the Proportional Band (P), Integral Time (l), or Derivative Time (D) parameter set- tings in the adjustment level changes the settings in these parameters in the current PID set.

Startup Conditions Note 1,2,3.. Self-tuning by step response tuning (SRT) is started when the following condi- tions are met after program execution is started and the set point is changed. At start of operation When set point is changed

1. The set point at the start of operation

differs from the set point when the pre- vious SRT was executed. (See note 1.)

2. The difference between the tempera-

ture at the start of operation and the set point is greater both of the following: (Present proportional band x 1.27 + 4°C) and the ST stable range.

3. The temperature at the start of opera-

tion is lower than the set point during reverse operation, and is larger than the set point during direct operation.

1. The new set point differs from the set

point used when the previous SRT was executed. (See note 1.)

2. The set point change width is greater

both of the following: (Present propor- tional band x 1.27 + 4°C) and the ST stable range.

3. During reverse operation, the new set

point is larger than the set point before the change; and during direct opera- tion, the new set point is smaller than the set point before the change.

4. There is no reset from input errors. 4. The temperature is stable. (See note

2.) (Equilibrium with the output amount at 0% when the power is turned ON is also all right.) (See note 3.) (1) The previous SRT-implemented set point is the set point that was used for calculating the PID constants for the previous SRT. (2) In this state, the measurement point is within the ST stable range. (3) In this state, the change width of the PV every 60 seconds is within the ST stable range or less. In the following instances, PID constants are not changed by self-tuning (ST) for the present set point.

1. Whenthe PID constants have been changed manually with ST set to ON.

2. When auto-tuning (AT) has been executed.

8. When the PID set has been changed during SRT.

When the PID set for the current bank is set to 0 (PID set automatic selec- tion). In addition, the following diagrams show the difference between setting a dif- ferent PID set for each bank and setting the same PID set. For details on bank settings, refer to 4-15 Using Banks and PID Sets. © SP-200 7 @) sP=200 7 Bank 1 SP=100 Bank 0 Bank 1 Bank 0 Bank 0 PID set number = 1 Bank 1 PID set number = 2 Bank 0 PID set number = 1 Bank O PID set number = 1

1. When operation starts, ST is executed for each bank and the PID con-

stants are saved for each PID set. Stable control is thus enabled, because ST is not executed when the bank is changed or when the next operation starts.

2. ST is executed each time the bank is changed, and PID constants are

saved for the same PID set. Therefore ST is executed each time the bank is changed and when the next operation starts.

Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, Manual Setup) Section 3-8 ST Stable Range Operating Procedure The ST stable range determines the condition under which ST (self-tuning) functions. This procedure sets the ST stable range to 20°C. Advanced Function Setting Level 1. Select the ST Stable Range parameter by pressing the € Key in the ad- DE ST Stable vanced function setting level. BCE - Ave ERs 159 ET 2. Usethe Key to set the parameter to 20°C. E GE -b FES 200 3-8-3 RT (Robust Tuning) F + When AT or ST is executed with RT selected, PID constants are automat- E ically set that make it hard for control performance to degenerate even when the characteristics of the controlled object are changed. + RT can be set in the advanced function setting level when PID control has been set. + The RT mode cannot be selected while an analog input is set. + Selecting the RT mode in the following cases will help to prevent hunting from occurring. + When the set temperature is not constant and is changed in a wide range + When there are large variations in ambient temperatures due to factors such as seasonal changes or differences between day and night tem- peratures + When there are large variations in ambient wind conditions and air flow + When heaïer characteristics change depending on the temperature - When an actuator with disproportional 1/0, such as a phase-control- type power regulator, is used + When a rapidly heating heater is used + When the control object or sensor has much loss time + When hunting occurs in normal mode for any reason + PID constants are initialized to the factory settings by switching to RT mode. + When the RT mode is selected, the derivative time setting unit be- comes the second. RT Features + Even when hunting occurs for PID constants when AT or ST is executed in normal mode, it is less likely to occur when AT or ST is executed in RT mode.

Determining PID Constants (AT, ST, Manual Setup) Section 3-8 Temperature Temperature Much hunting occurs. Hunting is reduced. Set value F---------./2-1.f Set value L.......7 DOCS À Time À Time Start of control Start of control + When the temperature (PV) falls short of the set point for the PID con- stants when using AT or ST in normal mode, executing AT or ST in RT mode tends to improve performance. Temperature Temperature Set value |... Set value L-... Time À Time Start of control Start of control + When the manipulated variable (MV) is saturated, the amount of over- shooting may be somewhat higher in comparison to PID control based on AT or ST in normal mode. Operating Procedure This procedure selects RT mode. Operation Level 1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. TC 2 1 PV/SP BES ‘O00 Initial Setting Level 2. Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press- il À D ni 1 input Type ing the F2 Key. CO LN EL (al En 5 Initial Setting Level 3. Use the M1 Key to enter “-169” (the password). el — Move to Ad- = EMa } vanced Function Een n| Setting Level [ones ui Advanced Function Setting Level It is possible to move to the advanced function setting level by pressing Parameter the ©] Key or leaving the setting for at least two seconds. RECRUE BE L NL k Initialization Ées off Advanced Function Setting Level 4. Press the FA Key to select FE. OL RT

E LIN = OC 6 (asian Operation Level F” C5 [ei

5. Press the [A] Key to select a\. GFF is the default.

6. To return to the initial setting level, press the

ond. Key for at least one sec-

7. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key for at least one second.

PID constants can be manually and individually set in the Proportional Band (P), Integral Time (I), and Derivative Time (D) parameters, according to the Display PID Selection parameter set in the PID setting level. Changing the Proportional Band (P), Integral Time (l), or Derivative Time (D) parameter set- tings in the adjustment level changes the settings in the current PID set. For details on PID sets, refer to PID Sets on page 129. In this example, the PID 2 Proportional Band parameter is set to 10.0, the PID 2 Integral Time parameter to 250, and the PID 2 Derivative Time parameter to

1. Press the [O] Key to move from the operation level to the PID setting level.

2. Use the ES] and F1 Keys to set 2.

6. Use the ES and F1 Keys to set 250.0.

9. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key.

Note Proportional Action When PID constants | (integral time) and D (derivative time) are set to 0, con- trol is executed according to proportional action. As the default, the center value of the proportional band becomes the set point. Related parameter: Manual reset value (adjustment level) 3-9 Alarm Outputs + Alarm outputs are determined by a combination of Alarm Type, Alarm Value, and Alarm Hysteresis alarm output conditions. For details, refer to 4-2 Alarm Hysteresis. + This section describes the Alarm Type, Alarm Value, Upper-limit Alarm and Lower-limit Alarm parameters. 3-9-1 Alarm Types Set value Alarm type Alarm output operation When alarm value X | When alarm value X is positive is negative 0 Alarm function OFF Output OFF 1 Upper- and lower-limit See note 2. 2(Seenote Upper-limit où Xi où Xe

3 Lower-limit mixe mixe RE Ge = 1 4 (See note | Upper- and lower-limit où ibiH See note 3. 1.) range OFF + 5 (See note | Upper- and lower-limit où Lie See note 4.

1) with standby sequence | or là

H<OL>0 HeOL<0 1 p— H<ose IHI <IL] LE H LSP IHI21ILI H>0L<0 ar MU (4) Set value: 5 (Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence) - For the lower-limit alarms in cases 1 and 2 above, the alarm is always OFF if upper- and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. + In case 3, the alarm is always OFF. (5) Set value: 5 (Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence) - The alarm is always OFF if upper- and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. (6) Displayed when remote SP input is used. + Set the alarm type independently for each alarm in the Alarm 1 to 3 Type parameters in the initial setting level. The default is 2 (Upper-limit alarm).

Alarm Outputs Section 3-9 3-9-2 Alarm Values + Alarm values are indicated by “X” in the table on the previous page. When X e] IL Bank* Alarm Value the upper and lower limits are set independently, “H” is displayed for Lower Limit upper limit values, and “Lis displayed for lower limit values. 7 Gk: 0 to 7) - To set the alarm upper and lower limits for deviation, set the upper and

• AOL lower limits in the Alarm 1 to 3 Upper Limit and Alarm 1 to 3 Lower Limit parameters.
• AL + Alarm values can be set for each bank. Select the bank number in the Display Bank Selection parameter in the bank setting level, and set the & A TH Alarm Value Upper Alarm Value, Alarm Value Upper Limit (1 to 3), and Alarm Value Lower Limit Value Limit (1 to 3) parameters for that bank. nl C4: 0 to 7) + When the Alarm Value, Alarm Value Upper Limit, and Alarm Value Lower
• ACH Limit parameters in the operation level are changed, the changes will be reflected in those parameters for the current bank. *,A13H *k.# _ nl ns *A-0 #71 Operating Procedure This procedure sets alarm 1 for bank number 1 as an upper-limit alarm. The related parameters and settings are shown below. The alarm is output when the set point exceeds 10°C. (In this example, the temperature unit is °C.) Alarm 1 type = 2 (Upper-limit alarm) Bank 1 Alarm value 1 = 10 Initial Setting Level 1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. E - NL Input Type CO LN EL (al En 5 [=] n | Alarm 1 Type 2. Select the Alarm 1 Type parameter by pressing the Key. Confirm that = AL E fl the set value is 2. The default value is 2 (Upper-limit alarm). DID e [jee ET 0 PvP 3. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key for at least one second. E col Es (009 Bank Setting Level 4 Key to move to the bank setting level. E Display Bank E dit Selection Fes 8 Œ Nr 5. _ Use the ES] and F1 Keys to set 1. E dhN De nl (mimi) !

The change width can be found for PV input values in any set period. Differ- ences with previous values in each set period are calculated, and an alarm is output if the result exceeds the alarm value. The PV rate of change calculation period can be set in units of 60 ms. If a positive value is set for the alarm value, the PV will operate as a change rate alarm in the rising direction. If a negative value is set, the PV will operate as a change rate alarm in the falling direction. Precaution If a shorter PV rate of change calculation period is set, outputs set for the PV change rate alarm function may repeatedly turn ON and OFF for a short period of time. lt is therefore recommended that the PV change rate alarm be used with the alarm latch turned ON.

Time Alarm value ; Kw PV change width for PV rate of change calculation period ON | | ON OF OFF Alarm function Parameter name | Setting range Unit Default PV Rate of Change |1 to 999 Sampling cycle |17 Calculation Period (= 17 x 60 ms = 1,020 ms) RSP Absolute Upper Limit and RSP Absolute Lower Limit parameters were added for the E5AN-H and E5EN-H (with remote SP input). These parame- ters are used for a remote SP regardless of whether the SP mode is set to Remote SP or Local SP Mode.

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3-10 3-10 Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms 3-10-1 Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarm Operations + Heater burnout detection and heater overcurrent detection are executed by measuring heater current while the control output (heating) is ON, and heater short detection is executed by measuring heater current while it is OFF. For details, refer to the following table. (Heater burnout detection, heater short detection, and heater overcurrent detection cannot be used With the control output for cooling.) + These settings can be made for standard models only. Control output (heating) status Power to heater HB alarm HS alarm Heater overcurrent Control output Operation output output alarm output (heating) indicator ON Lit Yes (Normal) (See note 1.) | OFF — —— No (Heater burnout) ON — OFF Not lit Yes (HS alarm) —— ON — No (Normal) (See note 2.) |--- OFF — ON Lit Normal — — OFF Heater overcurrent status |- — ON (See note 3.) : Ton : Toff : !_ (See note 3.) : (See note ON H à H Control output (heating) OFF Note (1) In the above diagram, power is considered to be ON (normal) if the heater current is greater than the heater burnout detection current during the Ton interval. If the heater is burned out, the measured current decreases and falls below the heater burnout detection value. The output is then activat- ed as the heater burnout alarm. (2) In the above diagram, power is considered to be OFF (normal) if the leak- age current is less than the HS alarm current during the Toff interval. lf the SSR output is short-circuited, the measured current increases be- yond the HS alarm value. The output is then activated as the HS alarm. (3) In the above diagram, it is regarded as normal when the heater current is less than the heater overcurrent detection current during the Ton period. Current is increased when excessive current flows to the heater, causing the heater overcurrent detection value to be exceeded and an OC (heater overcurrent) alarm to be output. (4) Heater burnout and heater overcurrent are not detected if the control out- put (heating) ON time (Ton) is 100 ms or less. (5) HS alarms are not detected if the control output (heating) OFF time (Toff) is 100 ms or less.

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3-10 - For Controllers with heater burnout, HS, and heater overcurrent alarms, an OR output is established between the ALM 1 function and the alarms. Ifthe ALM1 function is to be used for the heater burnout, HS, and heater overcurrent alarms only, set 0 as the alarm 1 type (i.e., do not use ALM1).

• Turn the heater power ON simultaneously or before turning ON the ESCIN-H power. If the heater power is turned ON after turning ON the E5AN-H power, the HB alarm will be activated. + Control is continued even when the heater burnout, HS, or heater over- current alarm is active. + The rated current value may sometimes differ slightly from the actual cur- rent flowing to the heater. Use the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor, Heater Current 2 Value Monitor, Leakage Current 1 Monitor, and Leakage Current 2 Monitor parameters to check the actual current being used. - If there is little difference between the current in normal and abnormal states, detection may become unstable. To stabilize detection, set a cur- rent value difference of at least 1.0 A for heaters of less than 10.0 À, and at least 2.5 A for heaters of 10.0 A or more. If the heater current is too low, loop the load line several times through a CT, as shown in the diagram below. Looping it through once will double the detection current. 3-10-2 Installing Current Transformers (CT) - This function can be used with E5LIN-H models that have the HB alarm, HS alarm, and OC alarm. For the E5CN-H, connect the CT in advance to terminals 14 and 15 (CT1), or 13 and 15 (CT2). For the ESAN-H/EN-H, connect the CT in advance to terminals 14 and 15 (CT1) or 15 and 16 (CT2). Then pass the heater power line through the CT's hole. For specifications, models and dimensions of current transformers that can be used with this Controller, see Appendix Current Transformer (CT) on page 300. Single-phase Heaters For single-phase heaters, install the CT in the position shown in the following diagram. Load (such as a heater) AC line S Éte Product To CT input Three-phase Heaters When a 3-phase power supply is used, regardless of the types of connecting (ESLIN-HLILHHE] 3-phase lines, two current transformers (CTs) are required to detect heater burnout, Heater Detection Models) HS, and OC. # Delta connecting lines: Refer to the following diagram for CT installation positions. Note Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered here, so be take that into account when setting the detection current.

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3-10 Load (such as a heater) AC line Product To CT input AC line Product To CT input # Star connecting lines: Refer to the following diagram for CT installation positions. Note Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered here, so be take that into account when setting the detection current. AC line Product To CT input Product To CT input # V connecting lines: Refer to the following diagram for CT installation positions. Note Heater voltage fluctuations are not considered here, so be take that into account when setting the detection current. Product To CT input AC line Product To CT input 3-10-3 Calculating Detection Current Values + Calculate the set value using the following equation: Normal current value + Burnout current value Heater Burnout Detection 1/2 set value = 5 HS Alarm 1/2 set value = Leakage current value Joueur OFF) + HS current value Normal current value + Overcurrent value + To set the current for heater burnout when two or more heaters are con- nected through the CT, use the value from when the heater with the small- est current burns out. If all of the heaters have the same current, use the value from when any one of them burns out. Heater overcurrent 1/2 set value =

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3-10 + Make sure that the following conditions are satisfied: Heater with a current of less than 10.0 A: (Current value at normal operation) - (Current value at heater burnout) = When the difference is less than 1 A, detection is unstable. Heater with a current of 10.0 A or more: (Current value at normal operation) - (Current value at heater burnout) = 2.5A When the difference is less than 2.5 A, detection is unstable. The setting range is 0.1 to 49.9 A. Heater burnout, HS, and heater over- current are not detected when the set value is 0.0 or 50.0. When the set value is 0.0, the heater burnout alarm is always OFF, the HS alarm is always ON, and the heater overcurrent alarm is always ON. When the set value is 50.0, the heater burnout alarm is always ON, the HS alarm is always OFF, and the heater overcurrent alarm is always OFF. Set the total current value for normal heater operation to 50 A or less. When a current value of 55.0 A is exceeded, FFFF is displayed in the Heater Current 1 (or 2) Value Monitor and Leakage Current 1 (or 2) Moni- tor parameters. 3-10-4 Application Examples Single-phase Heaters Example: Using a 200-VAC, 1-kW Heater Normal Burnout 5 A AC line AC line 200 V Ÿ +5A 200V Burnout Ÿ oA EN CT CT Product ___ T Product _____T To CT input ——] To CT input ——] The heater power supply provides 5 À when the current is normal, and 0 A when there is a burnout, so the heater burnout detection current is calculated as follows: Load (such as a heater) (Normal current) + (Heater burnout current) Heater burnout detection current =

5+0 = = 2.6 [AI 2 [AI Example: Using Three 200-VAC, 1-KW Heaters Normal Burnout 15A— 10A 200v zo0v Pt Ÿ 54 A ÿ 104 out Product TT CT produet T7 CT To CT input | To CT input The heater power supply provides 15 A when the current is normal, and 10 A when there is a burnout, so the heater burnout detection current is calculated as follows:

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms

Heater burnout detection current = (Normal current) + (Heater burnout current)

= 15+10 _451a Three-phase Heaters Delta Connecting Lines Example: Using Three 200-VAC, 2-kW Heaters Normal

200 V À © Load} 200 V Product —T ÿ 47,3 A To CT input Product] To CT input The current when each phase is normal is 17.3 A (= V3 x 10 A). Burnout Burnout Burnout 10 A À À Burnout 200 V & Ç\ 200 V 15 | 200 V | e) Hal 200 V 17.3 A 200V Product —T 200V Product —T To CT input To CT input } EN Ÿ TA CT T0A CT Product I Product —T To CT input To CT input Current when there is a burnout = 10 À x V8 x (3/2) = 15 À Current when there is a burnout = 10 À x V3 x (143) =10 À The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load line is as fol- lows: (Heater burnout detection current) = (17.3 + 15) / 2 = 16.1 [A] The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load is as follows: (Heater burnout detection current) = (17.3 + 10) / 2 = 13.65 [A] To enable detection in either case, use 16.1 À as the heater burnout detection current.

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms

Load (such as a heater) 200 V Product To CT input

The current when each phase is normal is 5.8 A (= 10 A x (1 V3). Burnout Burnout 200 V Product __T Ÿ To CT input FA CT Product

To CT input Current when there is a burnout = 10 A x (1/V3) x (\3/2) = 5 À 5 A

To CT input Current when there is a burnout = 10 À x (1/13) x (N3/2) = 5 À The heater burnout detection current for this connecting line is 5.4 A (= (5.8 + 5)/2).

Product To CT input Burnout 5A— 10A— CS 7 7 E CT CT 200 V Product __T Co 200 V Product __] To CT input To CT input 200 V 200 V 200 V 200 V QN Burnout Ÿ 54 NN CT CT Product Product To CT input | To CT input Current when there is a burnout = 10 A x (1/2) Current when there is a burnout = 0 A =5A The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the common is as fol- lows: Heater burnout detection current = (10 + 5)/2=7.5 [A] The heater burnout current when there is a burnout at the load is as follows: Heater burnout detection current = (10 + 0)/2= 5 [A] To enable detection in either case, use 7.5 A as the heater burnout detection current.

Move to the advanced function setting level. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Select Move to Advanced Function Setting Level by pressing the ©) Key. (For details on moving between levels, refer to 4-8 Moving to the Ad- vanced Function Setting Level.) Press the F1 Key to enter the password (-169), and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level. The top parameter in the advanced function setting level is displayed. Select the Heater Burnout Detection parameter by pressing the F2 Key. Check that this parameter is set to ON (the default). Next, set the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter. # Setting Heater Burnout Detection Press the Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level. Press the at least one second to move to the operation level. Press the Key for less than one second to move from the operation level to the adjustment level. Select the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor parameter by pressing the Key. Check the current value. Next, set the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter. Select the Heater Burnout Detection 1 parameter by pressing the Le Key. Refer to Calculating Detection Current Values on page 73 on when mak- ing the settings.

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3-10

E AMar BES - 183 Advanced Functi on Setting Level Move to the Advanced Function Setting Level HS Alarm Use

Move to the advanced function setting level. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Select Move to Advanced Function Setting Level by pressing the ©) Key. (For details on moving between levels, refer to 4-8 Moving to the Ad- vanced Function Setting Level.) Press the F1 Key to enter the password (-169), and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level. The top parameter in the advanced function setting level is displayed. Select the HS Alarm Use parameter by pressing the E Key. Check that this parameter is set to ON (the default). Next, set the HS Alarm 1 parameter.

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3-10 HS Alarm Settings Operation Level 5. Press the Key for at least one second to move from the advanced = 25 Fi PvIsP function setting level tothe mie senng level Press the E LI at least one second to move to the operation level. Qc NN AE (LILI Adjustment Level 6. Press the Key for less than one second to move from the operation BE; 1] Adiustment Level level to the adjustment level. EL cl ui |Display (mm

3-10-7 Settings: Heater Overcurrent Alarm To activate heater overcurrent alarm, set the Heater Overcurrent Use parame- ter to ON in the advanced function setting level and set the Heater Overcur- rent Detection 1 and Heater Overcurrent Detection 2 parameters in the adjustment level. Operating Procedure This procedure sets the Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 parameter to 20.0. # Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level The default setting for the Heater Overcurrent Use parameter is ON, so set the Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 parameter. Operation Level 1. Move to the advanced function setting level. CB G Fr IPv/sP Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation E DS I level to the initial setting level. Qc NN

Initial Setting Level 2. Press the Fe Key to select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level RTE L Input Type parameter. (For details on moving between levels, refer to 4-8.) BE LIN En 5 Initial Setting Level 3. Press the M1 Key to enter the password (-169), and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level.

Using Heater Burnout, Heater Short, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms Section 3-10 Advanced Function Setting Level The top parameter in the advanced function setting level is displayed. = = Move to the N1 7 L | Advanced EL NL E Function EE _offF]|Settng Level [=] = jiHeater 4. Press the Key to select the Heater Overcurrent Use parameter. È aL 1 Overcurrent Check that this parameter is set to ON (the default), and then set the non ôN Use Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 parameter. ODD W # Setting Heater Overcurrent Detection Operation Level 5. Press the Key for at least one second to move from DE function setting level to the initial setting level. Press the ER ri t least dt toth tion level Ë 26.0 at least one second to move to the operation level. Es (00.9 Adjustment Level 6. Press the Key for less than one second to move from the operation BE 1] Adiustment Level level to the adjustment level. EL Adu Display [mm BE FL 1|Heater Current Press the Fe Key to select the Heater Current 1 Value Monitor parameter. E LL 1 Value Monitor Check the current value, and then set the Heater Overcurrent Detection ER uH parameter. [a] = Heater 8. Press the [ce] Key to select the Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 parameter. E £ ! Overcurrent Refer to Calculating Detection Current Values on page 73 when setting Bite CH Detection 1 the values. (mimi) LU ms] =r 9. For this example, set 20.0. To return to the operation level, press the E OL 1! Key for less than one second. ESS cn

Setting the No. 3 Display

3-11 Setting the No. 3 Display This section describes how to set the No. 3 Display (E5AN/EN-H). The bank No., MV, or soak time remain can be displayed on the No. 3 display. 3-11-1 PV/SP Display Selection Note MV Display for Heating and Cooling Control

The following table shows the set values and display contents for the PV/SP Display selection. Set value Display contents Only PV/SP is displayed (with no No. 3 display.) PV/SP/Bank No. and PV/SP/MV are displayed in order. (See note 2.) PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Bank No. are displayed in order. (See note 2.) Only PV/SP/Bank No. is displayed. Only PV/SP/MV is displayed. (See note 2.) PV/SP/Bank No. and PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed in order. ofuls[wln]-le PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed in order. (See note 2.) 7 Only PV/SP/Soak time remain is displayed. (1) The default setting is 4. (2) For details on setting the MV for heating and cooling control, refer to MV Display for Heating and Cooling Control below. The MV for position-pro- portional models becomes the value for opening the valve. When 1, 2, 5, or 6 is selected, press the el Key to display the next value set for the PV/SP display (display 2). Example: When the PV/SP Display Screen Parameter ls Set to 2 Operation Level PV/SP (Display 1) press the PV/SP (Display 2) BC ] 2T26E Cky ET250 ion —+ Inn n CH TOUL Don 6cnn! ES b9 Be 200 ===) n PVISP/MV PV/SP/Bank No. Select either the manipulated variable (heating) or manipulated variable (cool- ing) as the MV to be displayed for PV/SP/MV during heating and cooling con- trol. This parameter is displayed only when heating/cooling control is being performed and PV/SP/MV is selected in the PV/SP Display Screen parameter or a Monitor/Setting ltem Display parameter. This setting can be made for standard models only. Parameter name Set value Symbol Display contents MV Display Selection |O a Manipulated variable (heating) [ee] £-û Manipulated variable (cooling)

Setting the No. 3 Display

Operating Procedure Operation Level © 26 flPVSP Initial Setting Level Input Type Initial Setting Level =] = Move to = Ma] Advanced En - 169 Function Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level 5 ML] Parameter

[=] = Initialization GFF Don SES Advanced Function Setting Level =] PV/SP Display = SPdF Screen Selection

Operation Level € PV/SP ET 050 Operation Level 3° 26 piPvsP = LI Inn n DO% L9 Es] 0 This procedure displays PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Bank No. on the Process Value/Set Point display. The PV/SP Display Screen Selection parameter is set to 2.

Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Press the E Key to select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter. Use the M Key to enter the password (“-169”). It is possible to move to the advanced function setting level by either pressing the €] Key or waiting two seconds without pressing any key. Press the E Key to select the PV/SP Display Screen Selection parame- ter. Use the A] and M Keys to set 2. Press the Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level. The MV will be displayed on the No. 3 display. Press the © Key to confirm that the Bank No. is displayed on the No. 3

Setting the No. 3 Display Section 3-11

Shifting Input Values Section 4-1 4-1 Shifting Input Values 4-1-1 Shifting Inputs Either a 1-point shift or a 2-point shift can be used to shift the input. The default setting is for a 1-point shift. To execute a 2-point shift, change the Input Shift Type parameter setting (advanced function setting level) to INS2. There is no shift function for analog inputs. Use scaling for fine adjustments. One-point shift RTE | Temperature + With a 1-point shift, the value set for the Temperature Input Shift parame- LIN 5 Input Shift ter (adjusitment level) is applied to each point in the entire temperature input range. For example, if the input shift value is set to 1.2°C, the pro- cess value is treated as 201.2°C after the input shift is applied when the measured process value is 200°C. Temperature Upper limit À -------------- After shifting shiftin Input shift value Lower limit 5 > Input Operating Procedure In this example, the input from a K sensor is shifted by 1°C using a 1-point input shift. Operation Level Operation Level

E JU Per, 2000 Adjustment Level 1. Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level. =] Adjustment E: L Adi Level Display Den [esjenm ET pp Temperature 2. Select the Temperature Input Shift parameter by pressing the €] Key. E: L NS Input Shift Es 090 Dr = 8. Press the [A] or M1 Key to set 1.00. (= n £ E LIN] ESS 100 Operation Level 4. To return to the operation level, press the Key. The process value is TI 1°C larger than before the shift was applied. ge 71m E 11411 BE 200.0

Lower-limit temperature 100 input shift value 4-1-2 How to Calculate Input Shift Values for a 2-point Shift Offset the readout value using a 1-point or 2-point shift as described in this section. This offset occurs because a bias current for detecting a Controller sensor error flows to the output impedance of the infrared temperature sen- sor. Method for a 1-point Shift 1,2,3..

1. _Inthe configuration shown in Figure 1, bring the set point to near the value

at which the temperature of the control target is to be controlled. Assume that the control target temperature (C) and the thermometer temperature (B) are the same.

2. Check the control target temperature (B) and the Controller readout (A).

Subtract the Controller readout temperature (A) from the control target temperature (B), and set £ N5 as the input shift value to the result. The shift is illustrated in Figure 2.

control target temperature (B). If they are approximately the same, this completes setting the input shift. Figure 1 Controller readout (A) || (C) Control target After shifing Controller readout after shifing (8.9. 120°C) input shift value (6.9. 10°C) ‘ \ Z Controller readout before F------- ‘shifing (e.g.. 110°C) Before shifting {B) Thermometer Near set point Contral target temperature (8) eg. 1200) (A) ESCIN-H Figure 2 Illustration of 1-Point Shift Method for a 2-point Use a 2-point input shift if you want to increase the accuracy of the readout Shift values across the range of the Sensor. 1,2,3... 1. Shiftthe Controller readout at two points, near room temperature and near the value at which the temperature of the control target is to be controlled. For this reason, check the thermometer temperature (B) and Controller readout (A) with the thermometer temperature near room temperature and near the set point. + Ytis the Controller readout at room temperature before shifting and X1 is the Controller readout at room temperature after shifting. + Y2is the Controller readout at the set temperature before shifting and X2 is the Controller readout at the set temperature after shifting. + Set the upper-limit temperature input shift and the lower-limit temper- ature input shift using the following formulas based on the tempera- tures before shifting (Y1 and Y2), the temperatures after shifting (X1 and X2), the set temperature upper limit (YH), and the set temperature lower limit (YL). The shift is illustrated in Figure 3. After shifting Upper-limit temperature input [7 shift value (e.g., 52.7°C) LNSH ‘Before shifting Controller readout (A) YH: Set temperature upper limit {e.g., 260°C) |. X2: Controller readout after shifting {e.g. 110°C) Y2: Controller readout before shifting 4 (eg. 105°C) | Y1: Controller readout before shiftin | e.g., 40°C) Ti. i X1: Controller readout after shifting (0.9. 25°C) Le i Lower-limit temperature input CC 260°C shift value (e.g. -27.3°C) AS 0 AU 6020 * X2: Near set point (e.g., 110°C) Control target temperature (B) YL: Set temperature lower limit (e-g. 0°C) Figure 3 Illustration of 2-Point Shift

3. After setting the calculated values to &N5L and £N5H, check the Digital

Controller readout (A) and thermometer temperature (B).

4. Here, offsets are set at two points, near room temperature and near the set

point. To improve accuracy within the measurement temperature range, another point in the measurement temperature range other than the set point should be set instead of room temperature. Example of a 2-point In this example, a K thermocouple from -200.0 to 1,300.0°C is used. In equa- Temperature Input tions 1 and 2, the set temperature lower limit YL is -200°C and the set tem- Shift perature upper limit YH is 1,300°C. Check the temperature of the control target. The temperature input offset values can be calculated as shown below when the Digital Controller readout Y1 is 35°C for a room temperature X1 of 25°C and when the Digital Controller readout Y2 is 105°C for a set point tempera- ture X2 of 110°C. Lower-limit Temperature Input Shift Value Et - Lower-limit L _o00 EL NGL Temperature cNGe = =200 35, {110 105) - (25 - 35)} + (25 — 85) = -60.35 (°C) cn 20 Input Shift 105-35 es -69.35 Value … | Upper-limit Temperature Input Shift Value ET - Upper-limit [en] Lyl | LP EL NN aan CNGH = 00 {110 - 105) - (25 — 35)) + (25 - 35) = 261.07 (°C) Es25 1010Niue 105 - 35 BD D 1.1 (| Value 4-2 Alarm Hysteresis + The hysteresis of alarm outputs when alarms are switched ON/OFF can ET nor [Lower-imit be set as follows: D LIN IL | Temperature EE. 27 Input Shift === !:1/Value Alarm hysteresis Alarm hysteresis ON ------- ON OFF à OFF à Alarm value Alarm value + Alarm hysteresis is set independently for each alarm in the Alarm Hyster- esis 1 to Alarm Hysteresis 3 parameters (initial setting level). - The default is 0.2 (°C/°F) when a temperature input is selected, and 0.02% FS when an analog input is selected. 4-2-1 Standby Sequence + The standby sequence can be used so that an alarm will not be output until the process value leaves the alarm range once and then enters it again.

Alarm Hysteresis Section 4-2 + For example, with a lower limit alarm, the process value will normally be below the set point, i.e., within the alarm range, when the power supply is turned ON, causing an alarm to be output. If the lower limit alarm with a standby sequence is selected, an alarm will not be output until the process value increases above the alarm set value, i.e., until it leaves the alarm range, and then falls back below the alarm set value. Restart - The standby sequence is canceled when an alarm is output. It is, how- ever, restarted later by the Standby Sequence Reset parameter (advanced function setting level). For details, refer to the Standby Sequence Reset parameter in SECTION 5 Parameters. 4-2-2 Alarm Latch - The alarm latch can be used to keep the alarm output ON until the latch is canceled regardless of the temperature once the alarm output has turned ON. Any of the following methods can be used to clear the alarm latch. - Turn OFF the power supply. (The alarm latch is also cleared by switching to the initial setting level, communications setting level, advanced function setting level, or calibration level.) + Use the PF Key. + Use an event input. For details on setting the PF Key, refer to 4-20 Setting the PF Key. For details on setting events, refer to 4-5 Using Event Inputs. Summary of Alarm The following figure summarizes the operation of alarms when the Alarm Type Operation parameter is set to “lower-limit alarm with standby sequence” and “close in alarm” is set. Alarm type: Lower-limit alarm with standby sequence PV. Alarm value » |---"- "tp 4 Alarm hysteresis à Time Standby sequence canceled _-- ON Alarm OFF - ON (closed) Output OFF (open) Parameters Symbol Parameter: level Description ALH* Alarm 1 to 3 Hysteresis: Initial setting level Alarm RESE Standby Sequence: Advanced function setting level Alarm Note *= {to

Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits for Analog Inputs Section 4-3 4-3 Setting Scaling Upper and Lower Limits for Analog Inputs 4-3-1 Analog Input + When an analog input is selected, scaling can be performed as needed by the control application. Scalino L Limit” Scaling is set in the Scaling Upper Limit, Scaling Lower Limit, and Deci- — L calng Lower Lim mal Point parameters (initial setting level). These parameters cannot be used when a temperature input is selected. + The Scaling Upper Limit parameter sets the physical quantity to be expressed by the upper limit value of input, and the Scaling Lower Limit parameter sets the physical quantity to be expressed by the lower-limit value of input. The Decimal Point parameter specifies the number of digits below the decimal point. - The following figure shows a scaling example for a 4 to 20-mV analog input. After scaling, the temperature can be directly read. The decimal point is set to 1. Ni H Scaling Upper Limit (] Decimal Point

Display (humidity) [Upper limit (95.0%) Lower limit (10.0%) | i Input (mA) Operating Procedure In this example scaling is set to display 4 to 20 mA as 10.0% to 95.0%. Initial Setting Level 1. Press the [O] Key for three seconds to move from the operation level to — j1 LL linput Type the initial setting level. E LINE EEE 5 ES = 2. Press the [A] and F1 Keys to set 25. SE NL BE LINL BEs 25 BE = Scaling Upper 3. Select Scaling Upper Limit parameter by pressing the € Key. BE LIN -H Limit Es in

Executing Heating/Cooling Control Section 4-4

8. Press the [Al and F1 Keys to set 1.

9. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key for one second.

4-4 Executing Heating/Cooling Control 4-4-1 Heating/Cooling Control Example: E5CN-H Heating/cooling control operates when H-£ (heating/cooling) is selected for the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter for standard models. The follow- ing functions are assigned to outputs by default. Parameter name Symbol Initial status Control Output 1 Assignment out ! Control output for heating Control Output 2 Assignment aùte Not assigned. Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Süb ! Alarm 1 Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment SUB Alarm 2 Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment ENCE] Alarm 3 (ESAN/EN-H only) Each output assignment is automatically initialized as shown below when the control mode is changed. Parameter name Symbol Without control output 2 With control output 2 Standard Heating/cooling Standard Heating/cooling Control Output 1 oùt Control output Control output Control output Control output Assignment (heating) (heating) (heating) (heating) Control Output 2 oùte Not assigned. (See | Not assigned. (See | Not assigned. Control output (coo- Assignment note 1.) note 1.) ing) Auxiliary Output 1 Süb! Alarm 1 (See note |Alarm 1 (See note |Alarm 1 (See note | Alarm 1 (See note Assignment 2.) 2.) 2.) 2.) Auxiliary Output 2 Sübe Alarm 2 Control output (coo- | Alarm 2 Alarm 2 Assignment ing) Note (1) No parameter assignment is displayed because there is no control output (2) The output set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter becomes the program END output unless the program pattern is OFF. + The heating/cooling operation of the control outputs will switch when the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter is set to “direct.” + When DRS (Invert Direct/Reverse Operation) is assigned for an Event Input Assignment (1 to 4), control will start with the contents set for the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter inverted when the event input turns ON, and with the contents left according to the setting when the event input turns OFF. For details on event inputs and control combined with the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter, refer to Control by Inverting Direct/ Reverse Operation on page 99.

Executing Heating/Cooling Control Section 4-4 + When heating/cooling control is selected, the Dead Band and Cooling Coefficient parameters can be used. Dead Band + For heating/cooling control, the dead band is set with the set point as its center. The dead band width is the set value of the Dead Band parameter (adjustment level). Setting a negative value produces an overlapping band. + If an overlapping band is set, the bumpless function may not operate when switching between manual operation and automatic operation. + The default is 0.0 EU for a temperature input and 0.00% FS for an analog input. Dead band: Dead band Overlapping dead band: Dead Output L,Widih = À positive value Output L, band width = À negative value Heating Cooling Heating Cooling side side side side 6 + PV ë + PV Set point Set point Cooling Coefficient If the heating characteristics and cooling characteristics of the control object are very different and good control characteristics cannot be achieved with the same PID constants, the cooling coefficient can be used to adjust the propor- tional band (P) for the control output assigned to the cooling side. Use this to achieve balanced control between the heating side and cooling side. The pro- portional bands (P) for the control outputs assigned to the heating/cooling sides can be calculated using the following equations. P for control output assigned to heating side = P P for control output assigned to cooling side = P for control output assigned to heating side x cooling coefficient The cooling coefficient is multiplied by the P for the control output assigned to the heating side to obtain control with characteristics that differ from those of the control output assigned to the heating side. A cooling coefficient can be set for each PID set. To set the cooling coefficient, select the PID set number in the Display PID Selection parameter (PID setting level) and then set the Cooling Coefficient parameter. lf the Cooling Coeffi- cient parameter setting is changed in the adjustment level, the change will be reflected in the Cooling Coefficient parameter for the current PID set. Output Output P for control output | assigned to heat. ”P for control output P ing side x 1.0 assigned to heat- ing side x 1.0 P for control output LP for control output P for control output _47P for control output assigned to heating side assigned to cooling side assigned to heating side assigned to cooling side ë 7 PV ë < PV Set point P for control output assigned to P for control output assigned to heating side x 0.8 heating side x 1.5

Executing Heating/Cooling Control Section 4-4 Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjustment Note 4-4-2 Settings By executing AT during heating/cooling control, the cooling coefficient can be automatically calculated along with the PID parameters. Parameter name Setting rage Default Automatic Cooling Coef- | OFF: Disabled, ON: Enabled |OFF ficient Adjustment If there is strong non-linear gain for the cooling characteristics, such as when cooling water boils for cooling control, it may not be possible to obtain the opti- mum cooling coefficient at the Controller, and control may take the form of oscillating waves. If that occurs, increase the proportional band or the cooling coefficient to improve control. To set heating/cooling control, set the Standard or Heating/Cooling, Dead Band, and Cooling Coefficient parameters. Setting Heating/Cooling Control Operating Procedure Initial Setting Level E C_ur Standard or E Heating/ [= + IL Cooling Standard or heating/cooling = Heating/cooling Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Select “heating/cooling control” in the initial setting level. SENd: Standard control H-£: Heating/cooling control Setting the Cooling Coefficient Operating Procedure PID Setting Level =] - Display PID E: dPL d selection 1 | PID1 Cooling 1 | Coefficient

Setting the Dead Band Operating Procedure Adjustment Level OT Dead Band [RE EL-dh BEs _00

Press the [0] Key to move from the operation level to the PID setting level. The current PID set number will be displayed. Use the or M1 Key to select 1.

2. Select the PID1 Cooling Coefficient parameter by pressing the F2 Key.

3. Press the [AI and F1 Keys to set 10.00.

Using Event Inputs Section 4-5 4-5 Using Event Inputs 4-5-1 Event Input Settings + Depending on the Controller, there are either two event inputs (event inputs 1 and 2 or 3 and 4) or four event inputs (event inputs 1 to 4). The number of event inputs that can be used varies. (Only the ESAN/EN-H has event inputs 3 and 4.) Event inputs can be used for Bank Selection, RUN/STOP, Auto/Manual Switch, Program Start, Direct/Reverse Operation, SP Mode Switch (ESAN/EN-H only), 100% AT Execute/Cancel, 40% AT Execute/Cancel, Setting Change Enable/Disable, Communications Write Enable/Disable, and Alarm Latch Cancel. Of these, only the number of event inputs (0 to 3) set in the Bank Num- bers Used parameter (initial setting level) are used for the bank selection function. Event inputs (1 to 4) that are not used for the bank selection function are assigned using the Event Input Assignment (1 to 4) parameters (initial setting level). Event inputs can be used on the following models: Two Event Inputs; E5CN-HLIML1-500 with the E53-CNCIBLIN2 for the E5CN-H E5AN/EN-HUIBLIML-500 for the ESAN/EN-H Four Event Inputs; E5AN/EN-HCIBLIML-500 with the E53-AKB for the E5SAN/EN-H When using event inputs for bank selection, the event input assignment screen will not be displayed. Whether the set value and event input assignments 1 to 4 will be displayed or hidden is shown in the tables below. + Do not connect the contacts from the same switch for more than one ES IN Controllers. Controllers with Event Inputs 1 and 2 (Two Event Inputs) Event input assignment 1 | Event input assignment 2 Bank Numbers Used | 0 |Displayed (Bank selection not used.) 1 |'Hidden (Bank, 2 points) Displayed (Event input 2 not used for bank selection.) 2 | Hidden (Bank, 4 points) Controllers with Event Inputs 3 and 4 (Two Event Inputs) Event input assignment 3 | Event input assignment 4 Bank Numbers Used | 0 |Displayed (Bank selection not used.) 1 |'Hidden (Bank, 2 points) Displayed (Event input 4 not used for bank selection.) 2 |Hidden (Bank, 4 points)

Using Event Inputs Section 4-5 Controllers with Event Inputs 1 to 4 (Four Event Inputs) Event input assignment | assignment

Displayed (Bank selection not used.) Hidden (Bank, | Displayed (Event inputs 2 to 4 not used for 2 points) bank selection.) Hidden (Bank, 4 points) Event input | Event input assignment

Event input assignment

Bank Numbers Used Displayed (Event input 3 and 4 not used for bank selection.) Displayed (Event input 4 not used for bank selec- tion.) Hidden (Bank, 8 points) The following table shows the relation between ON/OFF combinations of event inputs and the banks that are selected. Bank Event No. Bank No. Numbers Used 1 Event input 1 (See OFF | ON | -- —— — — | note 1.) 2 Event input 1 (See OFF | ON |OFF| ON - — | — e note 1.) Event input 2 (See OFF |OFF| ON | ON - — | note 2.) 3 Event input 1 OFF | ON |OFF| ON |OFF| ON | OFF | ON Event input 2 OFF |OFF| ON | ON |OFF|OFF| ON | ON Event input 3 OFF |OFF |OFF|OFF| ON | ON | ON | ON Note (1) For models with event inputs 3 and 4, this becomes event input 3. (2) For models with event inputs 3 and 4, this becomes event input 4. To set two banks are externally, make the setting in the Bank Numbers Used parameter. + Switching is possible between two banks (0 and 1) by setting the Bank Numbers Used parameter to 1. The default setting is 1 and does not need to be changed. Banks 0 and 1 are specified by the status of event input 1 or 3. (®) evs | + EV3 (@) EV. &A ou Two Additional Event Inputs: E53-AKB in E5AN/EN- ESAN/EN-H

4-5-2 Operation Commands Other than Bank Selection Note Executing Run/Stop Control Switching between Auto and Manual Control

The following table shows the functions assigned when an Event Input Assignment (1 to 4) is displayed. Setting Function NanE None SkoP RUN/STOP MANU Auto/Manual PRSE Program Start (See note 1.) dRS Invert Direct/Reverse Operation RGP SP Mode Switch (See note 2.) RE -e 100% AT Execute/Cancel RE- 1 40% AT Execute/Cancel (See note 3.) HEPE Setting Change Enable/Disable CAN Communications Write Enable/Disable (See note 4.) LAE Alarm Latch Cancel (1) PRST (Program Start) can be set even when the Program Pattern param- eter is set to OFF, but the function will be disabled. (2) This function can be selected only with models that support remote SP. (3) This function can be set for heating/cooling control, but the function will be disabled. (4) This function can be selected only with models that support communica- tions. Also, when a work bit is selected as event input data, Communica- tions Write Enable/Disable parameter cannot be selected. When any of the following functions is set for an Event Input Assignment parameter, the same function cannot be set for another Event Input Assign- ment parameter: STOP (RUN/STOP), MANU (Auto/Manual Switch), PRST (Program Start), DRS (Direct/Reverse Operation), RSP (SP Mode Switch), AT-2 (100% AT Execute/Cancel), AT-1 (40% AT Execute/Cancel), WTPT (Set- ting Change Enable/Disable), CMWT (Communications Write Enable/Dis- able), or LAT (Alarm Latch Cancel). Turn event inputs ON and OFF while the power is being supplied. Event input ON/OFF changes are detected for inputs of 50 ms or longer. (However, inputs of 250 ms or longer is determined using logic operation.) The functions are described in detail below. Event inputs 1 and 2 are taken as examples. When using event inputs 3 and 4, substitute event input 8 for event input 1 and event input 4 for event input 2. When the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter is set to STOP (RUN/STOP), control is started when event input 1 or 2 turns OFF. Control is stopped when the input turns ON. Alarm outputs, however, will be according to the process value. The STOP indicator will light while control is stopped. Setting Input contact Status Event input 1 or 2 ON STOP Event input 1 or 2 OFF RUN When the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter is set to MANU (auto/manual), manual control will start when event input 1 or 2 turns ON. Auto control will start when the input turns OFF.

Controlling the Start of the Simple Program Function Control by Inverting Direct/Reverse Operation Switching SP Mode Switching 100% AT Execute/Cancel Switching 40% AT Execute/Cancel The MANU indicator will light during manual control. Setting Input contact Status Event input 1 or 2 OFF Automatic Event input 1 or 2 ON Manual When the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter is set to PRST (program start), the program will start when event input 1 or 2 turns ON. The program will be reset when the input turns OFF and the RUN/ STOP status will automatically switch to STOP mode. If the program END out- put is ON, the program END output will turn OFF. Setting Input contact Status Event input 1 or 2 OFF Reset Event input 1 or 2 ON Start When DRS (Invert Direct/Reverse Operation) is set for the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter and the Direct/Reverse Operation parameter is set for reverse operation, control starts with direct operation (cooling control) when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and control starts with reverse operation (heating control) when the event input turns OFF. Setting Input Direct/Reverse Operation Status contact parameter Event input |OFF Direct operation (cooling) Direct operation (cooling) 1or2 Reverse operation (heating) | Reverse operation (heating) Event input |ON Direct operation (cooling) Reverse operation (heating) 1or2 Reverse operation (heating) | Direct operation (cooling) When RSP (SP Mode Switch) is set for either the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter, operation will be started with remote SP when event input 1 or 2 turns ON. Operation will start with local SP when the input turns OFF. The RSP operation indicator will light while in remote SP mode. Setting Input contact Status Event input 1 or 2 OFF Local SP Event input 1 or 2 ON Remote SP When AT-2 (100% AT Execute/Cancel) is set for either the Event Input Assign- ment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter, 100% AT will be executed when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and will be cancelled when the input turns OFF. Status 100% AT cancelled 100% AT executed Setting Input contact Event input 1 or 2 OFF Event input 1 or 2 ON When AT-1 (40% AT Execute/Cancel) is set for either the Event Input Assign- ment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter, 40% AT will be executed when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and will be cancelled when the input turns OFF. Status 40% AT cancelled 40% AT executed Setting Input contact Event input 1 or 2 OFF Event input 1 or 2 ON

Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values

Switching Setting Change Enable/ Disable Switching Communications Write Enable/Disable Switching Alarm Latch Cancel Parameters When WTPT (Setting Change Enable/Disable) is set for either the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter, the setting change will be disabled when event input 1 or 2 turns ON and will be enabled when the input turns OFF. Setting Input contact Status Event input 1 or 2 OFF Enabled Event input 1 or2 ON Disabled Only event inputs 3 and 4 can be set to Communications Write Enable/Dis- able. When CMWT (Communications Write Enable/Disable) is set for either the Event Input Assignment 3 or Event Input Assignment 4 parameter, communi- cations writing will be enabled when event input 3 or 4 turns ON and will be disabled when the input turns OFF. Setting Input contact Status Event input 3 or 4 OFF Disabled Event input 3 or 4 ON Enabled When LAT (Alarm Latch Cancel) is set for either the Event Input Assignment 1 or Event Input Assignment 2 parameter, all alarm latches (alarms 1 to 8, heater burnout, HS alarm, and heater overcurrent latch) will be cancelled when event input 1 or 2 turns ON. Setting Input contact Status Event input 1 or 2 OFF — Event input 1 or 2 ON Cancelled Symbol Parameter: level Description E-1 Event Input Assignment 1: Initial setting level Function of EY-2 Event Input Assignment 2: Initial setting level event input func- EY-3 Event Input Assignment 3: Initial setting level Er -4 Event Input Assignment 4: Initial setting level EY-b Bank Numbers Used: Initial setting level 4-6 Setting the SP Upper and Lower Limit Values 4-6-1

Set Point Limiter The setting range of the set point is limited by the set point limiter. The set point limiter is used to prevent the control target from reaching abnormal tem- peratures. The upper- and lower-limit values of the set point limiter are set using the Set Point Upper Limit and Set Point Lower Limit parameters in the initial setting level. When the set point limiter is reset, the set point is forcibly changed to the upper- or lower-limit value of the set point limiter if the set point is out of the limiter range. Also, when the input type and the temperature unit, scaling upper-limit value, or lower-limit value are changed, the set point limiter is forcibly reset to the input setting range or the scaling upper- or lower-limit value.

Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate Section 4-7 Setting the Set Point Lower-limit Value Operating Procedure n 1 [Set Point ETh — 1 [Lower Limit Set Point Lower Limit = -100

4-7 Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate 4-7-1

SP Ramp The SP ramp function is used to restrict the width of changes in the set point as a rate of change. When the SP ramp function is enabled and the change width exceeds the specified rate of change, an area where the set point is restricted will be created, as shown in the following diagram. During the SP ramp, control will be performed not for the specified set point but rather for the set point restricted by the rate of change set for the SP ramp function.

SP after change k- amp _ SP ramp set value [SP ramp time unit (s/min)} SP before change Time Point of change The rate of change during SP ramp is specified using the SP Ramp Set Value and SP Ramp Time Unit parameters. The SP Ramp Set Value parameter is set to OFF by default, i.e., the SP ramp function is disabled. The SP Ramp Set Value parameter can be set for each bank. Select the bank number in the Display Bank Selection parameter (bank setting level), and then set the SP Ramp Set Value parameter. Also, the ramp set point for the current bank can be monitored in the Set Point During SP Ramp parameter (opera- tion level). Use this parameter when monitoring SP ramp operation. If the SP Ramp Set Value parameter setting is changed in the adjustment level, the change will be reflected in the SP Ramp Set Value parameter for the current bank. The SP ramp function is enabled even when switching from local SP to remote SP, and the SP ramp will operate.

Using the SP Ramp Function to Limit the SP Change Rate

Parameters Symbol Parameter: level Description *GLA (=: 110 8) *BLL (x: 10 8) SL-H SE-L «SPF (x: 0 to 7) SPRÈ ALSP *SGR (x: 0 to 7) To limit the manipulated variable To limit the manipulated variable To limit the SP setting To limit the SP setting To limit the SP rate of change Unit for setting the SP Alarm SP selection Setting the SP ramp PID* MV Upper Limit: PID setting level PID* MV Lower Limit: PID setting level Set Point Upper Limit: Initial setting level Set Point Lower Limit: Initial setting level Bank* SP Ramp Set Value: Bank setting level SP Ramp Time Unit: Advanced function setting level Alarm SP Selection: Advanced function setting level Bank* SP Ramp Set Value: Bank setting level Operation at Startup Restrictions during SP Ramp Operation If the SP ramp function is enabled when the Controller is turned ON or when switching from STOP to RUN mode, the process value reaches the set point using the SP ramp function in the same way as when the set point is changed. In this case, operation is carried out with the process value treated as the set point before the change was made. The direction of the SP ramp changes according to the relationship between the process value and the set point. PV<SP PV>SP SP ramp

Power ON Power ON + Execution of auto-tuning starts after the end of the SP ramp. + When control is stopped or an error occurs, the SP ramp function is dis- abled.

Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level Section 4-8 Alarms during SP The operation of alarms during SP ramp operation depends on whether Ramp Operation alarms are set to be based on the ramp set point or the target set point (refer to the following diagrams). The set point to be used is set in the Alarm SP Selection parameter. Alarm SP Selection = Ramp SP (Alarm Type: 1 (Upper/Lower Limits)) Temperature Alarm output ON Alarm output ON Time Alarm SP Selection = Target SP (Alarm Type: 1 (Upper/Lower Limits)) Temperature Alarm output ON Alarm output ON Time 4-8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level Use the following procedure to move to the advanced function setting level. 1,2,3... 1. Press the [O] and Keys simultaneously for at least three seconds in op- eration level. Note The key pressing time can be changed in the Move to Protect Level Time parameter (advanced function setting level). Protect Level 2. The Controller moves to the protect level, and the Operation/Adjustment ETTE Operation/Adjust- Protect parameter is displayed. E OT I | ment Protect ne ni (mimi) El BE —[r {Qu |Initial Setting/ 8. Press the £el Key once to move to the Initial Setting/Communications Pro- E LLT E Communica- tect parameter. EE. n|tions Protect (mimi) ui BE — 4. Setthe set value to 0. The default setting is O (possible to reach). S rOL ELLE ne ni (mimi) El

Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level Section 4-8 Operation Level Initial Setting Level

Initial Setting Level Diner

10. To return to the operation level, press the

and ©) Keys simultaneously for at least one second to re- turn to the operation level. Move to the advanced function setting level. Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press- ing the 2 Key. Press the Key, enter the password (-169), and then either press the E Key or leave the setting for at least two seconds to move to the ad- vanced function setting level from the initial setting level. To return to the initial setting level, press the [0] Key for at least one sec- ond. Key for at least one second.

Using the Key Protect Level Section 4-9 4-9 Using the Key Protect Level 4-9-1 Protection + To move to the protect level, press the [O] and) Keys simultaneously for at least three seconds in operation level or adjustment level. (See note.) Note The key pressing time can be changed in the Move to Protect Level Time parameter (advanced function setting level). + The protect level protects parameters that are not changed during Con- troller operation until operation is started to prevent them from being mod- ified unintentionally. There are four types of protection: operation/adjustment protect, initial setting/communications protect, setting change protect, and PF Key pro- tect. + The protect level settings restrict the range of parameters that can be used. Operation/Adjustment The following table shows the relationship between set values and the range Protect of protection. BE z Level Set value (= OL E Qi L 0 1 2 3 === ü Operation [PV [Canbediss [Canbedis |Canbedis- |Canbe dis- level played played played played PV/SP |Can be dis- |Canbe dis- |Canbe dis- |Can be dis- played and played and played and played changed changed changed Others | Can be dis- Can be dis- Cannot be Cannot be played and played and displayed and | displayed and changed changed moving to moving to other levels is | other levels is not possible … | not possible Adjustment level Can be dis- Cannot be Cannot be Cannot be played and displayed and | displayed and | displayed and changed moving to moving to moving to other levels is | other levels is | other levels is not possible | not possible | not possible + Parameters are not protected when the set value is set to O. + The default is O. Initial Setting/ This protect level restricts movement to the initial setting level, communica- Communications tions setting level, and advanced function setting level. Protect Set Initial setting level Communications Advanced function 5 -r0OL value _ setting level setting level BE LLTE 0 Possible to reach Possible to reach Possible to reach em] 0 1 Possible to reach Possible to reach Not possible to reach 2 Not possible to reach Not possible to reach Not possible to reach Setting Change Protect

+ The default is O. This protect level restricts key operations. Set value Description OFF Settings can be changed using key operations. ON Settings cannot be changed using key operations. (The protect level settings, however, can be changed.)

Using the Key Protect Level Section 4-9 + The default is OFF. + The all protect indication (Om) will light when setting change protect is set. PF Key Protect This protect level enables or disables PF Key operations. BE OCOL Set value Description E ! Dr E OFF PF Key enabled. ED 0’ F ON PF Key disabled (Operation as function key prohibited). + The default is OFF. 4-9-2 Entering the Password to Move to the Protect Level + Protect level can be moved to only by display the password display and entering the correct password. (The user can set any password in the Protect Level Password parameter. If no password is set (i.e., if the pass- word is set to O in the Protect Level Password parameter), the password input display to move to protect level will not be displayed and the protect level can be moved to directly. Operating Procedure Use the following procedure to move to protect level. EH Example with a Password of 1234 Operation Level DT PV/SP E un 1 E LIU BEs 'O00 Protect Level 1. Press the [O] and Keys simultaneously for at least the time set in the E cm = 17 [Move to Protect Move to Protect Level Time parameter to move from the operation level E: TI CLS Level to the protect level. BE ü E omM=1r 2. Press the [A Key to set the parameter to 1234 (password input). El It Es 234 Protect Level 3. Move to the Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter by pressing th: E = ox | Operation/Adjust- or Fe] Key or leaving the setting for at least two seconds. ES © A! Î | ment Protect E Jon ul (een) El M Example with No Password Set Operation Level ET nr PvISP E col = £ nn Es (OU Protect Level Press the and Keys simultaneously for at least the time set in the B = oo lOperation/Adust- Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter to move from the operation level to SO O1 L |ment Protect the protect level. Een le When a password is not set, the Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter sas) “ will be displayed.

Using the Key Protect Level Section 4-9 Setting the Password Operating Procedure Use the following procedure to set the password to move to the protect level. M Example To set the Password to 1234 Operation Level OT PV/SP Ë C5 Fes (00.9 Protect Level 1. Press the [O] and Keys simultaneously for at least the time set in the E = DL |Operation/Adjust- Move to Protect Level Time parameter to move from the operation level | QI LE |ment Protect to the protect level. DID ul (ei im} u Protect Level 2. Select the Password to Move to Protect Level parameter by pressing the Key. (a Password to (=. PRL PF move to Protect = Level Der ni (mimi) El E on 1 3. Press the [0] and A] Keys to set the parameter to 1234. a] PRE P (To prevent setting the password incorrectly, the Æ and [O] Keys or Be 1234 and Keys must be pressed simultaneously to set the password.) Note Protection cannot be cleared or changed without the password. Be careful not to forget it. If you forget the password, contact your OMRON sales representative. Communications - The Write Variable operation command can be used via communications Operation Command to write the password to the Move to Protect Level parameter. When the to Move to the Protect correct password is written, the display will change to the Operation/ Level Adjustment Protect parameter and writing the parameters in the protect level will be enabled. Note (1) Ifthe Write Variable operation command is used to write the wrong pass- word to the Move to Protect Level parameter after the correct parameter has been written, the Move to Protect Level parameter will be displayed and any Write Variable operation commandés to write parameters in the protect level will result in operation errors. (2) If a password is not set or if it is set to O, the display will change to the Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter and writing the parameters in the protect level will be enabled immediately.

PV Change Color Section 4-10 4-10 PV Change Color 4-10-1 PV Color Change Function Use the PV color change function to change the color of the PV display (No. 1 display). There are three display colors, orange, red, and green, and you can select from the following three modes and eight functions. F 21 re] PV Change + Constant: This mode displays orange, red, or green all the time. LULIT |Color + Linked to Alarm 1: This mode switches the PV display color from red to green when alarm 1 turns ON or from green to red when alarm 1 turns ON. + Linked to PV stable band: This mode switches the PV display color between red outside the PV stable band and green within PV stable band, or between green outside the PV stable band and red within PV stable band. Set the PV stable band in the PV Stable Band parameter (advanced func- tion setting level). + The default is FEd (red). The following tables shows the display functions that can be set using the PV color change function. Mode Setting Function PV change color Application example Constant |of£ Orange Constant: Orange To match the display color with other Controller models FREd Red Constant: Red To match the display color with other Controller models CRN Green Constant: Green To match the display color with other Controller models Linked to Alarm alarm 1 : value + > ALMA lit > PV

ALM1 not lit ALMA lit Application example R-& Red to Green Red Green To display the PV reached sig- nal G-R Green to Red Green Red To display error signals Linked to PV PV PV stable stable ; stable band ; band : band Low ! Within High i : PV

Low Within PV stable | High Application example band R-CR Red to Green to | Red Green Red To display stable status Red G-af Green to Green Orange Red To display stable status Orange to Red o-0R Orange to Orange Green Red To display stable status Green to Red

When the mode to link to the PV stable band is selected, the PV display color Will change according to whether the present value (PV) is lower than, within, or higher than the PV stable band shown in the following figure. The PV stable band is set with the SP as the center, as shown below. ; PV stable ; PV stable ; j band band

The default is 5.0 (°C/°F) for a temperature input and 5.0% FS for an analog input. To display the PV in a stable green display when the PV is within +15.0°C of the set point to enable checking the control process at a glance, set the PV Change Color and PV Stable Band parameters. PV change color = F-G8 (Red to Green to Red) PV stable band = 15.0°C Release the protection before setting the PV Change Color and PV Stable Band parameters to enable moving to advanced function setting level. (Refer to steps 1 to 8 on page 104.) PV Change Color: F-£.F (Red to Green to Red) PV Stable Band: 15.0 (°C)

1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation

level to the initial setting level.

Move to the advanced function setting level by pressing the 2 Key or leaving the setting for at least two seconds.

Dom fn Con en ARR CL Advanced Function Setting Level 6. Select the PV Stable Band parameter by pressing the ©] Key. ET PV Stable E: py nu b Band EEs 50 C 7. Use the [A] Key to set the parameter to 15.0. ET on b y Le Ery BE 15.0

8. To return to the initial setting level, press the Key for at least one sec-

ond. Operation Level 9. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key for at least one second. OT PV/SP IC rm Ü cu Bee (O0

4-11 Alarm Delays 4-11-1 Alarm Delays + Delays can be set for the alarm outputs. ON and OFF delays can be set separately for alarms 1, 2, and 3. The ON and OFF delays for alarm 1 function only for the alarm function. If the alarm 1 function is set to be out- put as an OR with other alarms (i.e., the heater burnout alarm, HS alarm, heater overcurrent alarm, or input error output alarm), delays cannot be set for the other alarms. The ON and OFF delays for alarms 1, 2, and 3 also apply to the individual SUB1, SUB2, and SUB indicators and to communications status. The alarm ON delays will also function when power is turned ON or when moving from the initial setting level to opera- tion level (e.g., to software resets). AIl outputs will turn OFF and the OFF delays will not function when moving to the initial setting level or when an alarm is output for a A/D converter error. Operation of Alarm ON and OFF Delays (for an Upper-limit Alarm) Alarm setting -

Alarm hysteresis ON delay set time OFF delay Alarm status : set time Alarm Latch = OFF ON delay set time , - The alarm will not turn ON if the time that the alarm is ON is equal to or less than the ON delay set time. Also, the alarm will not turn OFF if the time that the alarm is OFF is equal to or less than the OFF delay set time.

• If an alarm turns OFF and then back ON during the ON delay time, the time will be remeasured from the last time the alarm turns ON. Also, if an alarm turns ON and then back OFF during the OFF delay time, the time Will be remeasured from the last time the alarm turns OFF. Alarm will not turn ON. Parameters Related to Alarm Delays

Note Operating Procedure Operation Level T0 nPV/SP Initial Setting Level E NL Input Type O LNOL (al Den 5 me) Initial Setting Level E Z Move to Ad- = Mo} vanced Function

Oo 01 E À taf Éss 10 Initial Setting Level E [NL Input Type BE LIN OC 6 (asian (1) The defaults are 0, i.e., the ON and OFF delays are disabled. (2) The parameters are displayed when alarm functions are assigned and when the alarm type is set to any type but 0 (none), 12: LBA, or 13: PV change rate alarm. Use the following procedure to set ON and OFF delays for the alarm 1. An ON delay of 5 seconds and an OFF delay of 10 s will be set.

Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press- ing the [e] Key. (For details on moving between levels, refer to 4-8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level.) Press the 1 Key to enter the password (-169) and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level. Press the Fe Key to select the Alarm 1 ON Delay parameter. Press the [=] Key to set the parameter to 5. Press the € Key to select the Alarm 1 OFF Delay parameter. Press the [=] Key to set the parameter to 10. Press the Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level.

9. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting

level to the operation level. 4-12 Loop Burnout Alarm 4-12-1 Loop Burnout Alarm (LBA) - The loop burnout alarm can be used only with standard models. + With a loop burnout alarm, there is assumed to be an error in the control loop if the control deviation (SP - PV) is greater than the threshold set in the LBA Level parameter and if the control deviation is not reduced by at least the value set in the LBA Detection Band parameter within the LBA detection time. + Loop burnout alarms are detected at the following times.

If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 1 and 2 (ï.e., the set point is approached) and the amount the control deviation is reduced is at least equal to the LBA band, the loop burnout alarm will remain OFF. The process value is within the LBA level between 3 and 4, and thus loop burnout alarms will not be detected. (The loop burnout alarm will remain OFF.) If the process value is outside the LBA level between 4 and 5 and the control deviation is not reduced by at least the LBA band within the LBA detection time, the loop burnout alarm will turn ON. If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 5 and 6 (i.e., the set point is approached) and the amount the control deviation is reduced is at least equal to the LBA band, the loop burnout alarm will turn OFF. If the control deviation is reduced in the area between 6 and 7 (i.e., the set point is approached) and the amount the control deviation is reduced is less than the LBA band, the loop burnout alarm will turn ON. - Ifthe LBA detection time, LBA level, LBA detection band, and PID set- tings are not appropriate, alarms may be detected inappropriately or alarms may not be output when necessary. + Loop burnout alarms may be detected if unexpectedly large disturbances occur continuously and a large deviation does not decrease.

- If a loop burnout occurs when the set point is near the ambient tempera- ture, the temperature deviation in a steady state may be less than the LBA level, preventing detection of the loop burnout. - Ifthe set point is so high or low that it cannot be reached even with a sat- urated manipulated variable, a temperature deviation may remain even in a steady state and a loop burnout may be detected. + Detection is not possible if a fault occurs that causes an increase in tem- perature while control is being applied to increase the temperature (e.g., an SSR short-circuit fault). + Detection is not possible if a fault occurs that causes a decrease in tem- perature while control is being applied to decrease the temperature (e.g., a heater burnout fault). Parameters Related to Loop Burnout Alarms Parameter name Symbol Setting range Remarks PID* LBA Detection |x*1bA 0 to 9999 (s) Setting 0 disables the LBA Time function. (‘: 1 to 8) LBA Detection Time |LEA LBA Level LbAL Controllers with tempera- | 0.1 to 3,240.0 (°C/°F) (See | Default: 8.0 (°C/°F) ture inputs note.) Controllers with analog 0.01 to 99.99 (%FS) Default: 10.00% FS inputs LBA Band LEA Controllers with tempera- | 0.0 to 3,240.0 (°C/°F) (See | Default: 3.0 (°C/°F) ture inputs note.) Controllers with analog 0.00 to 99.99 (%FS) Default: 0.20% FS inputs Note Automatically Setting the LBA Detection Time Set “None” as the unit for analog inputs. + À loop burnout alarm can be output by setting the alarm 1 type to 12 (LBA).

• A setting of 12 (LBA) can be set for alarm 2 or alarm 3, but the setting will be disabled. + Loop burnouts are not detected during SP ramp operation. + Loop burnouts are not detected during auto-tuning, manual operation, or while stopped. + If the alarm 1 latch is set to ON, the latch will be effective for the loop burnout alarm. + Loop burnout alarms are not detected when using a remote SP. + Automatic setting is not possible for ON/OFF control. Set the LBA Detec- tion Time parameter in the advanced function setting level. + When PID control is being used, the LBA detection time can be set indi- vidually for each PID set. First select the PID set number in the Display PID Selection parameter (PID setting level), and then set the time in the LBA Detection Time parameter. + The LBA detection time is automatically set by auto-tuning, and the exe- cution results are saved in the PID set when auto-tuning is started. (The results are not set automatically, however, for heating/cooling control.) - Ifthe optimum LBA detection time is not obtained by auto-tuning, set the LBA Detection Time parameter (PID setting level).

+ To manually set the LBA detection time, set the LBA Detection Time parameter to twice the LBA reference time given below. Set the output to the maximum value. Measure the time required for the width of change in the input to reach the LBA band. Measurement time Temperature : TM ! Le + | :[: LBA band MV = 100% Time LBA detection time = Tm x 2

3. Setthe LBA Detection Time parameter to two times the measured time.

+ Set the control deviation when the control loop is working properly. - The default is 8.0 (°C/°F) for a temperature input and 10.00% FS for an analog input. - There is assumed to be an error in the control loop if the control deviation is greater than the threshold set in the LBA Level parameter and if the control deviation does not change by at least the value set in the LBA Band parameter. - The default is 3.0 (°C/°F) for a temperature input and 0.20% FS for an analog input. Perform the following procedure to use the loop burnout alarm. In this example, the LBA detection time is set to 10, the LBA level is set to 8.0, and the LBA band is set to 3.0. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level.

vanced Function [el = Move to Ad- MI, E AMar Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level E —ny—1 |Parameter E L NL k Initialization Es aff Advanced Function Setting Level ÊT LBA Level l l E LOAL Fe 92

Press the [=] Key to set the parameter to 12. To return to the operation level, press the Key for at least one second. Press the [0] Key to move from the operation level to the PID setting level. The current PID set number will be displayed. Press the EX] or M1 Key to select PID set 2. Press the € Key to select the PID 2 LBA Detection Time parameter. Press the [=] Key to set the parameter to 10. Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move to the initial setting level. Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press- ing the [e] Key. (For details on moving between levels, refer to 4-8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level.) Press the F1 Key to enter the password (-169), and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level. . Select the LBA Level parameter by pressing the ©] Key. Press the [=] Key to set the parameter to 8.0. (The default is 8.0.) Select the LBA Band parameter by pressing the € Key. Press the [A or M1 Key to set the parameter to 3.0. (The default is 3.0.)

E CL bA One 11 7. Press the [A] Key to set the parameter to 10. [ones LE D - Input Type EL M — E PHP 8. Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move to the initial setting Ee 5 level.

[el Z Move to Ad- = RMa vanced Function BR, © Settng Level 9. Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press- ing the [e] Key. (For details on moving between levels, refer to 4-8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level.) E nt Parameter _. D LINL Initialization el 10. Press the F1 Key to enter the password (-169), and move from the initial Aie GE setting level to the advanced function setting level. ([esjenm ET) et LBA Level : EL h L 11. Select the LBA Level parameter by pressing the FE Key. De» ni (ei) «LU

Performing Manual Control Section 4-13 Initial Setting Level 15. Press the Key for at least one second to move from the advanced E hi 1 linputiype function setting level to the initial setting level. S LINE BEE 5 Operation Level 16. Press the [O] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting F level to the operation level. ET 26 11 PV/SP E LI BES ‘O0 4-13 Performing Manual Control 4-13-1 Manual Operation + With standard models, the MV is manipulated directly. With position-pro- portional models, the MV is manipulated through the amount of valve opening or by parameter settings. - The manipulated variable can be set in manual mode if the PV/MV param- eter is displayed in the manual control level. The final MV used in auto- matic mode will be used as the initial manual MV when moving from automatic mode to manual mode. In manual mode, the change value will be saved immediately and reflected in the actual MV. + Manual operation can be used only for PID control. Standard Models - The automatic display return function will not operate in manual mode. + Balanceless-bumpless operation will be performed for the MV when switching from manual operation to automatic operation. (See note.) - If a power interruption occurs during manual operation, manual operation Will be restarted when power is restored using the same MV as when power was interrupted. + Switching between automatic and manual operation is possible for a max- imum of one million times. The overall manual operation is illustrated in the following figure. MV (%) Balanceless-bumpless 0 l 3 : Time ! MV switched OFF ON ! CC Manual) Power i Goma) —| — Position-proportional + When floating control is used or when the Direct Setting of Position Pro- Models portional MV parameter is set to OFF: + Pressing the Key turns ON the open output, and pressing the Key turns ON the close output.

Performing Manual Control Section 4-13 - The automatic display return function will not operate in manual mode. + Balanceless-bumpless operation will be performed for the MV when switching between manual and automatic operation. (See note.) + Switching between manual and automatic operation is possible for a maximum of one million times. + When close control is used or when the Direct Setting of Position Propor- tional MV parameter is set to ON: + Just as with standard models, the MV is set numerically. - The automatic display return function will not operate in manual mode. + Balanceless-bumpless operation will be performed for the MV when switching between manual and automatic operation. (See note.) Note In balanceless-bumpless operation, the MV before switching is used initially after the switch and then gradually changed to achieve the proper value after switch to prevent radical changes in the MV after switching operation. - If a power interruption occurs during manual operation, manual operation Will be restarted when power is restored using the same MV as when power was interrupted. + Switching between manual and automatic operation is possible for a max- imum of one million times. + Operation will be as described below if a potentiometer input error occurs. When the Manual MV Limit Enable Parameter Is Set to OFF: Manual MV z 100 Open output: ON Manual MV < 0 Close output: ON If the manual MV is other than the above, the open and close outputs will both be OFF. When the Manual MV Limit Enable Parameter ls Set to ON: Manual MV = MV upper limit Open output: ON Manual MV = MV lower limit Close output: ON If the manual MV is other than the above, the open and close outputs will both be OFF. Related Displays and Parameters Parameter name Symbol Level Remarks PV/MV (Manual MV) — Manual Control Level Changes the manual MV. Standard: -5.0 to 105.0 (See note 2.) Heating/cooling: -105.0 to 105.0 (See note 2.) Position-proportional: -5.0 to 105.0 (See notes 2 and 3.) Direct Setting of Position |PM/d Advanced Function Setting _ |Selects the method for specifying each MV for Proportional MV Level manual operation, when stopping, or when an error occurs. OFF: All open, hold, all closed ON: -5.0 to 105% Auto/Manual Switch A-" Operation Level Switches between automatic and manual modes. Auto/Manual Select Addi- | AMAd Advanced Function Setting Enables switching between automatic and man- tion Level ual modes. Note (1) Refer to 4-17 Output Adjustment Functions for information on the priority for the MV.

+ When the [O] Key is pressed for at least 3 seconds in the operation level's auto/manual switching display, the manual mode will be entered and the manual control level will be displayed. It is not possible to move to any dis- lays except for the PV/MV parameter during manual operation. Press the Key for at least one second from the PV/MV parameter display in man- ual control level to return to automatic mode and display the top parame- ter in the operation level. Operation Level

+ When the PF Setting parameter is set to A-M (Auto/Manual), pressing the PF Key for at least one second while in the adjustment, operation, bank setting, or PID setting level will change the mode to manual mode and move to the manual control level. During manual operation it is not possi- ble to move to any displays other than PV/MV (Manual MV). Press the PF Key for at least one second from the PV/MV display in the manual control mode to change the mode to automatic mode, move to the operation level, and display the top parameter in the operation level. When MANU (Auto/Manual) is selected for an event input, the Auto/Man- ual Switch parameter is not displayed. In that case, switching between auto and manual mode is executed by using an event input. The Auto/Manual Select Addition parameter must be set to ON in the advanced function setting level before it is possible to move to manual mode. The default is aN. (1) Priority of Manual MV and Other Functions Even when operation is stopped, the manual MV is given priority. Auto-tuning and self-tuning will stop when manual mode is entered. (2) Manual MV and SP Ramp If operating, the SP ramp function will continue even when manual mode is entered. Use the following procedure to set the manipulated variable in manual mode.

1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation

level to the initial setting level.

ing the [e] Key. (For details on moving between levels, refer to 4-8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level.)

4. Press the M1 Key to enter the password (-169), and move from the initial

setting level to the advanced function setting level.

Use the Key to set the parameter to ON. (The default is ON.) Press the Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level. Select the Auto/Manual Switch parameter by pressing the 2 Key. Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the manual control level. Press the [A] or F1 Key to set the manual MV. (In this example, the MV is set to 500%.) Note The manual MV setting must be saved (see page 14), but values changed with Key operations are reflected in the control output immediately. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the manual control level to the operation level. In this example, A-M (Auto/Manual) is set for the PF Setting parameter (E5AN/EN-H only).

Move to Ad- vanced Function Setting Level Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Select the PID ON/OFF parameter by pressing the =] Key. (The default is PID.) Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press- ing the [e] Key. (For details on moving between levels, refer to 4-8 Moving to the Advanced Function Setting Level.)

Using the Transfer Output

Press the F1 Key to enter the password (-169), and move from the initial setting level to the advanced function setting level. Select the Auto/Manual Select Addition parameter by pressing the Key. Use the Key to set the parameter to ON. (The default is ON.) Press the Ce] Key to select the PF Setting parameter and confirm that it is set to “A-M” (‘A-M’ is the default setting.) Press the Key for at least one second to move from the advanced function setting level to the initial setting level. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level. Press the PF Key for at least one second to move from the operation level to the manual control level. Press the [A] or F1 Key to set the manual MV. (In this example, the MV is set to 50.0%.) Note The manual MV setting must be saved (see page 14), but values

changed with key operations are reflected in the control output immediately. Press the PF Key to move from the manual control level to the operation level. 4-14 Using the Transfer Output 4-14-1 Transfer Output Function - The transfer output function can be used by Controllers that support a

transfer output (E5AN/EN-HL IF). For Controllers that do not have a trans- fer output, a control output can be used as a simple transfer output if the control output is a current output or a linear voltage output. + To use a transfer output, change the setting for the Transfer Type parame- ter to anything other than OFF. (This will enable the Transfer Output Upper Limit and Transfer Output Lower Limit parameters.)

Using the Transfer Output Section 4-14 + The operation differs for models with a transfer output and models without a transfer output for which control output 1 or control output 2 is used as a simple transfer output, as shown in the following table. Transfer Output Destination Transfer Control output 1 Control output 2 Transfer output output destination Yes — — Transfer output No Current output or linear | None, relay output, voltage | Control output 1 voltage output output (for driving SSR), or SSR output No Current output or linear | Current output or linear Control output 1 voltage output voltage output No Relay output, voltage | Current output or linear Control output 2 output (for driving voltage output SSR), or SSR output No Relay output, voltage | None, relay output, voltage | None output (for driving output (for driving SSR), or SSR), or SSR output SSR output æ Precision and User Calibration Precision User calibration Transfer output +0.3% FS Supported. (See note.) Simple transfer out- | Not specified. Not supported. put Note For details on the calibration method, refer to SECTION 6 CALI- BRATION. Transfer Output Type Transfer output type Symbol Setting range OFF (See note 1.) GFF en Set point SP SP lower limit to SP upper limit Set point during SP ramp |5P-" SP lower limit to SP upper limit PV py Input setting range lower limit to input set- ting range upper limit or Scaling lower limit to scaling upper limit MV monitor (heating) [72 5.0 to 105.0 (heating/cooling control: 0.0 to (See note 4.) 105.0) (See note 2.) MV monitor (cooling) EH 0.0 to 105.0 (See note 2.) (See note 5.) Valve opening (See note |7-" 10.0 to 110.0 Note (1) The default is OFF. For a Controller that does not support a transfer out- put, the item specified for the Control Output 1 Assignment or Control Output 2 Assignment parameter will be output. (2) The output value will be different between when the Transfer Output Type parameter is set to a heating control output or cooling control output, and when the Control Output 1 Assignment or Control Output 2 Assignment parameter is set to a heating control output or cooling control output. Example: When a Current Output Is Set to 4 to 20 mA and MV Monitor (Heating) ls Selected When used as a transfer output, 4.0 mA will be output for 0% and

Using the Transfer Output

When used as a control output, 3.7 mA will be output for 0% and 20.3 mA will be output for 100% so that the actuator is controlled at 0% or 100%. Output current (mA)

20.3 —— Transfer output value

--- Control output MV (%)

{The above graph is for when the linear current output is set to 4 to 20 mA.) (3) When the set point is selected, remote SP will be output while the Remote SP Mode is set in the SP Mode parameter. (4) This setting will be ignored for position-proportional models. (5) This setting will be ignored for standard control or for position-proportion- al models. (6) Displayed for position-proportional models only when there is a potenti- ometer input. + Reverse scaling is possible by setting the Transfer Output Lower Limit parameter larger than the Transfer Output Upper Limit parameter. If the Transfer Output Lower Limit and Transfer Output Upper Limit parameters are set to the same value when 4 to 20 mA is set, the transfer output will be output continuously at 0% (4 mA). -lfthe SP, SP during SP ramp, or PV is selected, the Transfer Output Lower Limit and Transfer Output Upper Limit parameters will be forcibly initialized to the respective upper and lower setting limits for changes in the upper and lower limits of the SP limiter and the temperature unit. If the MV for heating or MV for cooling is selected, the Transfer Output Lower Limit and Transfer Output Upper Limit parameters will be initialized to 100.0 and 0.0, respectively, when a switch is made between standard control and heating/cooling control using the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter. - The output current when the linear current type is set to 4 to 20 mA, the transfer output upper limit is set to 90.0, and the transfer output lower limit is set to 10.0 is shown in the following graph. - For scaling from 0.0% to 100.0%, the output for -5.0 to 0.0 will be the same value as for 0.0%, and the output for 100.0 to 105.0 will be the same value as for 100.0%

Using the Transfer Output Section 4-14 Output current (mA)

! ! MV (2) Transfer output Transfer output lower limit upper limit {The above graph is for when the linear current output is set to 4 to 20 mA.) Operating Procedure The following procedure sets the transfer output for an SP range of -50 to

Operation Level TC 260 PVISP BES 'O00 Initial Setting Level 1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. BE hi 1 lInput Type level to the initial setting level CO LN EL [m} En 5 Initial Setting Level 2. Select the Transfer Output Type parameter by pressing the F2] Key. [=] Transfer Output [en] ER-E Type

8. Press the [A Key to select 5P (set point).

Initial Setting Level Select the Transfer Output Lower Limit parameter by pressing the 2 Key. 1 | Transfer Output 1 |Lower Limit

Using the Transfer Output Section 4-14 EL n 7. Usethe Key to set the parameter to -50.0. The default is -200.0. CAR L Bes -500 Operation Level 8. To return to the operation level, press the [0] Key for at least one second. ÊT F PV/SP ICT Ë ci BES 'O00

Using Banks and PID Sets Section 4-15 4-15 Using Banks and PID Sets Banks Up to eight banks, each of which contains the following parameters, can be created. The current bank number can be changed by using key operations, event inputs, communications (operation commandés), or simple programs. Parameter 0 1 …. 7 Set Point 200.0 500.0 PID Set No. 0 0 SP Ramp Set Value OFF OFF Alarm Value 1 to 3 240.0 300.0 Alarm Value Upper Limit | 40.0 30.0 1to3 Alarm Value Lower Limit | 40.0 30.0 1to3 Soak Time 5 10 Wait Band 3.0 5.0 In the bank setting level, select the bank numbers to be edited with the Dis- play Bank Selection parameter, and make the settings for each bank. Parameter Setting Unit Default range Bank No. Oto7 — 0 Display Bank Selection |0 to 7 — See note. Note The current bank will be displayed. If you change the bank using the U and D Keys, monitor function will be canceled. If the following parameters are changed, the changes will be saved in the cur- rent bank: Set Point, Alarm Values 1 to 3, Alarm Value Upper Limits 1 to 3, Alarm Val- ue Lower Limits 1 to 3, (operation level) SP Ramp Set Value, Soak Time, Wait Band (adjustment level). PID Set Number + Select a number from 1 to 8 to specify the PID set for each bank. PID Set No. E DPcd - The default setting is 1. For details, refer to PID Sets. 85 ! + The bank number can be confirmed by checking the number at the beginning of the parameter. Simple Program and Bank Functions For each bank, the Soak Time and Wait Band parameters can be set, and a simple program can be created. For details on creating a simple program, refer to 4-16 Using the Simple Program Function. PID Sets * The PID set to be executed is selected by using the PID Set No. parame- ter in the bank setting level. If 0 (Automatic selection) is set, then the PID set will be selected automatically according to preset conditions. + Up to eight of the following parameters can be registered for each PID set. Parameter Setting range Default Unit Proportional Band Temperature: 0.1 to 3,240.0 |8.0 °Cor°F Analog: 0.1 to 999.9 10.0 %FS

Using Banks and PID Sets

Parameter Setting range Default Unit Integral Time Standard, heating/cooling, 233.0 s position proportional (closed):

Position proportional (float- ing): 0.1 to 3,240.0 Derivative Time 0.0 to 3240.0 40.0 s MV Upper Limit Standard: MV lower limit + 0.1 | 105.0 % to 105.0 Heating/cooling: 0.0 to 105.0 Position proportional (closed): MV lower limit + 0.1 to 105.0 MV Lower Limit Standard: -5.0 to MV upper |-5.0 % limit -0.1 Heating/cooling: -105.0 to 0.0 |-105.0 Position proportional (closed): | -5.0 -5.0 to MV upper limit -0.1 Automatic Selection | Temperature: -19,999 to 1320.0 EU Range Upper Limit | 32,400 Analog: -5.0 to 105.0 105.0 % (See note.) Cooling Coefficient | 0.01 to 99.99 1.00 None LBA Detection Time |0 to 9,999 (0: LBA function 0 s disabled) Note When the PID Automatic Selection Data parameter is set to DV, the unit will be %FS. The settings for the PID sets are made in the PID setting level. In the PID set- ting level, select the PID set numbers to be edited with the Display PID Selec- tion parameter, and make the settings for each PID set. Unit Default See note. Parameter Display PID Selection Setting range 1to8 —— Note The current PID set is displayed. If you use the [A] and Keys to change the PID set, the monitor function will be canceled When ihe following parameters are changed, the changes will be reflected in the current PID set: Proportional Band, Integral Time, Derivative Time, MV Upper Limit, MV Lower Limit, Cooling Coefficient (adjustment level) LBA Detection Time (advanced function setting level) + If the PID Set No. parameter for a bank is set to 0, the PID set will be selected automatically according to preset conditions. In the setting example on the left (with the PID Set Automatic Selection Data parame- ter set to PV), the following PID parameters are used: PV < 200°C: PID Set No. 1 200°C < PV < 400°C: PID Set No. 2 Set the PID Set Automatic Selection Range Upper Limit so that the set value becomes larger as the PID set number increases. For PID Set No. 8, however, the automatic selection range upper limit always equals the upper limit of the specified range. The PID Set Automatic Selection Hysteresis parameter can be used to set the hyster- esis to prevent chattering when changing the PID set. The PID Set Automatic Selection Data parameter can be used to select PV, DV (Derivative), or SP.

Using Banks and PID Sets

Using the Simple Program Function Section 4-16 4-16 Using the Simple Program Function 4-16-1 Simple Program Function + A simple program consists of multiple banks. The program can be created from the required number of banks by speci- fying the end bank in the Valid Program Bank parameter. A simple program can be started from any of the banks from bank 0 to the end bank. When operation is finished in one bank, the program switches to the next bank and operation starts in that bank. Operation after the end bank has been completed can be set in the Program Pattern parameter. + The program starts when the Program Start parameter is changed from RSET to STRT. + The program stops when the Program Start parameter is changed from STRT to RSET. The program can be reset in any bank.

(2) When the Soak Time or Wait Band parameter is changed in the adjust- ment level, the changes will be reflected in the current bank. (3) Displayed when the Program Pattern parameter is set to any value other than OFF. The bank cannot be switched to any other bank.

Program Pattern Any of three program patterns can be selected. The simple program will not be run if the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF. Program Pattern Operation OFF Program will not be executed. STOP + Program operation will start when the Program Start parame- ter is changed from RSET to STRT. The bank number will be automatically incremented by one when the Soak Time parameter setting for the bank has elapsed. + After the bank specified in the Valid Program Bank parame- ter has been executed, program operation will be ended. The RUN/STOP status will become STOP, and the program end output will be turned ON. CONT + Program operation will start when the Program Start parame- ter is changed from RSET to STRT. The bank number will be automatically incremented by one when the Soak Time parameter setting for the bank has elapsed. + After the bank specified in the Valid Program Bank parame- ter has been executed, program operation will be ended. The RUN/STOP status will continue as RUN (control will continue atthe SP at the end bank), and the program end output will be turned ON. LOOP + Program operation will start when the Program Start parame- ter is changed from RSET to STRT. The bank number will be automatically incremented by one when the Soak Time parameter setting for the bank has elapsed. + After the bank specified in the Valid Program Bank parame- ter has been executed, the bank number will return to 0 and the program execution will continue. + Banks where the Soak Time parameter is set to O will not be executed. + The bank number can be changed even during program operation by using either an event input or key operations. - The bank number is initialized to O when the program pattern is changed. H Pattern 1 (STOP) Control will stop and the STOP mode will be entered when the program has ended.

Set point n Wait band Wait band He Soak time = $# END display END output Automatically switches from RUN to STOP mode. Bank n (end bank)

Using the Simple Program Function Section 4-16 H Pattern 2 (CONT) Control will continue in RUN mode when the program has ended.

Wait band Set point n |- Wait band k—— Soak time ——+#ù—END display + END output RUN mode continues. Bank n (end bank) H Pattern 3 (LOOP) At the end of the program, operation switches to the start bank and continues in RUN mode.

Set point n 7 Wait bar Set point O _ Wait bar 14———Soak time ———»# RUN mode continues. Bank n (end bank) Bank 0 (start bank) Starting Method Any of the following three methods can be used to start the simple program. + Setting the Program Start parameter to STRT. + Turning ON an event input. (The program start must be assigned to an event input. See note.) + Starting with an Operation Command using communications. (When the program start is not assigned to an event input.) Note When an event input is used to start and reset the simple program, writing is performed to EEPROM. Be sure to consider the write life (1 million writes) of the EEPROM in the system design. When the program start is assigned to an event input, the Program Start parameter will function as a monitor display, and the RSET/STRT displays can be used to check when the event input has started or reset the simple program. When this is done, the Program Start parameter functions as a monitor display only and cannot be changed using key operations. If the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF, the event input assignment setting will be initialized to “None”

Using the Simple Program Function Section 4-16 The following table shows the operations when the program is started. + Changing from RSET to STRT Program Pattern Executed bank | RUN/STOP status Program end No. output STOP Executed from cur- | RUN command OFF CONT rent bank executed. LOOP The following table shows the operations when the program is reset. + Changing from STRT to RSET Program Pattern Executed bank | RUN/STOP status Program end No. output STOP Initialized to bank O | STOP command OFF CONT executed. LOOP Note (1) The bank number can be changed even during program operation by us- ing either an event input or key operations. (2) The bank number is initialized to O when the program pattern is changed. (3) Even if an event input assigned to "Program Start" is switched from STRT to RSET while the power is OFF, the RUN/STOP status will not be changed when the power is turned ON and the bank number will not be initialized to O. Soak Time and Wait Band Wait band Set point Wait band () @ 6) CR) RSET — STRT Soak time remain Set point Set point The wait band is the band within which the process value is stable in respect to the set point. The soak time is measured within the wait band. The timer that measures the soak time operates only when the process value is within the wait band around the set point (i.e., SP + wait band). In the following dia- gram, the timer will be stopped between the start and (1), (2) and (3), and (4) and (5) and will measure the time only between (1) and (2), (3) and (4), and (5) and the end.

Using the Simple Program Function Section 4-16 Operation When Note Power Is Turned ON If the wait band is set to OFF, the wait band will be treated as infinity and the timer will measure time continuously after changing from RSET to STRT. The following will occur if a power interruption occurs during execution of a simple program: + The program start (RSET/STRT) and RUN/STOP status from before the power interruption will be held. + The timer value for the Soak Time parameter will be reset. Therefore, when a power interruption occurs, the timer value for the Soak Time parameter will not be correct. In addition, if starting the program is assigned to an event input, the event input status when a power interruption occurs will be the program start status from just before the power interruption. 4-16-2 Operation at the Program End

Note Note The following table shows operation when program operation ends, according to the Program Pattern parameter setting. Program Pattern Executed bank | RUN/STOP status Program end No. output STOP End bank number | STOP command ON held executed. CONT RUN continues. LOOP = — — (1) The bank number can be changed even during program operation by us- ing either an event inputs or key operation. (2) The bank number is initialized to O when the program pattern is changed. Display at the Program End When the program ends, the process value will be displayed on the No. 1 dis- play (see note) and the set point and “end” will be alternately displayed on the No. 2 display at 0.5 s intervals. One of the following displays: PV/SP, PV only, or PV/MV. E 11 1! = IL val + l Displayed alternately. EEE —ENd ee In Program End Output When the Program Pattern parameter is changed from OFF to STOP, CONT, or LOOP, the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter will automatically be set to the end output. Conversely, when the Program Pattern parameter is changed from STOP, CONT, or LOOP io OFF, the Alarm 1 Output Assignment parameter will automatically be initialized to ALM1. The output assignment parameters can also be used to assign the program end output to any output. A program end output is also provided in communications status. Clearing the Program End Status The program END output and display will be cleared when the Program Start parameter is changed from STRT to RSET. The setting is changed from STRT to RSET while the Program Start parameter is displayed.

The program END status can also be cleared using an event. lf the program start function is assigned to an event, however, the program end status cannot be cleared from the Program Start parameter display, which will function only as a monitor display. 4-16-3 Combining a Simple Program with an SP Ramp Control can be combined with the SP ramp by setting the SP Ramp Set Value and Soak Time parameters for each bank.

Wait band Wait band Ramp SP 14— Soak time ——} SPn+i}- Bankn Bank n+1 If the program moves to the next bank at the end of the soak time before the ramp SP reaches the SP, the SP ramp operation will extend across the banks as shown

SPn below as long as the SP Ramp Se t Value parameter is not set to 0. SPni PV — Soak time: —— Bank n Bank n+1 If the SP Ramp Set Value parameter is set to O for the next bank, SP ramp operation will be stopped as shown below.

Using the Simple Program Function Section 4-16 SP Start Program operation can be started by using an SP start from the bank 0 LSP. To use an SP start, set the SP Ramp Set Value and Soak Time parameters for bank 0 to O. Example Bank 0 SP: 30 Bank 1 SP: 100 Bank 0 SP ramp set value: OFF Bank 1 SP ramp set value: 1 Bank 0 soak time: O Bank 1 soak time: 5 SP=100 SP=30 sp2 E Ié—— Soak time | ——}l

Bank 1 Bank 2 4-16-4 Relationships between Simple Programs and Other Functions + Changing the Soak Time Ifthe soak time is changed while the program is being executed, timing will be continued from the time value at that point. The timer value will be reset, however, if a power interruption occurs. + Changing the SP Ifthe soak time is changed while the program is being executed, timing will be continued from the timer value at that point. + Input Errors Timing will be continued even if an input error occurs during operation in program mode. Note Timing will be performed according to the PV at the time of the input error (i.e., the sensor input setting range upper limit). + Changing to Manual Mode Timing will be continued when changing to manual mode while the simple program is being executed. ° AT AT will be executed even if it is started while the simple program is be- ing executed. While AT is being executed, operation will not move to the next bank and the soak remain time will remain at 0. Operation will move to the next bank after AT has been completed. After operation has been completed for the end bank, one of the following operations will be executed depending on the program pattern. Program Pattern Operation STOP The STOP operation command will be executed, so AT will be stopped. CONT The STOP operation command will not be executed, so AT will continue. LOOP AT will be continued by changing to the start bank.

Using the Simple Program Function Section 4-16 + SP Mode STRT and RSET can be executed for the simple program without re- gard to the SP mode. SP mode changes are enabled while the simple program is being executed. Timing will continue in the SP mode after the change. SP mode Description LSP Timing is performed according to the SP of the bank being executed. RSP Timing is performed according to the remote SP. + RSP Input Errors Timing will be continued even if an RSP input error occurs while the simple program is being executed. Note Timing will be performed according to the PV and remote SP at the time of the RSP error. + Switching RUN and STOP Timing will continue if RUN and STOP are switched while the simple program is being executed. + Changing Banks Ifthe bank is changed while the simple program is being executed, the time up to that point will be cleared and timing will start for the new bank's set value. Operating Procedure Perform the following procedure to use the simple program function. Program pattern: STOP Valid program bank: 1 Bank 0 set point: 150°C, Soak time: 5 min, Wait band: 3°C Bank 0 set point: 200°C, Soak time: 10 min, Wait band: 5°C SPO-200.0 Wait band = 3 SP0-150.0) Bank ï End display + RSET — STRT Soak time = 5 min Soak time = 10 min grop" Put Operation Level 1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation eB 20 FiPvIsP level to the initial setting level. E Lu Bee (O0 Initial Setting Level 2. Select the Program Pattern parameter by pressing the Fe Key. hi Input Type

Using the Simple Program Function Section 4-16 Initial Setting Level EF 260 ESS (Ou

Use the [X] Key to set the parameter to STOP. Press the © Key to select the Valid Program Bank parameter. Use the [A] and M1 Keys to set 2. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level. Press the [0] Key to move from the operation level to the bank setting lev- el. The Display Bank Selection parameter will be displayed. The current bank number will be displayed, so use the El and F1 Keys to select 0. Press the € Key to select the Bank 0 SP parameter. . Use the &] and F1 Keys to set the parameter to 150.0. Press the © Key to select the Bank O0 Soak Time parameter. Use the [A] and M1 Keys to set the parameter to 5. Press the Fe Key to select the Bank 0 Wait band parameter. Use the [A] and M1 Keys to set the parameter to 3.0. Press the € Key to select the Display Bank Selection parameter.

Output Adjustment Functions Section 4-17 Output 7 100%

MV upper limit MV lower limit --1"0% Note When the manual MV limit is enabled, the manual MV will be re- stricted by the MV limit. + For heating/cooling control, upper and lower limits are set of overall heat- ing/cooling control. (They cannot be set separately for heating/cooling.) Output À Heating MV Cooling MV MV lower limit MV upper limit |---- 4-17-2 MV at Stop The MV when control is stopped can be set. When setting the MV when control is stopped, set the MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter (advanced function setting level) to ON. = Standard Models For heating/cooling control, the MV at stop will apply to the cooling side if the MV is negative and to the heating side if the MV is positive. The default is 0.0, so an MV will not be output for either standard or heating/cooling control. # Position-proportional Models Open, close, or hold status can be selected for floating control or when the Direct Setting of Position Proportional MV parameter is set to OFF. With open status, only the open output will turn ON. With close status, only the close out- put will turn ON. With hold status, the open and close outputs will both turn OFF. The default setting is for hold status, with no outputs.

Output Adjustment Functions Section 4-17 Note If the Direct Setting of Position Proportional MV parameter is set to ON during close control, the valve opening can be specified. The default setting is 0.0 (i.e., the open and close outputs are adjusted so that valve opening will be 0). Parameter Setting range Unit Default name MV at STOP | -5.0 to 105.0 for standard control %ornone |0.0 or HOLD -105.0 to 105.0 (heating/cooling control) Position-proportional Control Close control and Direct Setting of Posi- tion Proportional MV parameter ON: -5.0 to 105.0 Floating control or Direct Setting of Posi- tion Proportional MV parameter OFF: CLOS (Control output 2 ON) HOLD (Control outputs 1 and 2 both OFF) OPEN (Control output 1 ON) The order of priority is as follows: Manual MV > MV at stop > MV at PV error. - The following table shows the operation when a potentiometer error occurs when the Direct Setting of Position Proportional MV parameter is set to ON. MV at stop = 100 Open output ON MV at stop < O0 Close output ON When the MV at stop is other than the above, the open and close out- puts will both be OFF. 4-17-3 MV at PV Error - Afixed MV is output for an input error, RSP input error, or potentiometer error (close control only). To set the MV at PV error, set the MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter (advanced function setting level) to ON. The MV at stop takes priority when stopped and the manual MV takes pri- ority in manual mode. = Standard Models With heating/cooling control, the MV on the cooling side is taken to be a neg- ative value, so the output is made to the heating side for a positive value and to the cooling side for a negative value. The default setting is 0.0 (i.e., there are not outputs for either standard control or heating/cooling control). # Position-proportional Models Open, close, or hold status can be selected for floating control or when the Direct Setting of Position Proportional MV parameter is set to OFF. With open status, only the open output will turn ON. With close status, only the close out- put will turn ON. With hold status, the open and close outputs will both turn OFF. The default setting is for hold status, with no outputs.

Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter Section 4-18 If the Direct Setting of Position Proportional MV parameter is set to ON during close control, valve opening can be specified. The default setting is 0.0, so open and close outputs are adjusted so that valve opening will be O. Parameter Setting range Unit Default name MV at PV —5.0 to 105.0 for standard control %ornone |0.0or ERROR -105.0 to 105.0 (heating/cooling control) HOLD Position-proportional Control Close control and Direct Setting of Posi- tion Proportional MV parameter ON: -5.0 to 105.0 Floating control or Direct Setting of Posi- tion Proportional MV parameter OFF: CLOS (Control output 2 ON) HOLD (Control outputs 1 and 2 both OFF) OPEN (Control output 1 ON) Note The order of priority is as follows: Manual MV > MV at stop > MV at PV error. - The following table shows the operation when a potentiometer error occurs when the Direct Setting of Position Proportional MV parameter is set to ON. MV at stop = 100 Open output ON MV at stop < O0 Close output ON When the MV at stop is other than the above, the open and close outputs will both be OFF. + The order of priority of the MVs is illustrated in the following diagram. MV upper limit MV at PV Error shpeta Ÿ RUN/STOP Manipulated variable

- The default setting for the Extraction of Square Root parameter is OFF. The Extraction of Square Root Enable parameter must be set to ON in order to use this function.

Using the Extraction of Square Root Parameter Section 4-18 Extraction of Square Root Low-cut - Ifthe PV input (i.e., the input before extracting the square root) is higher Point than 0.0% and lower than the low cut point set in the Extraction of E AOC Square Root Low-Cut Point parameter, the results of extracting the E GR j square root will be 0.0%. If the PV input is lower than 0.0% or higher es 02 than 100.0%, extraction of the square root will not be executed, so the result will be equal to the PV input. The low-cut point is set as normal- ized data for each input, with 0.0 as the lower limit and 100.0 as the upper limit for the input setting range. Extraction of square root 100% FS / Extraction of square # root low-cut point É JS > 0 100% FS Argument 1 (Input Data) Parameter name Setting rage Unit Default Extraction of Square | OFF: Disabled, ON: Enabled |--- OFF Root Enable Extraction of Square |0.0 to 100.0 % 0.0 Root Low-cut Point Operating Procedure Input type = 25 (4 to 20 mA) This procedure sets the Extraction of Square Root Low-cut Point parameter to 10.0%. Operation Level OT PV/SP g- 10m E LIU Es (00.0 Initial Setting Level 1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation — hi LL Jinput Type level to the initial setting level. CO LN EL BEE 5 CRT 2. Use the LS] and M1 Keys to set the parameter to 25 (4 to 20 mA).

BE 25 E E AQ] Extraction 3. Press the © Key to select the Extraction of Square Root Enable param- E DER LL of Square eter. _- nable Een sr] E ñ Extraction 4. Use the ES Key to select ON. [=] 5 LI | of Square EE. -,, | Root Enable (mimi) EU

Setting the Width of MV Variation Section 4-19 Operation Level 5. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level. ET cn PV/SP p E LIL Bes (000 Adjustment Level 6. Press thelO] Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level. (mm

E A0 0 Extraction of 7. Select the Extraction of Square Root Low-cut Point parameter by press- (mi 5 LI I |Square Root ing the Fe Key. EE. nn |Low-cut Point [ones en} LL

8. Usethe Key to set the parameter to -10.0.

BE Extraction of E SUR PF Square Root

Low-cut Point Key to return to the operation level. TC PV/SP

4-19 Setting the Width of MV Variation MV Change Rate Limit MV Change Rate Limit (Heating) + The MV change rate limit sets the maximum allowable width of change Œ — in the MV per second. If the change in the MV exceeds this setting, the (= On L MV will be changed by the MV change rate limit until the calculated Rs 00 value is reached. This function is disabled when the setting is 0.0. + The MV change rate limit does not function in the following situations: + In manual mode + During ST execution (Cannot be set when ST is ON.) + During AT execution + During ON/OFF control + While stopped (during MV at Stop output) + During MV at PV Error output Parameter name Setting rage Unit Default MV Change Rate 0.0 to 100.0 ls 0.0 Limit Operating Procedure This procedure sets the MV change rate limit to 5.0%/s. The related parame- ters are as follows:

Setting the Width of MV Variation Section 4-19 Operation Level OT PV/SP IC rm E co Es 000 Initial Setting Level 1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation BE hi 1 [Input Type level to the initial setting level. CO LN EL (al SEE 5 NAT PID.-ON/OFF 2. Select the PID ON/OFF parameter by pressing the &] Key. E LNCL ER Pcd BE pi | PID-ON/OFF 3. Use the [A] Key to select 2-PID control. (The default is PID.) E LCL BRs Pcd Œ LIST 4. Press the Fe Key to select the ST parameter. E GE En on ES ST 5. Press the F1 Key to select OFF. (a £ L al 2C BRs GFf Operation Level 6. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting level to the operation level. ET CNE PV/SP p E LI BEs (00,0 Adjustment Level 7. Key to move from the operation level to the adjustment level. EL Adu Bne (es; E] = cr [M 8. Press the F2 Key to select the MV Change Rate Limit parameter. E: OT L |Change Rate Limit pes 0 =] = [M 9. Usethe Key to set the parameter to 5.0. E: [I LL | Change Bee, SE Rate Limit Operation Level 10. Press the [0]! Key to return to the operation level.

4-20 Setting the PF Key 4-20-1 PF Setting (Function Key) PF Setting E OC [ma] VF (al Êss A" Monitor/Setting Item Monitor/Setting Item 1

+ Pressing the PF Key for at least one second executes the operation set in the PF Setting parameter (E5AN/EN-H only). Set value Symbol Setting Function OFF oFF Disabled Does not operate as a function key. RUN UN RUN Specifies RUN status. STOP SkoP STOP Specifies STOP status. R-S R-5 RUN/STOP reverse | Specifies reversing the RUN/STOP opera- operation tion status. AT-2 BE-e 100% AT Specifies reversing the 100% AT Execute/ Execute/Cancel Cancel status. (See note 1.) AT-1 BE- 1 40% AT Specifies reversing the 40% AT Execute/ Execute/Cancel Cancel status. (See notes 1 and 2.) LAT LAE Alarm Latch Cancel | Specifies canceling all alarm latches. (See note 3.) A-M AN Auto/Manual Specifies reversing the Auto/Manual status. (See note 4.) PFDP PFdP Monitor/Setting Item | Specifies the monitor/setting item display. Select the monitor setting item according to the Monitor/Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters (advanced function setting level). BANK DANK Bank Selection Specifies switching to the bank number + 1. Note (1) When AT cancel is specified, it means that AT is cancelled regardless of whether the AT currenily being executed is 100% AT or 40% AT. (2) The setting of AT-1 will be ignored for heating/cooling control or for posi- tion-proportional floating control. (3) Alarms 1 to 3, heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent latches are cancelled. (4) For details on auto/manual operations using the PF Key, refer to 4-13 Per- forming Manual Control. (5) Pressing the PF Key for at least one second executes operation accord- ing to the set value. When the Monitor/Setting ltem parameter is selected, however, the display is changed in order from Monitor/Setting ltem 1 to 5 each time the key is pressed. (6) This function is enabled when PF Key Protect is OFF. Setting the PF Setting parameter to the Monitor/Setting ltem makes it possi- ble to display monitor/setting items using the function key. The following table shows the details of the settings. For setting (monitor) ranges, refer to the applicable parameter.

Setting the PF Key Section 4-20 Set Setting Remarks value Monitor/Setting Symbol 0 Disabled — 1 PV/SP/Bank No. (See note 1.) Can be set. (SP) — 2 PV/SP/MV (See notes 1 and 2.) Can be set. (SP) — 3 PV/SP /Soak time remain (See note 1.) | Can be set. (SP) — 4 Proportional band (P) (See note 3.) Can be set. P 5 Integral time (l) (See note 3.) Can be set. nu 6 Derivative time (D) (See note 3.) Can be set. d 7 Alarm value 1 (See note 4.) Can be set. fb- 1 8 Alarm value upper limit 1 (See note 4.) | Can be set. AUH 9 Alarm value lower limit 1 (See note 4.) | Can be set. ACL 10 Alarm value 2 (See note 4.) Can be set. fi-e 11 Alarm value upper limit 2 (See note 4.) | Can be set. ALoH 12 Alarm value lower limit 2 (See note 4.) | Can be set. Alet 13 Alarm value 3 (See note 4.) Can be set. AL -3 14 Alarm value upper limit 3 (See note 4.) | Can be set. AL3H 15 Alarm value lower limit 3 (See note 4.) | Can be set. AL3L 16 Bank No. Can be set. BANK Note (1) The SP for the current bank will be displayed. Note Operating Procedure Operation Level CET t cn E chu Eee (00.0 Initial Setting Level

E: L N- Ë [em 6 [aime PVISP Input Type (2) For details on MV settings for heating and cooling control, refer to MV Display for Heating and Cooling Control on page 82. (3) The set value for the current PID set will be displayed. (4) The set value for the current bank will be displayed. Setting Monitor/Setting Items Pressing the PF Key in the operation, adjustment, bank setting, or PID setting level displays the applicable monitor/setting items. Press the PF Key to dis- play in order Monitor/Setting ltems 1 to 5. After Monitor/Setting ltem 5 has been displayed, the display will switch to the top parameter in the operation level. (1) Items set as disabled in the Monitor/Setting ltems 1 to 5 parameters will not be displayed, and the display will skip to the next enabled setting. (2) While a monitor/setting item is being displayed, the display will be switched to the top parameter in the operation level if the € Key or the [OI Key is pressed. This procedure sets the PF Setting parameter to PFDP, and the Monitor/Set- ting ltem 1 parameter to 7 (Alarm Value 1).

1. Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation

level to the initial setting level.

Counting Control Output ON/OFF Operations Section 4-21 CETTE ELNLE E OC [=] TT One» M (mimi) 1 E OC [=] TT Bes PFdP Initial Setting Level

Ë AMar RES - ‘69 Move to Ad- vanced Function Setting Level Advanced Function Setting Level Parameter Initialization PF Setting PF Setting Monitor/Setting Item 1 Monitor/Setting Item 1 Initial Setting Level D _— [=] LR BLNEL Dico 5

Input Type Monitor/Setting Item Level Monitor/Setting Item Display 1

3. Press the Key to enter the password (-169). It is possible to move to

the advanced function setting level by either pressing the [e] Key or wait- ing two seconds without pressing any key.

4. Press the F2 Key to select the PF Setting parameter.

5. Press the [X Key to select PFDP (Monitor/Setting ltem).

6. Press the Fe Key to select the Monitor/Setting tem 1 parameter.

7. Press the [A] Key to select 7 (Alarm Value 1).

8. Press the Key for at least one second to move from the advanced

function setting level to the initial setting level.

9. Press the [0] Key for at least one second to move from the initial setting

level to the operation level.

10. Press the PF Key to display Alarm Value 1 for the current bank.

4-21 Counting Control Output ON/OFF Operations 4-21-1 Control Output ON/OFF Count Function

If Control Output 1 and 2 are ON/OFF outputs (relay outputs, voltage outputs for driving SSR, or SSR outpuis), the number of times that a control output turns ON and OFF can be counted. Based on the control output ON/OFF count alarm set value, an alarm can be output and an error can be displayed if the set count value is exceeded. The default setting of the Control Output ON/OFF Alarm Set Value parameter is 0. ON/OFF operations are not counted when this parameter is set to 0. To enable counting ON/OFF operations, change the setting to a value other than

Counting Control Output ON/OFF Operations Section 4-21 Control Output ON/ OFF Counter Monitor Function Control Output ON/ OFF Count Alarm ON/OFF Counter This function is not displayed when the Control Output 1 ON/OFF Alarm Set Value and the Control Output 2 ON/OFF Alarm Set Value parameter are set to 0, or when the control outputs are set for linear outputs. Parameter name Setting range Unit Default Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count Monitor |0 to 9999 100times |0 Control Output 2 ON/OFF Count Monitor |0 to 9999 100times |0 Display When ON/OFF Count Alarm Occurs When an ON/OFF count alarm occurs, the PV display in the No. 1 display shown below alternates with the FAL display on the No. 2 display.

+ PV/SP (Including the items displayed by setting the “PV/SP” Display Screen Selection parameter.) + PV/Manual MV (Valve Opening), PV/SP/Manual MV (Valve Opening) + PV/SP displayed for the monitor/setting items Normal ON/OFF Count Alarm Be Er T JC cs ni à we CE ECS Atemating On On isplay Ses 00.8 Bon RALN] 4—> (000 If the ON/OFF counter exceeds the control output ON/OFF count alarm set value, an ON/OFF count alarm will occur. The alarm status can be assigned to a control output or an auxiliary output, or it can be displayed at the Control- ler. The ON/OFF count alarm set value function is disabled by setting the ON/ OFF count alarm set value to O. Parameter name Setting range Unit Default Control Output 1 ON/OFF Alarm Set |0 to 9999 100 times 0 Value Control Output 2 ON/OFF Alarm Set |0 to 9999 100 times 0 Value Reset Function The ON/OFF counter can be reset for a specific control output. Parameter name Setting range Unit Default ON/OFF Counter Reset 0: Disable the counter reset |-— 0 function. 1: Reset the control output 1 ON/OFF counter. 2: Reset the control output 2 ON/OFF counter. Note After the counter has been reset, the control output ON/OFF count monitor value will be automatically returned to O. If an error occurs in the control output ON/OFF counter data, the ON/OFF count monitor value will be set to 9999 and an ON/OFF count alarm will occur. The alarm can be cleared by resetting the ON/OFF counter.

Operating Procedure Initial Setting Level [=] HILL Input Type

S LITE (mm 6 EES Initial Setting Level E = Move to Ad- BE Mo} vanced Function Setting Level BEs - 169 Advanced Function Setting Level T 7 Parameter E L NL k Initialization Fes FF E Control Output E AA /|Tonorr Er ñn | Count Alarm ===) LH | Set Value BE Control Output E AA 1 |1oNorr Es 11 | Count Alarm ee) ll | Set Value Initial Setting Level E —ns_ 1 Input Type O LNE One G (ei This procedure sets the Control Output 1 ON/OFF Alarm Set Value parameter to 10 (1,000 times). Press the Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Select the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter by press- ing the 2 Key. Use the Key to enter the password (“-169”). It is possible to move to the advanced function setting level by either pressing the [e] Key or wait- ing two seconds without pressing any key. Press the £el Key to select the Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count Alarm Set Value parameter. Use the Key to set the parameter to 10. Key for at least one second to move to the initial setting lev- Key for at least one second to move to the operation level. 4-22 Displaying PV/SV Status 4-22-1 PV and SV Status Display Functions PV Status Display Function

The PV function in the PV/SP, PV, or PV/Manual MV (Valve Opening) Display and the control and alarm status specified for the PV and PV status display are alternately displayed in 0.5-s Set value Symbol Function OFF GFF No PV status display Manual MANU MANU is alternately displayed during manual control. Stop SkaP STOP is alternately displayed while oper- ation is stopped. Alarm 1 DER ALMT is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status. Alarm 2 ALME ALMP is alternately displayed during Alarm 2 status.

Displaying PV/SV Status Section 4-22 Set value Symbol Function Alarm 3 ALMA ALMB is alternately displayed during Alarm 3 status. Alarm 1 to 3 OR status AL ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1,2, or 3 is set to ON. Heater Alarm (See note) [HA HA is alternately displayed when a heater burnout alarm, HS alarm, or heater over- current alarm is ON. + The default is OFF. Note “HA” can be selected for models that do not support heater burnout detection, SV Status Display Function Note Note but the function will be disabled. Example: When STOP Is Selected for the PV Status Display Function When RUN/STOP Normal is STOP Ta Srei- : Et 260 ET GE SP) Alternating PV/SP D nen EN display Bee /00.0 SSS (000! > 25.0 The SP, Blank, or Manual MV in the PV/SP, PV, or PV/Manual MV Display (Valve Opening) and the control and alarm status specified for the SV status display function are alternately displayed in 0.5-s cycles. Set value Symbol Function OFF GFF No SV status display Manual MANU MANU is alternately displayed during manual control. Stop SkaP STOP is alternately displayed while oper- ation is stopped. Alarm 1 AL ALMT is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status. Alarm 2 AL ALMP is alternately displayed during Alarm 2 status. Alarm 3 AL ALMB3 is alternately displayed during Alarm 3 status. Alarm 1 to 3 OR status AL ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1,2, or 3 is set to ON. Heater Alarm (See note) | HA HA is alternately displayed when a heater burnout alarm, HS alarm, or heater over- current alarm is ON. + The default is OFF. “HA” can be selected for models that do not support heater burnout detection, but the function will be disabled. Example: When ALM1 Is Selected for the SV Status Display Function Normal When ALMA Is ON ET Bt . E° 260 ET JC [] Aitemating PVSP Der yann Ben display Bes ‘000 BSSALM | > IO0C The order of priority for flashing and are as follows: alternating displays on the No. 2 display

Operating Procedure Initial Setting Level O —

(1) Alternating display in SV status display (2) Alternating display during program end output (3) Flashing display during auto-tuning (4) Alternating display when a control output ON/OFF count alarm occurs (5) Flashing display when out of the setting range This procedure sets the PV Status Display Function parameter to ALM1. Press the [0] Key for at least three seconds to move from the operation level to the initial setting level.

3. Use the W1Key to enter the password (-169). It is possible to move to the

advanced function setting level by either pressing the © Key or waiting two seconds without pressing any key.

4. Press the F Key to select the PV Status Display Function parameter.

5. Press the [I Key to select ALM1.

Key for at least one second to move to the initial setting lev- Key for at least one second to move to the operation level. Ifthe Alarm 1 status is ON, PV and ALMA will be alternately displayed.

Using a Remote SP Section 4-23 4-23 Using a Remote SP The remote SP function scales a remote SP input (4 to 20 mA) to the remote SP upper and lower limits, and takes it as the set point. (This function is sup- ported by the E5AN-H and E5EN-H only.) Set the Remote SP Enable parameter (advanced function setting level) to ON, and use an event input or an operation command to select the remote SP. Parameter Setting range Unit Default Remote SP Enable OFF: Disable, ON: Enable None OFF Remote SP Upper Limit | SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU 1300.0 Remote SP Lower Limit | SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU —200.0 SP Tracking OFF: Disable, ON: Enable None OFF Remote SP Input Error |OFF: Disable, ON: Enable None OFF Output SP Mode LSP: Local SP, RSP: Remote SP None LSP Remote SP Monitor Remote SP lower limit to remote SP |EU — upper limit Precautions + When the ST (self-tuning) parameter is turned ON, the SP Mode parame- ter is forcibly set to LSP. + The remote SP input is not accepted during autotuning. Autotuning is exe- cuted for the remote SP at the beginning of autotuning. + Changes in the remote SP value are not used as conditions for resetting the standby sequence. Remote SP Scaling + The remote SP input (4 to 20 mA) can be scaled to match the PV input range, based on the Remote SP Upper Limit and Remote SP Lower Limit parameter settings. + The remote SP input can be input in a range of -10% to 110% of 4 to 20 mA. Input values outside of this range treated as out-of-range input val- ues (RSP input error) and clamped to the upper or lower limit. In SP mode, the RSP single indicator will flash, and in local SP mode the No. 2 indicator for the Remote SP Monitor will flash. + An alarm can be output if an RSP input error occurs by setting the Remote SP Input Error Output parameter to ON. RSP (%) Remote SP upper limit >| Remote SP lower limit Input (mA)

Using a Remote SP Section 4-23 + When ïhe SP Upper Limit or SP Lower Limit parameter setting is changed, the remote SP upper or lower limit will be forcibly changed to the SP upper or lower limit. For example, if the upper limit for the SP lim- iter is changed from A to B, the remote SP upper and lower limits will be changed as shown in the following diagram. [ SP limiter ] É RSP scaling range | Before change V7 L AV > H 4 Î A Upper limit changed from À to B After limiter upper limit chance W Ÿ

SP upper and lower limits Remote SP upper and lower limits

SP Mode The SP mode is used to switch between local SP and remote SP. When a remote SP is selected in SP mode, the RSP single indicator will light. Remote SP Monitor In remote SP mode, the remote SP can be checked on the No. 2 display in the PV/SP Display Screen. In local SP mode, it can be checked with the Remote SP Monitor parameter. SP Tracking - Ifthe SP tracking function is enabled, the local SP inherits the remote SP value after switching from remote SP to local SP. To enable the SP track- ing function, set the SP Tracking parameter to ON. + SP tracking operates as follows: SP mode

1. Switching to remote SP when the SP is LSP1 will result in switching to

2. The operation will proceed according to remote SP inputs.

8. If the SP tracking function is enabled, the SP will become LSP2 after

switching to local SP. If the SP tracking function is disabled, the SP will re- main as LSP1. + lfthe SP tracking function is enabled when switching from local SP to remote SP, the SP ramp will operate.

Position-proportional Control Section 4-24 4-24 Position-proportional Control Closed Control Floating Control The control method used to adjust the opening and closing of a valve with a control motor is called "position-proportional control" or "ON/OFF servo con- trol." Either closed control or floating control can be selected for position-pro- portional control. Only models that support position-proportional control (ES5AN/EN-HPRRL)) can be used for position-proportional control. In addition, the following functions are disabled when using position-proportional control.

+ LBA - Heater burnout, heater short, and heater overcurrent alarms + ON/OFF control + P and PD control (for floating control only) + 40% AT (for floating control only) Closed control provides control using feedback on the valve opening by con- necting a potentiometer. Floating control provides control without using feedback on the valve opening, so control is still possible even if a potentiometer is not connected. With float- ing control, the expected valve opening is calculated from the travel time, and that value is treated as the valve opening for executing control outputs. If there is no FB input, then even if the Closed/Floating parameter is set to Closed the parameter will be disabled and floating control will be executed. Parameter Setting range Unit Default Travel Time 1 to 999 s 30 Motor Calibration and Travel Time Calibrate the motor when a potentiometer is connected, such as in closed control or in floating control for monitoring valve opening. The fully closed and fully open valve positions will be calibrated and the travel time, i.e., the time from the fully open to the fully closed position, will be automatically measured and set. Set the Motor Calibration parameter to ON to execute the motor cali- bration. The setting will be automatically changed OFF when the calibration has been completed. For floating control (i.e., without a potentiometer connection), it is necessary to manually set the travel time. Set the Travel Time parameter to the time from the fully open to the fully closed valve position. Parameter Setting range Unit Default Motor Calibration OFF, ON _— OFF

Position-proportional Dead Band and Open/Close Hysteresis The interval during which the valve output is held (for the ON and OFF switch- ing points for the open output and closed output) is set by the Position Propor- tional Dead Band parameter, and the hysteresis is set by the Open/Close PV Dead Band Valve Opening Monitor

Hysteresis parameter. Parameter Setting range Unit Default Position Proportional Position proportional (closed): 0.1 to |% 4.0 Dead Band 10.0 Position proportional (floating): 0.1 to 2.0 Open/Close Hysteresis |0.1 to 20.0 % 0.8

Openclose posiional- proportional hystere: Dead band OFF 100% co» MV — Valve opening 100% When the process value (PV) is within the PV dead band, control is executed as if the process value is equal to the set point for the current bank to prevent unnecessary outputs when the process value is in the vicinity of the set point. Parameter Setting range Unit Default PV Dead Band 0 to 32400

PV dead band Valve opening can be monitored by connecting a potentiometer. The motor must be calibrated after the potentiometer is connected. Parameter Setting range Unit Default Valve Opening Monitor —-10.0 to 110.0

Note If no potentiometer is connected or if a potentiometer input error oc- curs, "---- " will be displayed. With the ESAN/EN-H, valve opening can also be monitored on the PV/SP/MV (Valve Opening) Screen.

Logic Operations Section 4-25 Manual Operation With models that support position-proportional control, manual operation is possible by moving to the manual control level and pressing the Up and Down Keys. The output on the open side is ON while the Up Key is pressed, and the output on the closed side is ON while the Down Key is pressed. If the Direct Setting of Position Proportional MV parameter is set to ON and closed control is used, however, the Manual MV parameter can be set with the same display and operations as for standard models. MV at Stop and Error With floating control or when the Direct Setting of Position Proportional MV parameter is set to OFF, select to output open, closed, or hold status when stopped or when an error occurs. If the Direct Setting of Position Proportional MV parameter is set to ON for closed control, set the MV. 4-25 Logic Operations 4-25-1 The Logic Operation Function (CX-Thermo) + The logic operation function logically calculates as 1 or 0 the Controller status (alarms, SP ramp, RUN/STOP, auto/manual, etc.) and the external event input status, and outputs the results to work bits. The work bit status can be output to auxiliary or control outputs, and operating status can be switched according to the work bit status. Work bit logic operation can be set from 1 to 8. Set them to No operation (Always OFF) (the default) when the work bits are not to be used. When logic operations are being used, a dot will be displayed on the No. 2 dis- play of the adjustment level display Adjustment Level =] Adjustment level display SLAdu

Don / ne (: 7 pot displayed. 4-25-2 Using Logic Operations Logic operations are set using the CX-Thermo. Starting Logic There are two ways to start logic operations. Operations + Select Logic Operation Editor from the CX-Thermo tree, and click the Start Button. Fle Edt View Communications TrendMonter Options Help D & HE &| vewMode: [Advanced- Level lree<l0E|4as 12 | CH [ Channel name ] CHI Channel -1 Channel Name Channel Parameter Name Logic Operation Editor Seting ange == ET EE Î Star # O PID5 2 Er # Q PID6 # Q PID7 # © PID 8 # C3 Manual Control Level & 4 Control Stopped Parameters

1,2,3….. 1. Displaying the Library Import Dialog Box Logic operation samples for specific cases are set in the library in advance. Examples of settings for specific cases are loaded by selecting them from the library list and clicking the OK Button.

Example: Selecting Library 1 Libya (ban [ Lans Lans Lans Laye m Funchon over trot While operaion ie stopped, an auxiary output does of output an alarm. ATE 1 [Kesping an alarm output off while operation is stopped. ] m Operation ierration.

sum 2222 mur + FA Me 1 À Homes Lt) Whle operation is stopped. auxliary output 1 docs not outout alarm 1 (2) Whle eperatonis rune, auxliary output 1 outpuis alarm 1 m Configion coment Work Hi operation. Switching Work Bit Operations Select the work bit logic operations from the Operation of Work Bit 1 to Op- eration of Work Bit 8 Tab Pages. Selecting the Operation Type From one to four operations are supported. If work bits are not to be used, set them to No operation (Always OFF) (the default). + No Operation (Always OFF) (A and B) or (C and D) When conditions A and B or conditions C and D are satisfied (A or C) and (B or D) When condition A or C and condition B or D are satisfied

+ Operation 3 AorBorCorD When condition A, B, C or Dis satisfied A and B and C and D When conditions A, B, C and D are all satisfied

4. Selecting Input Assignments

Select the input assignment for the work bit logic operation from the follow- ing settings. Parameter name Setting range Work Bit 1 Input Assignment A 0: Always OFF 1: Always ON 2: ON for one cycle when power is turned ON 3: Event Input 1 (external input) (See note 1.) 4: Event Input 2 (external input) (See note 1.) 5: Event Input 3 (external input) (See note 1.) 6: Event Input 4 (external input) (See note 1.) 7: Alarm 1 8: Alarm 2 9: Alarm 3 10: Control output ON/OFF count alarm (See note 2.) 11: Control output (heating) 12: Control output (cooling) 13: Input error 14: RSP input error 15: HB (heater burnout) alarm 16: HS alarm 17: OC (heater overcurrent) alarm 18: Auto/Manual 19: RUN/STOP 20: RSP/LSP 21: Program start 22: AT Execute/Cancel 23: SP ramp operating 24: Bank No. (bit O) 25: Bank No. (bit 1) 26: Bank No. (bit 2) 27: Program end output 28: Work bit 1 29: Work bit 2 30: Work bit 3 31: Work bit 4 32: Work bit 5 33: Work bit 6 34: Work bit 7 35: Work bit 8 Work Bit 1 Input Assignment B Same as for work bit 1 input assignment A Work Bit 1 Input Assignment C Same as for work bit 1 input assignment A Work Bit 1 Input Assignment D Same as for work bit 1 input assignment A

Work Bit 8 Input Assignment D Same as for work bit 1 input assignment A (1) The event inputs that can be used depend on the Controller model.

Logic Operations Section 4-25 (2) Turns ON when either the control output 1 or 2 ON/OFF count alarm is ON.

5. Switching between Normally Open and Normally Closed for Inputs A to D

Click the condition to switch between normally open and normally closed inputs A to D. Normally open Normally closed 4+ 4

6. Switching between Normally Open and Normally Closed for Work Bits

Click the condition to switch between normally open and normally closed work bits. Normally open Normally closed

7. Setting ON Delay Times

When an input with an ON delay turns ON, the output will turn ON after the set delay time has elapsed. The setting range is 0 to 9,999. The default is 0 (disabled).

8. Setting OFF Delay Times

When an input with an OFF delay turns OFF, the output will turn OFF after the set delay time has elapsed. The setting range is O to 9,999. The default is O (disabled).

9. Switching ON/OFF Delay Time Unit

Select either seconds or minutes for the ON/OFF delay time unit. The de- fault is seconds.

10. Selecting the Number of Banks to Use

Select a number from 0 to 3 for the Bank Numbers Used parameter. (For models with two event inputs, select a number between 0 and 2.) Note If a work bit is assigned for either the Event Input Data 1 or Event Input Data 2 parameter for a model that does not support event in- puis 1 and 2 and if a number greater than Ois set for the Bank Num- bers Used parameter, then event inputs 1 and 2 will be used for bank selection. For example, if the Bank Numbers Used parameter is set to 2 for a model with event inputs 3 and 4, and the following settings are made, then event input 1 (work bit 1) and event input 2 (work bit 2) will be used for bank se- lection. - Event Input Data 1: Work bit 1 - Event Input Data 2: Work bit 2 - Event Input Data 3: Event input 3 (external input) - Event Input Data 4: Event input 4 (external input) To use event input 3 (external input) and event input 4 (external input) for bank selection, make the following settings: - Event Input Data 1: Event input 3 (external input) - Event Input Data 2: Event input 4 (external input) - Event Input Data 3: Work bit 1 - Event Input Data 4: Work bit 2

Changing Event Input Data Select the event input conditions from the following setting ranges. Parameter name Setting range Event Input Data 1 0: Not assigned. 1: Event input 1 2: Event input 2 3: Event input 3 4: Event input 4

: Work bit 1 : Work bit 2 : Work bit 3 : Work bit 4 9: Work bit 5 10: Work bit 6 11: Work bit 7 12: Work bit 8 Event Input Data 2 Same as for event input data 1 Event Input Data 3 Same as for event input data 1 Event Input Data 4 Same as for event input data 1 Note The event input data can be changed from the default setting even if there is no event input terminal (external input). By changing the default setting, the event input assignment parameters will be dis- played at the Controller display and can be set from the Controller. . Changing the Event Input Assignment Function Select the setting for the event input assignment. When a work bit is selected as event input data, Communications Write Enable/Disable cannot be assigned to an event input. . Changing Control Output and Auxiliary Output Settings Control output and auxiliary output assignments can be changed. The items that can be changed depend on the Controller model. For details, re- fer to 3-5-3 Assigned Output Functions. Assigning a work bit to either a control output or to an auxiliary output is also considered to be the same as assigning an alarm. For example, if work bit 1 is set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter, then alarms 1 to 3 have been assigned. . Displaying Parameter Guides A description of the parameters can be displayed. . Displaying the Work Bit Use Destinations Display a list of destinations where the work bits are used. This procedure uses event input 2 to change to RUN or STOP. Event input 2 ON: RUN Event input 2 OFF: STOP

Event 2 Work bit 1 (l Reverse ea L operation] Lu Always OFF

1. Select Logic Operation Editor from the CX-Thermo

tree, and click the Start Button.

2. The Logic Operation Editor will be displayed. Confirm

that the screen for work bit 1 is displayed, and select Operation 3 from the Operation Type Field.

8. Set the operation by selecting one of the following:

Work bit 1 input assignment A = 4: Event input 2 (ex- ternal input) Work bit 1 input assignment B = 0: Always OFF Work bit 1 input assignment C = 0: Always OFF Work bit 1 input assignment D = 0: Always OFF

4. Invert work bit 1. Click <

itto {/- (Normally closed). (Normally open) to change

5. _ Assign RUN/STOP to event input 2. Set “5: Work bit 1”

for the event input data for event input 2, and set “RUN/ STOP” for the assignment function.

6. Closing the Logic Operation Editor Dialog Box

Click the Close Button. This completes the procedure for setting parameters using the CX-Thermo. Transfer the settings to the Control- ler to set the Controller. Refer to CX-Thermo help for the procedure to transfer the settings.

Operating Procedure This procedure outputs alarm 1 status to auxiliary output 1 during operation (RUN). A library object is used to make the setting. CH [channel name | CHE. Channel 1 PPT] Fans Lago sat Ed

mp7 =PDe £a Manual Gonrol Level F3 £a Gontal Stopped Parameters Alarm 1 RUN/STOP Work bit 1 1 HI Almays OFF Always OFF

1. Select Logic Operation Editor from the CX-Thermo

8. Select Library 1 from the library list, and then click the

OK Button. Confirm the following settings, and then click the OK Button. Work bit 1 operation type: Operation 1 Work bit 1 input assignment À = 7: Alarm 1 Work bit 1 input assignment B = 19: Invert for RUN/ STOP Work bit 1 input assignment C = 0: Always OFF Work bit 1 input assignment D = 0: Always OFF Auxiliary output 1 = Work bit 1

4. Closing the Logic Operation Editor Dialog Box

Click the Close Button. This completes the procedure for setting parameters using the CX-Thermo. Transfer the settings to the Control- ler to set the Controller. Refer to CX-Thermo help for the procedure to transfer the settings.

Logic Operations Section 4-25

Conventions Used in this Section Section 5-1 5-1 Conventions Used in this Section 5-1-1 Meanings of Icons Used in this Section

Function Setting L_] Monitor Operation See Describes the functions of the parameter. Describes the setting range and default of the parameter. Used to indicate parameters used only for monitoring. Describes the parameter settings, such as those for Operation Commands, and procedures. Used to indicate information on descriptions in which the parameter is used or the names of related parameters. 5-1-2 About Related Parameter Displays Parameters are displayed only when the conditions for use given on the right of the parameter heading are satisfied. Protected parameters are not dis- played regardless of the conditions for use, but the settings of these parame- ters are still valid. The E5CN-H must be in operation, RE AT Execute/Cancel and control must be 2-PID control.

Displayed symbol Parameter name Conditions for use 5-1-3 The Order of Parameters in This Section 5-1-4 Alarms

Parameters are described level by level. The first page of each level describes the parameters in the level and the pro- cedure to switch between parameters. It will be specified in this section when alarms are set for the Control Output 1 or 2 Assignment parameters, or for the Auxiliary Output 1 or 3 Assignment parameters. For example, when alarm 1 is set for the Control Output 1 Assign- ment parameter, it will be specified that alarm 1 is assigned. Assigning a work bit to either control output 1 or 2 or to auxiliary output 1 to 3 is also considered to be the same as assigning an alarm. For example, if work bit 1 is set for the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter, then alarms 1 to 3 have been assigned.

Four levels of protection are provided on the E5CN-H, operation/adjustment protect, initial setting/ communications protect, setting change protect, and PF key protect (PF Key protect is supported for the E5SAN-H and E5SEN-H only). These protect levels prevent unwanted operation of the keys on the front panel in varying degrees. Operation Level ==} Adusiment Press the [0] + Ci keys: display will flash. t for at least 1 s. | EE o6 (h DO D PID Setting — Bank Setting ES (OU Level Level press me Press the [O] + 3 Keys . ress the [0] + El for at least 3 s. (See C2 Control in Progress Keys for at least 1 s. note.) Note Note The time to press the Key can be changed using the Move to Protect Level Time parameter. Protect Level To move from the operation level to the protect level, press three seconds (see note) or more. and ©] Keys for The time taken to move to the protect level can be adjusted by changing the Move to Protect Level Time parameter setting. Protect Level Page E pM51/]Move to Protect Level E PHGŸ Dipayeg ny men apassuors |172 is set E SAPE|Operation/Adjustment 172 = glProtect E LC PE]Initial Setting/ 172 E. p|Communications Protect HE PEISetting Change Protect 173 s arf] E PFPEPF Key Protect 173 m aff] Pe P. ter Mask Enable E PMGKIParameter Mask Enable SRE 173 Re M E] 1 *assword to Move to PRE Protect Level 74 Parameters that are protected will not be displayed and their settings cannot be changed.

Protect Level Section 5-2 The Password to Move to Protect Level password must not be set to O. PhaY Move to Protect Level The password to move to the protect level is entered for this parameter. + The password to move to the protect level (ï.e., the password set for the Password to Move to Protect Level parameter) is entered for this parame-

ter. Function + The Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter will be displayed if the cor- rect password is entered. EH Related Parameters See Password to move to protect level (protect level): Page 174 oRPE Operation/Adjustment Protect CCPE Initial Setting/Communications Protect These parameters specify the range of parameters to be protected. Shaded settings are the defaults. HE Operation/Adjustment Protect The following table shows the relationship between set values and the range

Function of protection. Level Set value

Operation |PV Can be displayed |Can be displayed |Can be displayed |Can be displayed Setting Level PV/SP Can be displayed |Can be displayed |Can be displayed | Can be displayed and changed and changed and changed Others Can be displayed |Can be displayed |Cannot be dis- Cannot be dis- and changed and changed played and moving to other levels is not possible played and moving to other levels is not possible Adjustment Level Can be displayed and changed Cannot be dis- played and moving to other levels is not possible Cannot be dis- played and moving to other levels is not possible Cannot be dis- played and moving to other levels is not possible + Parameters are not protected when the set value is set to O. H Initial Setting/Communications Protect This protect level restricts movement to the initial setting level, communica- tions setting level, and advanced function setting level. Set Initial setting level Communications Advanced function value setting level setting level 0 Possible to reach Possible to reach Possible to reach 1 Possible to reach Possible to reach Not possible to reach 2 Not possible to reach Not possible to reach Not possible to reach

Protect Level Section 5-2 The Event Input Assignment 1 to 4 HEPE Setting Change Protect parameters must not be set to “set- ting change enable/disable” This parameter specifies the range of data to be protected. The shaded cell indicates the default. EH Change Setting Protect l Changes to settings using key operations are restricted. Function When enabling and disabling of setting changes by event inputs assignment 1 to 4 is selected, this parameter is not displayed. Set value Description OFF Settings can be changed using key operations. ON Settings cannot be changed using key operations. (The protect level Setting settings, however, can be changed.) + The all protect indication (Om) Will light when setting is ON. The Controller must have a PF Key PFPE PF Key Protect (ESAN/EN-H), EH PF Key Protect | This parameter enables and disables PF Key operation (E5AN/EN-H only). Function Set value Description OFF PF Key enabled ON PF Key disabled (Operation as a function key is prohibited.) Setting + The shaded cell indicates the default. This parameter is displayed only PMSK Parameter Mask Enable when a parameter mask has been set from the Setup Tool. + This parameter turns the parameter mask function ON and OFF.

Protect Level Section 5-2 PRLP Password to Move to Protect Level This parameter is used to set the password to move to the protect level. / + To prevent setting the password incorrectly, the [A] and Keys or 1 and Keys must be pressed simultaneously to set the password. Function : Setting range Default @ 1999 to 9999 0 Setting + Set this parameter to O when no password is to be set. EH Related Parameters See Move to protect level (protect level): Page 172 Note Protection cannot be cleared or changed without the password. Be careful not to forget it. If you forget the password, contact your OMRON sales representa- tive.

5-3 Operation Level Display this level to perform control operations. You can set alarm values, monitor the manipulated variable, and perform other operations in this level. In the advanced function setting level, you can set a parameter to hide or show the set points. Operation —>| Adjustment | Bank Setting Ep) PID Seting Level Press the [Key for at least 1 s. Level Level Level Press the Key less than 1 s. Press the 0] Key for at least 1 s; display wil flash. EF GE press the [O1 Key for at least 3 5. ER: “+ 190 Control stops. AE Communi- nitial Setting > ci Lavall Settin c . level ontrol in progress Press the O1 Key for less than 1 s. Control stopped This level is displayed immediately after the power is turned ON. To move to other levels, press the [O] Key or the [0] and Keys.

Note For details on the displays of Controllers with a No. 3 display (E5AN/EN-H), refer to Process Value/Set Point on page 177.

Operation Level Section 5-3 The Additional PV Display parameter Process Value must be set to ON. The process value is displayed on the No. 1 display, and nothing is displayed | on the No. 2 and No. 3 (E5AN/EN-H only) displays. Function Monitor range Unit L, ] Process value Temperature: According to indication range for |EU each sensor. Analog: Scaling lower limit -5% FS to Scaling Monitor upper limit +5% FS (Refer to page 335.) During temperature input, the decimal point position depends on the currently selected sensor, and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting. EH Related Parameters See Input type: Page 224, Set point upper limit, Set point lower limit: Page 227 (ini- — tial setting level) Process Value/Set Point (Display 1) (The Process Value/Set Point (Dis- . h play 2) parameter is supported for Process Value/Set Point (Display 2) the ESAN-H and E5EN-H only.) The process value is displayed on the No. 1 display, and the set point is dis- l played on the No. 2 display. Function D ] Monitor range Unit Process value Temperature: According to indication range for |EU Monitor each sensor. Analog: Scaling lower limit -5% FS to Scaling upper limit +5% FS (Refer to page 335.) Setting range Unit Set point SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU During temperature input, the decimal point position depends on the currently selected sensor, and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting. No. 3 Display (E5AN/EN-H) The following table shows the contents of the No. 3 display, according to the setting of the PV/SP Display Screen Selection parameter. Set value Display contents 0 Only the PV and SP are displayed. (The No. 3 display is not shown.) 1 PV/SP/Bank No. and PV/SP/MV are displayed in order.

Operation Level Section 5-3 Set value Display contents PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Bank No. are displayed in order. Only PV/SP/Bank No. are displayed. PV/SP/MV are displayed PV/SP/Bank No. and PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed in order. 6 PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed in order. 7 Only PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed. GIE When 1, 2, 5, or 6 is selected, press the ©#] Key to display PV/SP (Display 2). Example: When the PV/SP Display Screen Selection Parameter Is Set to 2 Operation Level PV/SP (Display 1) PV/SP (Display 2) DT 25 m1 Press the [a] Bt ni = | key. 5 Cu non —+ 00.0 OU. ‘00.0 Dm can on a Be 500 Be ü PV/SP/MV PV/SP/Bank No. EH Related Parameters See Input type: Page 224, Set point upper limit, Set point lower limit: Page 227 (ini- — tial setting level) PV/SP display screen selection (advanced function setting level): Page 275 The Event Input Assignment 1 to 4 parameters must not be set to Auto/ Manual and the Auto/Manual Select A-H Auto/Manual Switch Addition parameter must be set to ON. The control must be set to 2-PID control. + This parameter switches the Controller between automatic and manual modes. «lfthe Key is pressed for at least 3 seconds when the Auto/Manual Operation Switch parameter is displayed, the manual mode will be entered and the manual control level will be displayed. + This parameter will not be displayed if an event input is set to “MANU” (auto/manual). EH Related Parameters See PID ON/OFF (initial setting level): Page 228 Auto/manual select addition (advanced function setting level): Page 256

Function - This parameter is used to select the bank. The SP, PID set number, SP ramp set value, alarm value, soak time, and wait band are set in bank set- ting level for each bank to be used, and then operation is switched between the banks using bank specifications (with event inputs, key oper- ations, or communications). + With this parameter, the bank is specified by using key operations. + Use the [AI and F1 Keys to specify the bank number. - The default is for the current bank number to be displayed. Operation EH Related Parameters See Bank numbers used (advanced function setting level): Page 237 The ST parameter must be set to OFF. RGP Remote SP Monitor The Remote SP Enable parameter must be set to ON. The SP Mode parameter must be set to LSP.

Monitor See + This parameter monitors the remote SP while in Local SP Mode. + While in Remote SP Mode, the remote SP can be monitored on the No. 2 display of the PV/SP Screen. Monitor range Unit limits. Remote SP lower limit to remote | EU SP upper limit There are restrictions on the SP EH Related Parameters Process value/Set point (operation level): Page 177 SP mode (adjusiment level): Page 193 Remote SP upper limit, Remote SP lower limit (advanced function setting level): Page 267 Remote SP enable (advanced function setting level): Page 266

Operation Level Section 5-3 The Bank * SP Ramp Set Value parameter must not be set to OFF, or L F the Remote SP Enable parameter SP-M Set Point During SP Ramp must be setto ON The ST parameter must be set to OFF. [— This parameter monitors the set point during SP ramp operation. A ramp is used to restrict the change width of the set point as a rate of change. This parameter is displayed when a set value is input for the Bank * SP Ramp Set Value parameter (bank setting level). When not in ramp operation, the set point will be the same as the one dis- played for the Process Value/Set Point parameter. L, | Monitor range Unit SP: SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU Function Monitor EH Related Parameters See Process value/Set point (operation level): Page 177 — Bank * SP ramp set value (bank setting level): Page 211 Set point upper limit, Set point lower limit (initial setting level): Page 227

Operation Level Section 5-3 Heater burnout, HS alarm, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported. CE! Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned. The Heater Burnout Detection or Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON. This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for | detecting heater burnout. Function This parameter measures and displays the heater current value. + Heater burnouts and heater overcurrent are not detected if the control output (heating) ON time is 100 ms or less. L, ] Monitor range Unit

Monit ‘onfor + FFFF is displayed when 55.0 A is exceeded.

• If a heater burnout detection 1 or heater overcurrent detection 1 alarm is output, the HA indicator will light and the No. 1 display for the heater cur- rent 1 value monitor will flash. EH Related Parameters See Heater burnout detection 1, Heater burnout detection 2 (adjustment level): — Page 194, 196 HB ON/OFF (advanced function setting level): Page 246 Heater overcurrent detection 1, Heater overcurrent detection 2 (adjustment level): Page 195 Heater overcurrent use (advanced function setting level): Page 272 Error displays CE !: Page 306

Operation Level Section 5-3 Heater burnout, HS alarm, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported (two CTs). CEte Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned. The Heater Burnout Detection or Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON. This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for | detecting heater burnout. Function This parameter measures and displays the heater current value. + Heater burnouts and heater overcurrent are not detected if the control output (heating) ON time is 100 ms or less. L, ] Monitor range Unit

Monit ‘onfor + FFFF is displayed when 55.0 A is exceeded.

• If a heater burnout detection 2 or heater overcurrent detection 2 alarm is output, the HA indicator will light and the No. 1 display for the heater cur- rent 2 value monitor will flash. EH Related Parameters See Heater burnout detection 1, Heater burnout detection 2 (adjustment level): — Page 194, 196 HB ON/OFF (advanced function setting level): Page 246 Heater overcurrent detection 1, Heater overcurrent detection 2 (adjustment level): Page 195, 196 Heater overcurrent use (advanced function setting level): Page 272 Error displays [E2: Page 306

Operation Level Section 5-3 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be LCR! Leakage Current 1 Monitor supported. The HS Alarm Use parameter must be set to ON. This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for l detecting SSR short-circuits. Function The heater current is measured and the leakage current 1 monitor is dis- played. + HS alarms are not detected if the control output (heating) OFF time is 100 ms or less. L, | Monitor range Unit

Monitor + FFFF is displayed when 55.0 A is exceeded. + lfan HS alarm 1 alarm is output, the HA indicator will light and the No. 1 display for the leakage current 1 monitor will flash. EH Related Parameters See HS alarm 1, HS alarm 2 (adjustment level): Page 197 + Failure detection (advanced function setting level): Page 257 Error displays LCR |: Page 306 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be LCRe Leakage Current 2 Monitor supported (io GTS): gred. The HS Alarm Use parameter must be set to ON. This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for | detecting SSR short-circuits. This parameter measures and displays the heater current value. Function + HS alarms are not detected if the control output (heating) OFF time is 100 ms or less. L, ] Monitor range Unit

Monit ‘onfor + FFFF is displayed when 55.0 A is exceeded. + If an HS alarm 2 alarm is output, the HA indicator will light and the No. 1 display for the leakage current 2 monitor will flash. EH Related Parameters See HS alarm 1, HS alarm 2 (adjustment level): Page 197 + HS alarm use (advanced function setting level): Page 257 Error displays L [F2: Page 306

Operation Level Section 5-3 The Event Input Assignment 1 to 4 R-5 RUN/STOP parameters must not be set to “RUN/ STOP” This parameter starts and stops the control operation. When FUN (RUN) is selected, control is started. When 5£aP (STOP) is selected, control is stopped. The STOP indicator will light when control. Operation The default is FUN. This parameter will not be displayed if an event input is set to “RUN/STOP” See Alarm 1 must be assigned. AL- 1! Alarm Value 1 The alarm 1 type must not be 0, 1,4, 5, or 12. This parameter is set to one of the input values “X” in the alarm type list. + This parameter sets the alarm value for alarm 1. | + During temperature input, the decimal point position depends on the cur- rently selected sensor, and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Function Point parameter setting. + The set value is saved in the Alarm 1 parameter in the current bank. Setting range Unit Default @ 1999 to 9999 EU 0 Setting EH Related Parameters See Input type: Page 224, Scaling upper limit, Scaling lower limit, Decimal point — (initial setting level): Page 226 (initial setting level) Alarm 1 type (initial setting level): Page 231 Standby sequence reset: Page 244, Auxiliary output * open in alarm: Page 245, Alarm 1 hysteresis: Page 233, Alarm 1 latch: Page 250 (advanced func- tion setting level) Bank * alarm value 1 (bank setting level): Page 211

Function Setting These parameters independently set the alarm value upper and lower limits when the mode for setting the upper and lower limits is selected for the Alarm 2 Type parameter (initial setting level). + This parameter sets the upper and lower limit values of alarm 2. + During temperature input, the decimal point position depends on the cur- rently selected sensor, and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting. + The set value is saved in the Alarm Value Upper Limit 2 and Alarm Value Lower Limit 2 parameters in the current bank. Setting range Unit Default —1999 to 9999 |EU 0

This parameter is used to check the manipulated variable for the heating con- trol output during operation. + This parameter cannot be set. + During standard control, the manipulated variable is monitored. During heating/cooling control, the manipulated variables on the control output (heating) is monitored. + The default is OFF and the manipulated variable is not displayed. Control Monitor range Unit Standard —5.0 to 105.0 % Heating/cooling 0.0 to 105.0 %

Operation Level Section 5-3 EH Related Parameters See MV display (advanced function setting level): Page 250 The control system must be set to -5 ï i heating/cooling control. L-a MV Monitor (Cooling) The MV Display parameter must be set to ON. This parameter is used to check the manipulated variable for the cooling con- trol output during operation. + This parameter cannot be set. l + During heating/cooling control, the manipulated variable on the control Function output (cooling) is monitored. + The default is OFF and the manipulated variable is not displayed. L, | Control Monitor range Unit Heating/cooling 0.0 to 105.0 % Monitor EH Related Parameters See Standard or heating/cooling (initial setting level): Page 228 MV display (advanced function setting level): Page 250 Position-proportional control must be supported. The No. 3 display must be supported. The PV/SP Display Screen Selection parameter must be set to O, 3, 5, or

-M Valve Opening Monitor This parameter monitors the valve opening during operation. - This parameter monitors the valve opening when position-proportional | control is used. + The valve opening can be monitored if a potentiometer is connected and Function motor calibration is executed. L, ] Control Monitor range Unit Position-proportional -10.0 to 110.0 |% Monitor EH Related Parameters See Moîtor calibration (initial setting level): Page 240 PV/SP display screen selection (advanced function setting level): Page 275

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 5-4 Adjustment Level This level is for executing AT (auto-tuning) and other operations, and for set control parameters. This Digital Controllers the basic Controller parameters for PID control (pro- portional band, integral time, derivative time) and heating/cooling control.

Operation Level —> Deeent Key for at least 1 s. PID Seting _ |@ Bank Setting Level Level CD Control in progress To move to the adjustment level from the operation level, press the [O1 Key once. - The following parameters are displayed for Controllers with CT Inputs: Heater current monitors, Leakage current monitors, heater burnout detec- tions, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detections. + Adjustment level parameters can be changed after setting the Operation/ Adjustment Protect parameter to 0. Displays and changing levels are not possible if the Operation/Adjustment Protect parameter is set to 1 to 3. Protection is set in the protect level.

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 LAdu Adjustment Level Display This parameter is displayed after moving to the adjustment level. When a logic operation is set, a period "." will be displayed on the No. 2. dis- play. - This parameter indicates that the adjustment level has been entered. | (The Adjusiment Level parameter will not be displayed again even if the El Key is pressed in the adjustment level to scroll through the parame- Function ters.) The ramp must be in operation, and 2-PID control must be used. Event RE AT Execute/Cancel Input Assignments 1 to 4 parameters must be other than 100% or 40% AT Execute/Cancel. This parameter executes auto-tuning (AT). + The MV is forcibly increased and decreased around the set point to find | the characteristics of the control object. From the results, the PID con- stants are automatically set in the Proportional Band (P), Integral Time (l), and Derivative Time (D) parameters. + Both 100% AT and 40% AT are supported for AT. + Only 100% AT can be executed for heating/cooling control and position- proportional floating control. + This parameter will not be displayed when either 100% or 40% AT exe- cute/cancel is set to be executed using an event input. Function Setting rage Default OFF: AT Cancel OFF Operation AT-2: 100%AT Execute AT-1: 40%AT Execute < This parameter is normally aFF. Press the [A] Key and select AE -2 or AE - !to execute AT. AT cannot be executed when control is stopped or during ON/OFF control. + When AT execution ends, the parameter setting automatically returns to GFF. EH Related Parameters Se) PID * proportional band, PID * Integral time, PID * Derivative time (PID setting level): Page 217 PID ON/OFF (initial setting level): Page 228

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 Communications must be supported. CMHE Communications Writing The Event Input Assignments 1 to 4 parameters must not be set to enable communications writing. + This parameter enables/disables writing of parameters to the Digital Con- | trollers from the host (personal computer) using communications. - This parameter is not displayed if communications write enable/disable is Functi j il i Î unction set for execution using an event input assignment 1 to 4. ON: Writing enabled CO OFF: Writing disabled + Default: OFF Setting EH Related Parameters See MB command logic switching (advanced function setting level): Page 252 Communications unit No., Communications baud rate, Communications data length, Communications parity, Communications stop bits (communications setting level): Page 281 = A n Infrared communications must be cRdR Infrared Communications Use supported. This parameter enables or disables infrared communications between the [ de host (personal computer) and the Digital Controller. + Set this parameter to ON only when connecting to a Setup Tool, and leave Function it set to OFF during normal operation. @ ON: Infrared communications enabled. OFF: Infrared communications disabled. Setting + Default: OFF The ST parameter must be set to OFF. The Remote SP Enable parameter SPA SP Mode must be set to ON. The Event Input Assignment 1 to 4 parameters must not be set to switch to SP mode. + This parameter is used to select the SP mode. l + In Local SP Mode, the local SP set in bank is used as the target value in the control operation. In Remote SP Mode, the remote SP set via an Functi : : : notion external signal (e.g., 4 to 20 mA) is used as the target value in the control operation. @ Setting range Default RSP: Remote SP, LSP: Local SP LSP Setting

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 EH Related Parameters See Remote SP enable (advanced function setting level): Page 266 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported. CE! Heater Current 1 Value Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HB ON/OFF parameter or Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON. This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for [TT detecting heater burnout. This parameter measures and displays the heater current value. + Heater burnouts or heater overcurrent are not detected if the control out- put (heating) ON time is 100 ms or less. L, | Monitor range Unit

Function Monit ‘onfor + FFFF is displayed when 55.0 A is exceeded.

• If a heater burnout detection 1 or heater overcurrent detection 1 alarm is output, the HA indicator will light and the No. 1 display for the heater cur- rent 1 value monitor will flash. EH Related Parameters See Heater burnout detection 1, Heater burnout detection 2 (adjustment level): — Page 194, 196 HB ON/OFF (advanced function setting level): Page 246 Heater overcurrent detection 1, Heater overcurrent detection 2 (adjustment level): Page 195, 196 Heater overcurrent use (advanced function setting level): Page 272 Error displays CE !: Page 306 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be ï supported. Hb! Heater Burnout Detection 1 Alarm 1 must be assigned. The Heater Burnout Detection parameter must be set to ON. This parameter sets the current for the heater burnout alarm to be output. + The heater burnout alarm is output when the heater current value falls | below the setting of this parameter. + When the set value is 0.0, the heater burnout alarm output is turned OFF. Function When the set value is 50.0, the heater burnout alarm output is turned ON. C\ Setting range Unit Default

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 EH Related Parameters See Heater current 1 value monitor (adjustment level): Page 181 HB ON/OFF, Heater burnout latch, Heater burnout hysteresis (advanced func- tion setting level): Page 246, 247 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be _ : supported. ol | Heater Overcurrent Detection 1 Alarm 1 must be assigned. The Heater Overcurrent Use ON/ OFF parameter must be set to ON. This parameter sets the current value for heater overcurrent alarm outputs. + A heater overcurrent alarm is output when the heater current exceeds the l value set for this parameter. + When the set value is 50.0, the heater overcurrent alarm is turned OFF. Function When the set value is 0.0, the heater overcurrent alarm is turned ON. C\ Setting range Unit Default

Setting EH Related Parameters See Heater current 1 value monitor (adjustment level): Page 181 —— Heater overcurrent use, Heater overcurrent latch, Heater overcurrent hystere- sis (advanced function setting level): Page 272, 273 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported (two CTs). CEe Heater Current 2 Value Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HB ON/OFF or Heater Overcur- rent Use parameter must be set to ON. This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting heater burnout. This parameter measures and displays the heater current value. / + Heater burnouts and heater overcurrent are not detected if the control output (heating) ON time is 100 ms or less. Function L, | Monitor range Unit

Monitor + FFFF is displayed when 55.0 A is exceeded.

• If a heater burnout detection 2 or heater overcurrent detection 2 alarm is output, the HA indicator will light and the No. 1 display for the heater cur- rent 2 value monitor will flash.

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 EH Related Parameters See Heater burnout detection 1, Heater burnout detection 2 (adjustment level): — Page 194, 196 HB ON/OFF (advanced function setting level): Page 246 Heater overcurrent detection 1, Heater overcurrent detection 2 (adjustment level): Page 195, 196 Heater overcurrent use (advanced function setting level): Page 272 Error displays [E2: Page 306 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported (two CTs). Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HB ON/OFF parameter must be set to ON. Hbe Heater Burnout Detection 2 This parameter sets the current for the heater burnout alarm to be output. + The heater burnout alarm is output when the heater current value falls | below the setting of this parameter. + When the set value is 0.0, the heater burnout alarm output is turned OFF. Function When the set value is 50.0, the heater burnout alarm output is turned ON. C) Setting range Unit Default

Setting EH Related Parameters See Heater current 2 value monitor (adjustment level): Page 182 HB ON/OFF, Heater burnout latch, Heater burnout hysteresis (advanced func- tion setting level): Page 246 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported (two CTs). Alarm 1 must be assigned. The Heater Overcurrent Use param- eter must be set to ON. ole Heater Overcurrent Detection 2 This parameter sets the current value for heater overcurrent alarm outputs. + A heater overcurrent alarm is output when the heater current exceeds the value set for this parameter.

Function + When the set value is 50.0, the heater overcurrent alarm is turned OFF. When the set value is 0.0, the heater overcurrent alarm is turned turn ON. @ Setting range Unit Default

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 EH Related Parameters See Heater current 2 value monitor (adjustment level): Page 182 Heater overcurrent use, Heater overcurrent latch, Heater overcurrent hystere- sis (advanced function setting level): Page 272, 273 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON. LCR! Leakage Current 1 Monitor This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting SSR short-circuits. This parameter measures and displays the heater current when the heater is l OFF. + HS alarms are not detected if the control output (heating) OFF time is 100 ms or less. L, | Monitor range Unit

Function Monitor + FFFF is displayed when 55.0 A is exceeded. + lfan HS alarm 1 alarm is output, the HA indicator will light and the No. 1 display for the leakage current 1 monitor will flash. EH Related Parameters See HS alarm 1, HS alarm 2 (adjustment level): Page 197 + HS alarm use (advanced function setting level): Page 257 Error displays LCR |: Page 306 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be ! supported. H5 1 HS Alarm 1 Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON. This parameter sets the current for the HS alarm to be output. l + An HS alarm is output when the leakage current value exceeds the set- ting of this parameter. Function + When the set value is 50.0, the HS alarm output is turned OFF. When the set value is 0.0, the HS alarm output is turned ON. @ Setting range Unit Default

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 EH Related Parameters See Leakage current 1 monitor (adjustment level): Page 197 HS alarm, HS alarm latch, HS alarm hysteresis (advanced function setting level): Page 257 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be h supported (two CTs). LCRe Leakage Current 2 Monitor Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON. This parameter measures the heater current from the CT input used for detecting SSR short-circuits. This parameter measures and displays the heater current value. l + HS alarms are not detected if the control output (heating) OFF time is 100 ms or less. Function L, | Monitor range Unit

Monitor + FFFF is displayed when 55.0 A is exceeded. + If an HS alarm 2 alarm is output, the HA indicator will light and the No. 1 display for the leakage current 2 monitor will flash. EH Related Parameters See HS alarm 1, HS alarm 2 (adjustment level): Page 197 HS alarm use (advanced function setting level): Page 257 Error displays L [F2: Page 306 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported (two CTs). H5e HS Alarm 2 Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON. This parameter sets the current for the HS alarm to be output. + An HS alarm is output when the leakage current value exceeds the set- l ting of this parameter. + When the set value is 50.0, the HS alarm output is turned OFF. When the Function set value is 0.0, the HS alarm output will turn ON. ( Setting range Unit Default

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 EH Related Parameters See Leakage current 2 monitor (adjustment level): Page 198 HS alarm use, HS alarm latch, HS alarm hysteresis (advanced function set- ting level): Page 257 The Input Type parameter must be L set for a thermocouple or resistance NS Temperature Input Shift thermometer, and the Input Shift Type parameter must be set to a one-point shift. Sometimes an error occurs between the set point and the actual temperature. To offset this, a compensated value can be obtained by adding an input shift value to the input. The compensated value is displayed as the measurement value and used for control. The entire input range is shifted by a fixed rate (1-point shift). If the input shift l value is set to -1°C, control will be performed for a value 1°C lower than the measured temperature. Function CC) Setting range Unit Default —199.99 to 324.00 °C or °F 0.00 Setting EH Related Parameters See Input type (initial setting level): Page 224 Input shift type (advanced function setting level): Page 256 CNGH Upper-limit Temperature Input Shift Value The Input Type parameter must be set for a thermocouple or resistance thermometer andthe Input Shift Type CNSE Lower-limit Temperature Input Shift Value parameter must be set to a 2-point shift. These parameters are used to shift the input temperature at two points: an l upper-limit temperature and a lower-limit temperature (as opposed to the Temperature Input Shift parameter, which shifts the input temperature by set- ting the shift for only one point). À 2-point shift enables more accurate offset of the input range compared with a 1-point shift if the input shift values at the upper and lower limits differ. This parameter sets input shift values for the upper and lower limits (2-point shift) of the input range. Function Setting range Unit Default Setting —199.99 to 324.00 °Cor°F 0.00 EH Related Parameters See Input type (initial setting level): Page 224 Input shift type (advanced function setting level): Page 256

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 Proportional Band The control must be set to 2-PID : control. Integral Time Derivative Time CR: These parameters set PID control constants. PID constants are automatically set when AT or ST is executed. P action: Refers to control in which the MV is proportional to the deviation l (control error). l'action: Refers to a control action that is proportional to the time integral of the deviation. With proportional control, there is normally an offset (control error). Proportional action is thus used in combination with integral action. As time passes, this control error disappears, and the control temperature (process value) comes to agree with the set point. D action: Refers to a control action that is proportional to the time derivative of the control error. The proportional control and integral control cor- rect for errors in the control result, and thus the control system is late in responding to sudden changes in temperature. The derivative action increases the MV in proportion to the slope of the change in the temperature as a corrective action. + The set values are saved in the Proportional Band, Integral Time, and Derivative Time parameters for the selected PID set. Function Parameter Models Unit Default @ name Proportional Controllers with Temperature °Cor°F 8.0 Band Inputs: 0.1 to 3,240.0 Analog input: 0.1 to 999.9 %FS 10.0 Integral Time Standard, heating/cooling, or posi- | Second 233.0 tion-proportional (close) control:

Position-proportional (floating) control: 0.1 to 3,240.0 Derivative Time |0.0 to 3240.0 Second 40.0 Setting EH Related Parameters Se) AT execute/cancel (adjustment level): Page 192 PID * proportional band, PID * Integral time, PID * Derivative time (PID setting level): Page 217

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 The control must be heating/cooling control and 2-PID control. C-5£ Cooling Coefficient If the heating characteristics and cooling characteristics of the control object are very different and good control characteristics cannot be achieved with the same PID constants, the cooling coefficient can be used to adjust the propor- tional band (P) for the control output assigned to the cooling side. + In heating/cooling control, the proportional band P for the cooling control | output is calculated using the following formula to set the cooling coeffi- cient: Function Cooling control output side P = Cooling coefficient x P (proportional band) + When the Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjustment parameter is set to ON, the cooling coefficient is set automatically when AT is executed. If there is strong non-linear gain for the cooling characteristics, however, it may not be possible to obtain the optimum cooling coefficient at the Con- troller. + The set value is saved in the Cooling Coefficient parameter for the current PID set. CF Setting range Unit Default

0.01 to 99.99 None 1.00

Setting EH Related Parameters See Proportional band (adjustment level): Page 200 Automatic cooling coefficient adjustment (advanced function setting level): Page 271 PID * cooling coefficient (PID setting level): Page 219 C-db Dead Band The control system must be set to heating/cooling control. This parameter sets the output dead band width for heating/cooling control. A [ negative setting sets an overlapping band. + This parameter sets an area in which the control output is O centering Function around the set point for a heating/cooling control. @ Model Setting range Unit Default Temperature input —19999.9 to °Cor°F 0.0 Setting 3240.00 Analog input -19.99 to 99.99 |%FS 0.00

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 The control must be standard control CT and 2-PID control. oF-R Manual Reset Value The Integral Time parameter for PID sets 1 to 8 must be set to O.

+ This parameter sets the required manipulated variable to remove offset during stabilization of P or PD control. Function Setting range Unit Default

Setting EH Related Parameters See PID * integral time (PID setting level): Page 217 PID ON/OFF (initial setting level): Page 228 Hys Hysteresis (Heating) The control must be ON/OFF control. For the Hysteresis (Cooling) parame- CHYG Hysteresis (Cooling) ter, the control must be heating/cool- ing control.

EH Related Parameters See Program start, Soak time remain (operation level): Page 184 + Bank * wait band, Bank * soak time (Bank setting level): Page 215 Program pattern (initial setting level): Page 229 Soak time unit (advanced function setting level): Page 266

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 The control must be set to 2-PID 1 control. M5 MV at Stop The MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter must be ON. + This parameter sets the MV to use when the RUN/STOP status changes l from RUN to STOP. Function Setting range Unit Default CC Standard control: -5.0 to 105.0 % 0.0 Heating/cooling control: -105.0 to 105.0 Setting Position-proportional control (close, with the Direct Setting of Position Proportional MV parameter ON): -5.0 to 105.0 Position-proportional control (floating or None HOLD with the Direct Setting of Positional Propor- tional MV parameter OFF): CLOS, HOLD, OPEN EH Related Parameters See RUN/STOP (operation level): Page 185 MV at stop and error addition (advanced function setting level): Page 256 The control must be set to 2-PID 1 control. MY -E MV at PV Error The MV at Stop and Error Addition parameter must be ON. + This parameter sets the MV to use when an input error occurs.

Function Setting range Unit Default C\ Standard control: -5.0 to 105.0 % 0.0 Heating/cooling control: -105.0 to 105.0 Setting Position-proportional control (close, with the Direct Setting of Position Proportional MV parameter ON): -5.0 to 105.0 Position-proportional control (floating or None HOLD with the Direct Setting of Positional Propor- tional MV parameter OFF): CLOS, HOLD, OPEN EH Related Parameters See MV at stop and error addition (advanced function setting level): Page 256

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 GPRE SP Ramp Set Value QT parameter must be set to + This parameter sets the rate of change during SP ramp operation. Set the | maximum permissible change width per unit of time as the SP ramp set value. The SP ramp function is disabled if this parameter is set to OFF. + During temperature input, the decimal point position of the SP ramp set value is dependent on the currently selected sensor, and during analog input it is dependent on scaling. - The set value is saved in the SP Ramp Set Value parameter for the cur- rent bank. Function Setting range Unit Default OFF or 1to 32400 |EU/s or EU/minute |afF Setting EH Related Parameters See Input type: Page 224, Scaling upper limit, Scaling lower limit, Decimal point — (initial setting level): Page 226, ST: Page 228 (initial setting level) SP ramp time unit (advanced function setting level): Page 244 Bank * SP ramp set value (bank setting level): Page 211 ol -H MV Upper Limit The control must be set to 2-PID control. The ST parameter must be set to tt MV Lower Limit OFF. Position-proportional (close) control must be supported. + The MV Upper Limit and MV Lower Limit parameters set the upper and | lower limits of the manipulated variable. When the calculated manipulated variable exceeds the upper or lower limit value, the upper or lower limit Function value will be the output level. + The set value is saved in the MV Upper Limit and MV Lower Limit param- eters for the current PID set. + MV Upper Limit The setting ranges during standard control, heating/cooling control, and position-proportional (close) control are different. CC) Control method Setting range Unit Default Standard MV lower limit + 0.1 to 105.0 % 105.0 Seting Heating/cooling 0.0 to 105.0 Position proportional | MV lower limit + 0.1 to 105.0 (close)

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 + MV Lower Limit The setting ranges during standard control, heating/cooling control, and position-proportional (close) control are different. The manipulated vari- able for the cooling control output side during heating/cooling control is expressed as a negative value. Control method Setting range Unit Default Standard -5.0 to MV upper limit -0.1 % -5.0 Heating/cooling -105.0 to 0.0 -105.0 Position proportional | 5.0 to MV upper limit -0.1 -5.0 (close) EH Related Parameters See PID ON/OFF: Page 228, ST: Page 228 (initial setting level) PID * MV upper limit, PID * MV lower limit (PID setting level): Page 217 2-PID control must be used. ofl MV Change Rate Limit ST must be OFF + The MV Change Rate Limit parameter sets the maximum allowable varia- | tion in the MV per second. [f the change in the MV exceeds this setting, the MV will be changed by the MV change rate limit until the calculated Function value is reached. If the limit is set to 0.0, this function will be disabled. + The MV Change Rate Limit parameter will not operate in the following sit- uations. + In manual mode + During ST execution (Cannot be set when ST is ON.) + During AT execution + During ON/OFF control + While stopped (MV output during STOP) + During MV output when error occurs Setting range Unit Default

Setting EH Related Parameters See Proportional band (adjustment level): Page 200

Adjustment Level Section 5-4 db Position Proportional Dead Band Position-proportional control must be supported. + This parameter sets the output hold interval (the ON/OFF switching inter- | val between the open and close outputs) for position-proportional control. Function Setting range Unit Default FS Position proportional (close): % 4.0 un 0.1 to 10.0 Setting Position proportional (floating): % 2.0

EH Related Parameters See Open/close hysteresis (adjustment level): Page 207 ET ï Position-proportional control must be oC-H Open/Close Hysteresis supported. - This parameter provides hysteresis in position-proportional control when l the open and close outputs are switched ON or OFF.

Setting Setting range Unit Default

EH Related Parameters See Position proportional dead band (adjustment level): Page 207 The input type must be an analog ï » ñ input, and the Extraction of Square SGRP Extraction of Square Root Low-cut Point cr Enable parameter must be set to ON. + This parameter sets the extraction of square root low-cut point used for l the inputs. The data after extracting the square root is shown below. Function

+ The low-cut point is used for extracting the square root for flowrate sen- sors. Operation result 100% FS Extraction of square root low-cut point 1002 FS Argument 1 (input data) Setting range Unit Default

5-5 Bank Setting Level PID Setting Level [operation Level Press the for at least 1 The bank setting level is used to make settings such as the SP, PID set, alarm value, soak time, and wait band for each bank. Move to a particular bank from the Display Bank Selection parameter, which is displayed first in the bank selection level. Adjustment Level key

being perlormed Bank Setting Level ‘Temperature control

Bank Setting Level Section 5-5 dbNK Display Bank Selection The parameter is used to select the bank for making the display settings. + This parameter selects the bank number for which the display settings are l to be made. + Up to eight banks (0 to 7) can be used. The following items are registered Function in each bank: SP, alarm value, SP ramp set value, soak time, and wait band. Setting range Default Setting Oto7 See note. Note The current bank will be displayed. If you use the U and D Keys to change the bank number, the monitor function will be canceled. EH Related Parameters See Bank No. (operation level): Page 179 — Bank numbers used (initial setting level): Page 237 *LSP Bank (0 to 7) SP These parameters are used to set the SP for each bank. + The SP can be set for banks 0 to 7. Setting range Default Setting SP lower limit to SP upper limit 0.0 EH Related Parameters See PV/SP (operation level): Page 177 *Pcd Bank (0 to 7) PID Set No. 2-PID control must be used. These parameters are used to set the PID set for each bank. + The PID set can be set for banks 0 to 7. l - Ifthe parameter is set to O, the PID set that is automatically selected with the PID set automatic selection function, based on the PV, DV, and SP, will Function be used for control. To specify the PID set, set a number from 1 to 8. Setting range Default Oto8 1 Setting

Bank Setting Level Section 5-5 EH Related Parameters See PID (*) proportional band, PID (*) integral time, PID (*) derivative time (PID — setting level): Page 217 PID (*) automatic selection range upper limit (PID setting level): Page 218 PID set automatic selection data (advanced function setting level): Page 269 *GPR Bank 0 to 7 SP Ramp Set Value QEST parameter must be set 1 These parameters are used to set the SP ramp set value for each bank. + The SP ramp set value can be set for banks 0 to 7. | + This parameter specifies the rate of change during SP ramp operation. Set the maximum allowable change width per unit of time as the SP ramp set value. When this parameter set to OFF, the SP ramp function will be disabled. + During temperature input, the decimal point position for the SP ramp set value depends on the current sensor, and during analog input it depends Function on scaling. Setting range Unit Default Setting OFF, 1 to 32400 EU/s, EU/min, EU/h OFF EH Related Parameters See Input type: Page 224 — Scaling upper limit, Scaling lower limit, Decimal point: Page 226 ST (initial setting level): Page 228 SP ramp time unit (advanced function setting level): Page 244 Bank * Alarm Value 1 Alarm 1 must be assigned.The alarm 1 type must not be 0, 1,4,5, At (0 to 7) ou These parameters set one of the input values "X" in the alarm type list for each bank. + These parameters set the value for alarm value 1 in banks 0 to 7. | + During temperature input, the decimal point position is set automatically according to the current sensor, and during analog input it depends on the Function Decimal Point parameter setting. Setting range Unit Default Setting —19999 to 32400 EU 0.0

Function These parameters set the alarm value upper and lower limits individually for each bank when the mode for setting the upper and lower limits is selected for the Alarm 1 Type parameter (initial setting level). + These parameters set the upper and lower limits of alarm 1 for banks 0 to + During temperature input, the decimal point position is set automatically according to the current sensor, and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting. Setting range Unit Default Setting —19999 to 32400 EU 0.0 EH Related Parameters Se) Input type: Page 224 — Scaling upper limit, Scaling lower limit, Decimal point: Page 226 Alarm 1 type (initial setting level): Page 231 Standby sequence reset: Page 244 Auxiliary output * open in alarm: Page 245 Alarm 1 hysteresis: Page 233 Alarm 1 latch (advanced function level): Page 250 , Bank * Alarm Value 2 Alarm 2 must be assigned. R-e * Oto7 The alarm 2 type must not be 0, 1, ( " O ) 4, or 5, or 12.

These parameters set one of the input values "X" in the alarm type list for each bank. + These parameters set the value for alarm value 2 in banks 0 to 7. + During temperature input, the decimal point position is set automatically according to the current sensor, and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting.

Function These parameters set the alarm value upper and lower limits individually for each bank when the mode for setting the upper and lower limits is selected for the Alarm 2 Type parameter (initial setting level). + These parameters set the upper and lower limits of alarm 2 for banks 0 to + During temperature input, the decimal point position is set automatically according to the current sensor, and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting. Setting range Unit Default Setting —19999 to 32400 EU 0.0 EH Related Parameters See Input type: Page 224 — Scaling upper limit, Scaling lower limit, Decimal point: Page 226 Alarm 2 type (initial setting level): Page 233 Standby sequence reset: Page 244 Auxiliary output * open in alarm: Page 245 Alarm 2 hysteresis: Page 233 Alarm 2 latch (advanced function level): Page 250 Bank * Alarm Value 3 Alarm 3 must be assigned. *A-3 The alarm 3 type must not be 0, 1, (:0to7) 4,5, or 12.

+ During temperature input, the decimal point position is set automatically according to the current sensor, and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting. Setting range Unit Default Setting —19999 to 32400 EU 0.0 EH Related Parameters See Input type: Page 224 — Scaling upper limit, Scaling lower limit, Decimal point: Page 226 Alarm 3 type (initial setting level): Page 234 Standby sequence reset: Page 244 Auxiliary output * open in alarm: Page 245 Alarm 3 hysteresis: Page 233 Alarm 3 latch (advanced function level): Page 250 *R3H Bank * Alarm Value Upper Limit 3 Alarm 3 must be assigned. The alarm 3 type must be set to “07 Bank * Alarm Value Lower Limit 3 supper and lower limit alarm," “ RL *: 0 to 7 upper and lower limit range alarm, C: 0 7) or “upper and lower limit alarm with standby sequence."

These parameters set the alarm value upper and lower limits individually for each bank when the mode for setting the upper and lower limits is selected for the Alarm 3 Type parameter (initial setting level). + These parameters set the upper and lower limits of alarm 3 for banks 0 to + During temperature input, the decimal point position is set automatically according to the current sensor, and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting. Setting range Unit Default —19999 to 32400 EU 0.0 EH Related Parameters Input type: Page 224 Scaling upper limit, Scaling lower limit, Decimal point: Page 226 Alarm 3 type (initial setting level): Page 234 Standby sequence reset: Page 244 Auxiliary output * open in alarm: Page 245 Alarm 3 hysteresis: Page 233 Alarm 3 latch (advanced function level): Page 250

Function Setting See These parameters set the wait band for each bank. + These parameters set the stable band, in each bank, within which the soak time is measured for the simple program function. + When the bank function is enabled, this parameter is enabled when the current bank program pattern is not set to OFF. Setting range Unit Default Temperature: OFF, |°Cor°F oFF

Analog: OFF, 0.01 to |%FS

EH Related Parameters Program start, Soak time remain (operation level): Page 184 Bank (*) soak time (bank setting level): Page 215 Program pattern (initial setting level): Page 229 Soak time unit (advanced function setting level): Page 266

5-6 PID Setting Level The PID setting level is used to make settings such as PID values for each PID set and MV limit values. Move to a particular PID set from the Display PID Set Selection parameter, which is displayed first in the PID setting level.

PID Setting Level Display PID Salseion lOperation Level for at least 1 s. Press the [0] Key Adjustment Level

Bank Setting Level Temperature control C2 vend pertormed PID Setting Level Pine Preporiona sand FE ]PID 8 integral Time ID 8 Denvatve Time PID 8 MV Upper Limit PID 8 1 Lower Limit dPcd Display PID Selection This parameter is used to select the PID set for making the display settings. + This parameter selects the PID set for which the display settings are to be made. + Up to eight sets (1 to 8) can be used. The following items registered in each set: PID value, MV upper and lower limits, automatic selection range upper limit, cooling coefficient, and LBA detection time.

Function Setting range Default Setting 1t08 See note. Note The current PID set will be displayed. If you use the U and D Keys to change the PID set, the monitor function will be canceled. EH Related Parameters See Bank No. (operation level): Page 179

PID Setting Level Section 5-6 *P PID * Proportional Band XL PID * Integral Time 2-PID control must be used. *d PID * Derivative Time (*: 1 to 8) These parameters set the PID constants for each PID set. When AT and ST are executed, the parameters are set automatically. P action: Forthe P action, the MV is proportional to the derivative. [ l'action: Forthe | action, an output is produced that is proportional to the time integral of the derivative. An offset normally occurs with the proportional Function action, so the proportional action is used in combination with the inte- gral action. As time passes, this offset disappears and the control tem- perature comes to match the set point. D action: Forthe D action, an output is produced that is proportional to the time derivative of the input. Because the proportional action and integral action correct for errors in the control result, the control system will be slow to respond to sudden changes in temperature. The derivative action performs a corrective action by increasing the MV in proportion to the slope of the temperature change. æ Parameter Setting range Unit Default Setting Proportional Temperature: 0.1 to 3,240.0 °Cor°F 8.0 Band Analog: 0.1 to 999.9 %FS 10.0 Integral Time Standard/heating and cooling, s 233.0 position proportional (closed): 0.0 to 3,240.0 Position proportional (floating): 0.1 to 3,240.0 Derivative Time | 0.0 to 3240.0 s 40.0 Note lfihe settings for RT (robust tuning) are changed, the P (proportion- al band), ! (integral time), and D (derivative time) will be initialized. EH Related Parameters Se AT execute/cancel (adjustment level): Page 192 *oLH PID * MV Upper Limit 2-PID control must be used. The ST parameter must be set to “=11 PID * MV Lower Limit OFF. -2kE (: 1to8) Closed control must be used (for position proportional models). These parameters set the MV upper and lower limits for each PID set. + The MV Upper Limit and MV Lower Limit parameters set the upper and | lower limits of the manipulated variable. When the calculated manipulated variable exceeds the upper or lower limit value, the upper or lower limit Function value will be the output level. + MV limits do not operate when floating control is used with models that support position-proportional control, so these parameters are disabled.

PID Setting Level Section 5-6 + MV Upper Limit @ The setting range depends on whether standard, position-proportional (closed) control, or heating/cooling control is used. In addition, the cooling Setting MV during heating/cooling control is expressed as a negative value. Control method Setting range Unit Default Standard MV lower limit + 0.1 to 105.0 % 105.0 Heating/cooling 0.0 to 105.0 Position-propor- MV lower limit + 0.1 to 105.0 tional (closed) + MV Lower Limit The setting range depends on whether standard, position-proportional (closed) control, or heating/cooling control is used. In addition, the cooling MV during heating/cooling control is expressed as a negative value. Control method Setting range Unit Default Standard —5.0 to MV lower limit - O.1 % -5.0 Heating/cooling -105.0 to 0.0 -105.0 Position-propor- -5.0 to MV upper limit - O.1 -5.0 tional (closed) EH Related Parameters See PID ON/OFF: Page 228 — ST (initial setting level): Page 228 *AUE PID * Automatic Selection Range Upper 2-PIP control must be used. | Limit (*: 1 to 8) These parameters set the upper limit for each PID set when PID sets are selected automatically. + These parameters are used to set the automatic selection range upper l limits for PID sets 1 to 8. Function + The sensor setting range for PID set 8 is 32,400 EU for temperature inputs and 105.0% for analog inputs. This parameter does not need to be set. + These values apply to the PV (process value), DV (deviation), or SP (set point) set in the PID Set Automatic Selection Data parameter. The default a setting is PV. | Setting range Unit Default Setting Temperature: -19,999 to EU 1320.0 32,400 Analog: -5.0 to 105.0 % 105.0 EH Related Parameters See PID set automatic selection data (advanced function setting level): Page 269

PID Setting Level Section 5-6 “ PID * Cooling Coefficient Heating and cooling control and 2- CSC €: 1to 8) PID control must be used. If the heating and cooling characteristics of the control object are very differ- ent and good control characteristics cannot be achieved with the same PID constants, the cooling coefficient can be used to adjust the proportional band (P) for the control output assigned to the cooling side. One parameter is set for each PID set. + In heating/cooling control, the proportional band P for the cooling control | output is calculated using the following formula to set the cooling coeffi- cient: Function Cooling control output side P = Cooling coefficient x P (proportional band) + The cooling coefficient will be set automatically if autotuning is executed when the Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjustment parameter is set to ON. The execution results will be saved in the PID set where autotuning was started. If non-linearity is strong in the cooling characteristics, how- ever, this function may not find the optimum cooling coefficient. C) Setting range Unit Default Setting 0.01 to 99.99 None 1.00 EH Related Parameters See PID (*) proportional band (PID setting level): Page 217 2-PID control must be used. *LbA Eu 09 Detection Time Alarm 1 must be assigned. The alarm 1 type must be 12 (LBA). These parameters set whether the LBA function is to be enabled or disabled and sets the time interval for detection, for each PID set. + These parameters set the time interval for detecting the LBA. / + Setting 0 disables the LBA function. Function + For ON/OFF control, make the setting in the LBA Detection Time parame- ter in the advanced function setting level. Setting range Unit Default Setting 0 to 9999 s 0 EH Related Parameters See Alarm 1 type (initial setting level): Page 231 — LBA level (advanced function setting level): Page 259 LBA band (advanced function setting level): Page 260

Monitor/Setting Item Level Section 5-7 5-7 Monitor/Setting Item Level Monitor/setting items can be displayed by means of the function key when the PF Setting parameter (advanced function setting level) is set to PFDP: Moni- tor/Setting Item (for the ESAN/EN-H only). Power ON Fe Operation | Adjustment VY Level ®| Level Press the Key for Monitor/Setting at least 1 s. Item Level PID Seting |e Bank Setting Level Level ( Control in progress The PF Setting parameter must be ï ï ï set to PFDP, and the Monitor/Setting Monitor/Setting Item Display 1 to 5 Item 1 to 5 parameters must not be set to OFF. + When the PF Key is set to display monitor/setting items, pressing the PF l Key will display in order the contents of the Monitor/Setting ltem 1 to 5 parameters. The contents of these parameters are shown in the following Function table. For the setting (monitor) ranges, refer to the applicable parameters. Set Setting Remarks value Monitor/Setting Symbol 0 Disabled — 1 PV/SP/Bank No. Can be set. (SP) —— 2 PV/SP/MV Can be set. (SP) 3 PV/SP /Soak time remain Can be set. (SP) — 4 Proportional band (P) Can be set. P 5 Integral time () Can be set. ns 6 Derivative time (D) Can be set. d 7 Alarm value 1 Can be set. fE-t 8 Alarm value upper limit 1 Can be set. LH 9 Alarm value lower limit 1 Can be set. LIL 10 Alarm value 2 Can be set. fE-e 11 Alarm value upper limit 2 Can be set. LeH 12 Alarm value lower limit 2 Can be set. Aet 13 Alarm value 3 Can be set. L-7 14 Alarm value upper limit 3 Can be set. AU3H 15 Alarm value lower limit 3 Can be set. ALL 16 Bank No. Can be set. DANK EH Related Parameters See PF setting (advanced function setting level): Page 273 Monitor/setting items 1 to 5 (advanced function setting level): Page 274

Manual Control Level Section 5-8 5-8 Manual Control Level The manipulated variable can be set in manual mode while the PV/MV param- eter is displayed. The final MV used in automatic mode will be used as the initial manual MV when moving from automatic mode to manual mode. In manual mode, the change value will be saved immediately and reflected in the actual MV. Power ON Operation Adjusiment Level Level Press the [O] Key for atleast 1 s. PID Setting Level 1_ Press the [©] Key for at Press the least 1 s; display will flash. at least 1 s or the O] Key for at least 1 s. Press the [O] Key for (See note.) atleast 3 s. Manual Control Level Press the for at least T s. (See note.) Note: When the PF Setting parameter is set to A-M for a Controller that has a PF Key (ESAN/EN-H) To move from the operation level to the manual control level, press the [0] Key for at least three seconds with the Auto/Manual Switch parameter displayed. In addition, this operation can be performed using the PF Key by setting the PF Key parameter (advanced function setting level) to A-M (Auto/Manual). For details on the setting method, refer to 4-13 Performing Manual Control. This setting cannot be made during ON/OFF operation. + The MANU indicator will light during manual control. - Itis not possible to move to any displays except for the PV/MV parameter during manual operation. - To return to the operation level, press the manual control level for at least one second. Key or the PF Key in the PV/MV (Manual MV) [— The manual control level display appears as shown below. With No. 8 Display Without No. 3 Display ET ri ET ri € Funotion SE CG. = CG. Et 9 f = =] D LL

Monitor range Unit Process value Temperature: According to indication range for each sensor. Analog: Scaling lower limit -5% FS to Scaling upper limit +5% FS (Refer to page 335.)

Set point SP lower limit to SP upper limit

Setting range Unit MV (manual MV) Standard control -5.0 to 105.0 % (See note.) Heating/cooling control -105.0 to 105.0 (See note.) Position-proportional control |-5.0 to 105.0 (See note.) Note When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is set to ON, the setting range will be the MV lower limit to the MV upper limit. EH Related Parameters Standard or heating/cooling (initial setting level): Page 228

Initial Setting Level

5-9 Initial Setting Level This level is used to set up the basic Digital Controller specifications. In this level, you can set the Input Type parameter to set the sensor input to be con- nected, limit the setting range of set points, set the alarm modes, and perform other operations. Operation Level Press the [D] Key for at least 1 s. Press the a) O]Key for at least 1 s: F à Es: 108]

Initial Setting Level Section 5-9 cN-H CNE

Initial Setting Level Section 5-9 SE -H SP Upper Limit SE -E SP Lower Limit Function

Setting See - These parameters set the upper and lower limits of the set points. À set point can be set within the range defined by the upper and lower limit set values in the SP Upper Limit and SP Lower Limit parameters. lf these parameters are reset, any set point that is outside of the new range will be forcibly changed to either the upper limit or the lower limit. + When the temperature input type and temperature unit have been changed, the set point upper limit and set point lower limit are forcibly changed to the upper and lower limits of the sensor. + During temperature input, the decimal point position depends on the cur- rently selected sensor, and during analog input it depends on the Decimal Point parameter setting. Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs Parameter Setting range Unit Default name Set Point Temperature | SP lower limit + 1 to Input set- | EU 1300.0 Upper Limit ting range upper limit Analog SP lower limit + 1 to scaling |EU upper limit Set Point Temperature | Input setting range lower limit | EU -200.0 Lower Limit to SP upper limit — 1 Analog Scaling lower limit to SP EU upper limit — 1 EH Related Parameters Input type: Page 224, Temperature unit: Page 226 (initial setting level)

Initial Setting Level Section 5-9

+ This parameter selects 2-PID control or ON/OFF control. l + The auto-tuning and self-tuning functions can be used in 2-PID control. Function Setting range Default Pid: 2-PID, oNaf: ON/OFF Pid Setting EH Related Parameters See AT execute/cancel: Page 192, Manual reset, Hysteresis (heating), and Hyster- — esis (cooling): Page 202 (adjustment level) ST stable range (advanced function setting level): Page 247 S-HC Standard or Heating/Cooling + This parameter selects standard control or heating/cooling control. Il + When heating/cooling control is selected for the ESCN-H (for a model Function which does not support control output 2), the auxiliary output 2 terminal (SUB2) is assigned as the control output (cooling). Setting range Default @ SENd: Standard, H-L: Heating/cooling SEX Setting EH Related Parameters See MV monitor (heating): Page 188, MV monitor (cooling): Page 189 (operation — level) Cooling coefficient, Dead band: Page 201, Hysteresis (heating), Hysteresis (cooling): Page 202 (adjustment level) Control period (heat), Control period (cool) (initial setting level): Page 230 Control output 1 assignment: Page 261, Control output 2 assignment, Auxil- iary output 1 assignment: Page 263, Auxiliary output 2 assignment: Page 264, Auxiliary output 3 assignment: Page 265 (advanced function setting level) : The control must be set to a temper- SE ST (self-tuning) ature input, standard control, and 2- PID control. + The ST (self-tuning) function executes tuning from the start of program l execution to calculate PID constants matched to the control target. When the ST function is in operation, be sure to turn ON the power supply of the Function load connected to the control output simultaneously with or before starting Controller operation.

Initial Setting Level Section 5-9 + Auto-tuning can be started during self-tuning. Parameter name Setting range Unit Default ST aFF: ST function OFF, a: ST None où function ON Setting EH Related Parameters Se) Input type: Page 224, PID ON/OFF: Page 228 (initial setting level), ST stable — range (advanced function setting level): Page 247 PERN Program Pattern

(mn Setting See This parameter sets the type of control when using the simple program func- tion. - If the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF, the simple program will not operate. -+ If the Program Pattern parameter is set to STOP, the RUN/STOP status will change to STOP after execution has been completed up to the bank number specified in the Valid Program Bank parameter. -+ Ifthe Program Pattern parameter is set to CONT, control will continue in RUN status after execution has been completed up to the bank number specified in the Valid Program Bank parameter. *+ Ifthe Program Pattern parameter is set to LOOP, the program will return to bank number 0 and repeat the program operation. Setting range Default GFF | Simple program function turned OFF GFF SEaP | Go to STOP mode at end of program. £aNE | Continue in RUN mode at end of program. LoaP | Return to bank number 0 and repeat the program operation. EH Related Parameters Program start, Soak time remain: Page 184, RUN/STOP: Page 185 (operation level) Bank * soak time, Bank * wait band (bank setting level): Page 215 Soak time unit (advanced function setting level): Page 266

Initial Setting Level Section 5-9 PENK The Program Pattern parameter must not be set to OFF. Valid Program Bank + This parameter sets the final bank number for executing program opera- | tion. Function Setting range Default C} Oto7 7 Setting EH Related Parameters See Program pattern (initial setting level): Page 229 The cooling control output and heat- h h ing control outputs must be assigned CP Control Period (Heating) to relay outputs, voltage outputs (for driving SSR), or SSR outputs. The control must be set to 2-PID control. £-CP Control Period (Cooling) For the Control Period (Cooling) parameter, the control must be set to heating/cooling control.

+ These parameters set the output periods. Set the control periods taking the control characteristics and the electrical durability of the relay into consideration. + For standard control, use the Control Period (Heating) parameter. The Control Period (Cooling) parameter cannot be used. + When the heating control output is a current output, the Control Period (Heating) parameter cannot be used. + For heating/cooling control, the control period can be set independently for heating and cooling. The Control Period (Heating) parameter is used for the heating control output, and the Control Period (Cooling) parameter is used for the cooling control output Parameter name Setting range Unit Default Control Period (Heating) |0.5 or 1 to 99 Second 20 Control Period (Cooling) |0.5 or 1 to 99 Second 20 EH Related Parameters PID ON/OFF (initial setting level): Page 228

Initial Setting Level Section 5-9 oREY Direct/Reverse Operation + “Direct operation” refers to control where the manipulated variable is l increased when the process value increases. Alternatively, “reverse oper- ation” refers to control where the manipulated variable is increased when Function the process value decreases. Setting range Default

0) aR-F: Reverse operation, a -d: Direct operation _[or-à

Setting ALE ! Alarm 1 Type Alarm 1 must be assigned. + Select one of the following six alarm 1 types: Deviation, deviation range, absolute value, LBA, PV change rate alarm, or RSP alarm.

5 (See note | Upper- and lower-limit (See note 4.) iLiHe

1) with standby sequence | SK H

(See Rôle 5) 6 Upper-limit with standby où xt où Xi sequence OFF— TE 7 Lower-limit with standby où ii où Xi sequence or Ci 8 Absolute-value upper- où où = limit OFF — ES 5

(4) Set value: 5 (Upper- and lower-limit with standby sequence) - For the lower-limit alarms in cases 1 and 2 above, the alarm is normal- ly OFF if upper- and lower-limit hysteresis overlaps. + In case 3, the alarm is always OFF. (5) Set value: 5 (The alarm is always OFF if upper- and lower-limit alarm hys- teresis with standby sequence overlaps.) (6) Displayed when remote SP input is supported. + Set the alarm type independently for each alarm in the Alarm 1 to 3 Type parameters in the initial setting level. The default is 2 (Upper-limit alarm). EH Related Parameters See Bank * alarm value upper limit 1, Bank * alarm value lower limit 1 (bank setting — level): Page 212 Standby sequence reset: Page 244, Auxiliary output 1 open in alarm: Page 245, Alarm 1 hysteresis: Page 233, Alarm 1 latch: Page 250 (advanced func- tion setting level)

Initial Setting Level Section 5-9 Alarm 1 must be assigned. Alarm 1 Hysteresis The alarm 1 type must not be 0, 12, or 13. Alarm 2 must be assigned. Alarm 2 Hysteresis The alarm 2 type must not be 0, 12, or 13. Alarm 3 must be assigned. Alarm 3 Hysteresis The alarm 3 type must not be 0, 12, or 13. - These parameters set the hysteresis for alarms 1, 2, and 3. Function r Models Unit Default Temperature input: 0.1 to °C or °F 0.2 Setting 3,240.0 Analog input: 0.01 to 99.9 %FS 0.02 EH Related Parameters See Bank * alarm value 1 to 3: Page 211, 212, 213, Bank * alarm value upper limit — 1 to 3, Bank * alarm value lower limit 1 to 8: (bank setting level): Page 212, 213,214 Alarm 1 to 3 type (initial setting level): Page 231, 233, 234 Standby sequence reset: Page 244, Alarm 1 to 3 open in alarm: Page 250, Alarm 1 to 3 latch: Page 250 (advanced function setting level) Rite Alarm 2 Type Alarm 2 must be assigned.

Setting See + Select one of the following five alarm 2 types: Deviation, deviation range, absolute value, PV change rate alarm, or RSP alarm. Refer to the alarm 1 type list. The 12: LBA (Loop Burnout Alarm) setting in that list cannot be used. EH Related Parameters Bank * alarm value 2: Page 212 Bank * alarm value upper limit 2, Bank * alarm value lower limit 2 (bank setting level): Page 213 Standby sequence reset: Page 244, Auxiliary output 2 open in alarm: Page 245, Alarm 2 hysteresis: Page 233 Alarm 2 latch (advanced function setting level): Page 250

Initial Setting Level Section 5-9 ALE3 Alarm 3 Type Alarm 3 must be assigned. + Select one of the following five alarm 3 types: Deviation, deviation range, absolute value, PV change rate alarm, or RSP alarm. Refer to the alarm 1 type list. The 12: LBA (Loop Burnout Alarm) setting in à that list cannot be used. Setting EH Related Parameters Se) Bank * alarm value 3: Page 213, Bank * alarm value upper limit 3, Bank * — alarm value lower limit 3: Page 214 (operation level) Standby sequence reset: Page 244, Auxiliary output * open in alarm: Page 245, Alarm 3 hysteresis: Page 233, Alarm 3 latch: Page 250 (advanced func- tion setting level)

Initial Setting Level Section 5-9 _ There must be a transfer output, cur- ER-E Transfer Output Type rent output, or linear voltage output. - This parameter sets the transfer output type. + The following table shows the differences between models with a transfer output and models without a transfer output that use control output 1 or control output 2 as a simple transfer output. # Transfer Output Destination Transfer | Control output 1 Control output 2 Transfer output output destination Yes — — Transfer output No Current output or |No Control output 1 linear voltage out- | Relay output, voltage put output (for driving SSR), or SSR output No Current output or | Current output or linear | Control output 1 linear voltage out- | voltage output put No Relay output, volt- | Current output or linear | Control output 2 age output (for voltage output driving SSR), or SSR output No Relay output, volt- | No No age output (for Relay output, voltage driving SSR), or … | output (for driving SSR), SSR output or SSR output & Precision and User Calibration Precision User calibration Transfer output +0.3% FS Supported. (See note.) Simple transfer output | Not specified. Not supported. Note For details on the calibration method, refer to SECTION 6 CALI- BRATION. @ Transfer output type Default OFF oFF oFF Setting Set point SP Set point during SP ramp SP-M PV Py MV monitor (heating) My MV monitor (cooling) C-"Y Valve opening PM EH Related Parameter See Transfer output upper limit, Transfer output lower limit (initial setting level): — Page 236

Initial Setting Level Section 5-9 ER-H Transfer Output Upper Limit A transfer output or linear voltage output must be supported. ER-L Transfer Output Lower Limit The Transfer Output Type parameter must not be set to OFF. [Tr - This parameter sets the upper and lower limit values of transfer outputs. Function Transfer output Setting range Default Unit F type Transfer Transfer L output lower | output upper limit limit Setting n - " —— Set point (See | SP lower limit to SP upper limit SP lower limit | SP upper limit |EU note 1.) Set point during | SP lower limit to SP upper limit SP ramp PV Temperature | Input setting range lower limit | Input setting Input setting to input setting range upper range lower range upper limit limit limit Analog Analog scaling lower limitto |Scaling lower | Scaling upper analog scaling upper limit limit limit MV monitor Standard —5.0 to 105.0 0.0 100.0 % (heating) (See | Heating/ 0.0 to 105.0 note 2.) cooling MV monitor 0.0 to 105.0 (cooling) (See note 3.) Valve opening | Position-pro- | -10.0 to 110.0 (See note 4.) portional Note (1) If the set point is selected, the remote SP will be output as long as the Remote SP Mode is selected in the SP Mode parameter. (2) This setting will be ignored for position-proportional model. (3) This setting will be ignored for standard control or position-proportional control. (4) This parameter will be displayed only when the is a potentiometer input for a position-proportional model. H Related Parameter See Transfer output type (initial setting level): Page 235 _ . The E5CN-H must be used, and the ol-E Linear Current Output control output must be a current out- put. This parameter selects the output type for linear current outputs. + When control output 1 or control output 2 is a current output, select either 4 to 20 mA or 0 to 20 mA as the output type.

Initial Setting Level Section 5-9 C\ Linear current Default output Setting 4-20: 4 to 20 mA 4-20 5-28: 0 to 20 mA Note Even when control output 1 or control output 2 is used as a control output or a simple transfer output, 0 to 20 mA can be used. EH Related Parameter See Transfer output type (initial setting level): Page 235 EY -b Bank Numbers Used Event inputs must be supported. Function Lie The Bank Numbers Used parameter is used when switching bank numbers according to ON/OFF combinations of event inputs that have been preset for bank numbers 0 to 7. The number of banks used can be changed to 2, 4, or 8, according to the set value. The Event Input Assignment Screen will not be displayed when event inputs are assigned for the Bank Numbers Used parameter. The following tables show the set values and the display/hide status of Event Input Assignments 1 and 2. ontrollers with Event Inputs 1 and 2 (Two Event Inputs) Event Input Assignment 1 | Event Input Assignment 2 Bank Num- 0 Displayed (Banks not switched.) bers Used 1 Hidden (2 banks) Displayed (Event input 2 not used to switch banks.) 2 Hidden (4 banks) Lie ontrollers with Event Inputs 3 and 4 (Two Event Inputs) Event Input Assignment 3 | Event Input Assignment 4 Bank Num- 0 Displayed (Banks not switched.) bers Used 1 Hidden (2 banks) Displayed (Event input 4 not used to switch banks.) 2 Hidden (4 banks) = Controllers with Event Inputs 1 to 4 (Four Event Inputs) Event Input | Event Input | Event Input | Event Input Assignment | Assignment | Assignment | Assignment Bank Numbers |0 Displayed (Banks not switched.) Used 1 Hidden (2 Displayed (Event inputs 2 to 4 not used to banks) switch banks.) 2 Hidden (4 banks) Displayed (Event inputs 3 to 4 not used to switch banks.) 3 Hidden (8 banks) Displayed (Event input 4 not used to switch banks.)

Initial Setting Level Section 5-9 For details on event input assignments, refer to Event Input Assignments 1 to 4 on page 238. The following table shows the relationship between event input ON/OFF com- binations and the banks that are selected. Bank Event No. Bank No. Numbers Used 1 Event input 1 (See OFFION | -- | | | — | note 1.) 2 Event input 1 (See OFF] ON |OFF| ON | -- | -— | -— | note 1.) Event input 2 (See OFF|OFF| ON | ON | -- | -— | -- note 2.) 3 Event input 1 (See OFF | ON |OFF| ON |OFF]| ON | OFF | ON note 1.) Event input 2 (See OFF |OFF| ON | ON |OFF|OFF| ON | ON note 2.) Event input 3 (See OFF |OFF |OFF|OFF | ON | ON | ON | ON note 3.) Note (1) For Controllers with event inputs 3 and 4, this becomes event input 3. (2) For Controllers with event inputs 3 and 4, this becomes event input 4. (3) Turn event inputs ON and OFF while power is being supplied. Changes in ON/OFF status are detected for inputs of 50 ms or longer. (For logic operations, however they are detected at 250 ms or longer.) Setting range Default 0 to 2 (for 2 event inputs) 1 0 to 3 (for 4 event inputs) EH Related Parameter See Event Input Assignment 1 to 4: Page 238 An event input must be assigned. Er -* Event Input Assignment * (*: 1 to 4) The event inputs must not be used to switch banks. + The following functions can be assigned to event inputs 1 to 4. | RUN/STOP Function Auto/Manual Switch Program Start Invert Direct/Reverse Operation SP Mode Switch 100% AT Execute/Cancel 40% AT Execute/Cancel Setting Change Enable/Disable Communications Write Enable/Disable Alarm Latch Cancel

Initial Setting Level

+ Default: Event Input Assignment 1: Nan Event Input Assignment 2: SEGP (For Conitrollers supporting event inputs 3 and 4, the default is none.) Event Input Assignment 3: NaNE Event Input Assignment 4: NaNE Setting Function CO NoNE None Stop RUN/STOP Setting FRAU Auto/Manual PRSE Program start (See note 1.) dRS Invert Direct/Reverse Opera- tion RGP SP Mode Switch (See note 2.) RE -e 100% AT Execute/Cancel #E-t 40% AT Execute/Cancel (See note 3.) NEPE Setting Change Enable/Dis- able (See note 4.) CMNE Communications Write Enable/Disable LAE Alarm Latch Cancel Note (1) PRST (Program Start) can be set even when the Program Pattern param- eter is set to OFF, but the function will be disabled. (2) This can be selected only for models that support the remote SP function. (3) This setting will be ignored for heating/cooling control or for position-pro- portional (floating) control. (4) This can be selected only for models that support communications. Also, when a work bit is selected as event input data, communications writing enable/disable cannot be selected. EH Related Parameter See Bank Numbers Used (initial setting level): Page 237 Position-proportional control must be CLFE Closed/Floating supported and there must be a potentiometer input.

Initial Setting Level Section 5-9 Position-proportional control must be Motor Calibration supported and there must be a potentiometer input. - This parameter is used to calibrate a motor. It must be executed when monitoring valve opening. (The display cannot be changed during motor calibration.) Function + The travel time is reset when motor calibration is executed. + The setting becomes off after switching to this parameter. + Motor calibration is executed when ai! is selected. + The setting returns to aFF after the motor calibration has been completed. EH Related Parameter See Travel Time (initial setting level): Page 240 Mot Travel Time Position-proportional control must be supported. + This parameter sets the time from when the valve is completely open until itis completely closed. + The travel time is set automatically when motor calibration is executed. Function @ Setting range Unit Default 1 to 999 s 30 Setting EH Related Parameter See Motor Calibration (initial setting level): Page 240 SGR Extraction of Square Root Enable An analog input must be supported.

Initial Setting Level Section 5-9 71 : ï The Initial Setting/Communications RMoÿ Move to Advanced Function Setting Level 5; parameter must be set 10 0. + Set the Move to Advanced Function Setting Level parameter set value to | “169” + Move to the advanced function setting level either by pressing € Key or Function [O] Key or by waiting or two seconds to elapse. H Related Parameter See Initial setting/communication protect (adjustment level): Page 172

The advanced function setting level is used for optimizing Controller perfor- mance. To move to this level, input the password (“-169”) from the initial set- ting level. To be able to enter the password, the Initial Setting/Communications Protect parameter in the protect level must be set to 0. (The default is O.) - The parameters in this level can + To switch between setting levels, + To change set values, press the be used when the Initial Setting/Commu- nications Protect parameter is set to 0. , press the [O] Key. and F1 Keys. Operation Adjustment Level Level Press the O1 Key less than 1 s. Level PID Setting —| Bank Setting Level Pressthe __| : 5 DIkey [HE F s Press the [O] Key BE 7 | Press the [O] Key for at for at least 1 forat 29.1 least 3 s. least3s. [56 (000 | Control stops. IE Communi- nitial Setting >| 05 Level Settin Press the Lee O1 Key for less than 1 s. Press the [0] Key Password input for at least 1 s set value -169 Advanced Function (2) Control in progress Setting Level C2 Control stopped

Function Setting + This parameter returns all parameter settings to their defaults. - After the initialization, the set value automatically turns aFF. Setting range Default aFF: Initialization is not executed. EE FACE: Initializes to the factory settings described in the manual. SPRU : ñ The ST parameter must be set to SP Ramp Time Unit OFF. + This parameter sets the time unit for the rate of change during SP ramp | operation. Function Setting range Default C} 5: EU/s, #: EU/min, H#: EU/h # Setting EH Related Parameters See Ramp SP monitor (operation level): Page 180 Bank * SP ramp set value (bank setting level): Page 211 RESE Standby Sequence Reset Alarm 1 to 8 type must be 5, 6, 7, 10, or 11.

+ This parameter selects the conditions for enabling reset after the standby sequence of the alarm has been canceled. + Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level, communi- cations setting level, advanced function setting level, or calibration level. + Condition A Control started (including power ON), and set point, alarm value (alarm value upper/lower limit), or input shift value (upper/lower-limit temperature input shift value) changed. + Condition B Power ON - The following example shows the reset action when the alarm type is lower-limit alarm with standby sequence.

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-10 Condition A only SP change Y Alarm - j (after change) Alarm hysteresis : Standby sequence canceled Alarm L - = 2 : Standby sequence reset

Alarm output: Alarm c m1 TT condition À Alarm output: FT LT Condition B @ Setting range Default A: Condition A, &: Condition B A Setting EH Related Parameters See Alarm 1 to 3 type (initial setting level): Page 231 to 233 Alarm 1 to 3 latch (advanced function setting level): Page 250 x Auxiliary Output * Open in Alarm Auxiliary output 1, 2, or 3 must be SE*N (: 1 to 3) assigned.

Function Setting See + This parameter sets the output status of auxiliary outputs 1 to 3. + When Close in Alarm is set, the status of the auxiliary output function is output unchanged. When Open in Alarm is set, the status of the auxiliary output function is reversed before being output. The following table shows the relationship between the auxiliary output function, auxiliary output, and operation displays (SUB1 to SUB3). Auxiliary output | Auxiliary output | Operation display function (SUB1 to SUB3) Close in Alarm |ON ON Lit OFF OFF Not lit Open in Alarm |ON OFF Lit OFF ON Not lit Setting range Default -a: Close in alarm, #-£: Open in alarm N-a EH Related Parameters Auxiliary output 1 to 8 assignment (advanced function setting level): Page 263 to 265

Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned.

+ When this parameter is set to ON, the heater burnout alarm is held until either of the following conditions is satisfied.

Heater burnout detection is set to 0.0 A. The power is cycled. The latch is cancelled by the PF Key. (PF Setting = LAT: Alarm Laich Cancel) The latch is cancelled by an event input. (Event Input Assignment 1 to 4 = LAT: Alarm Latch Cancel) + Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level, communi- cations setting level, advanced function setting level, or calibration level. Setting range Default aN: Enabled, af F: Disabled oFF EH Related Parameters Event input assignment 1 to 4 (initial setting level): Page 238 HB ON/OFF: Page 246, PF setting: Page 273 (advanced function setting level)

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-10 HBH The Heater Burnout parameter must be set to ON. The Heater Burnout Latch parameter must be set to OFF. Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned. Heater Burnout Hysteresis

0.00 to 1.00 None 0.65

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-10 EH Related Parameters See PID ON/OFF: Page 228, ST: Page 228 (initial setting level) RE -G AT Calculated Gain Control must be set to 2-PID control. RE-H AT Hysteresis LENR Limit Cycle MV Amplitude

Limit Cycle MV 5.0 to 50.0 % 20.0 Amplitude (See note

Note (1) When the temperature unit is °F, the default is 1.4. (2) With standard models, this is displayed during standard control. With po- sition-proportional models, this is displayed during close control (when there is a potentiometer input). EH Related Parameters AT execute/cancel (adjustment level): Page 192

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-10 NF Input Digital Filter + This parameter sets the time constant for the input digital filter. The follow- l ing diagram shows the effect on data after passing through the digital fil- ter: Function PV before passing through filter Al----. PV after passing through filter

Cratant À Time Input digital filter @ Setting range Unit Default

0.0 to 999.9 Second 0.0

Setting YAd Additional PV Display This parameter adds a display at the beginning of the operation level for the | process value (PV). If there is no need to display the set point, use this to dis- play only the present temperature. Function Set to ON to display, and OFF to not display. Setting range Default C\ aN: Displayed, aFF: Not displayed GFF Setting

This parameter is used to display the manipulated variable (MV). The manipulated variable is displayed when the MV Monitor (Heating) and MV Monitor (Cooling) parameters are set to ON, and not displayed when these parameters are set to OFF. Function Setting range Default C) a%: Displayed, af F: Not displayed GFF Setting EH Related Parameters See MV monitor (heating): Page 188, MV monitor (cooling): Page 189 (operation — level) REE Automatic Display Return Time

+ In the operation level, adjustment level, bank setting level, PID setting level, or monitor/setting item level, the display automatically returns to the PV/SP if there are no key operations for the time set for this parameter. Functi se : se A : eneton + The automatic display return time is disabled when the parameter is set to OFF. (In that case, the display will not be automatically switched.) Setting range Unit Default (( OFF, 1 to 99 Second oFF Setting ml Alarm 1 must be assigned, and the RIL Alarm 1 Latch alarm 1 type must not be 0. fl Alarm 2 must be assigned, and the ROLE Alarm 2 Latch alarm 2 type must not be O or 12. AILE Alarm 3 Latch Alarm 3 must be assigned, and the alarm 3 type must not be 0 or 12. Function

+ When this parameter is set to ON, the alarm function is held until one of the following conditions is satisfied. a The poweris cycled. b The latch is cancelled by the PF Key. (PF Setting = LAT: Alarm Laich Cancel) c The latch is cancelled by an event input. (Event Input Assignment 1 to 4 = LAT: Alarm Latch Cancel)

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-10 + The output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level, com- munications setting level, advanced function setting level, or calibration level. - If an auxiliary output is set to close in alarm, the output is kept closed. If it is set to open in alarm, it is kept open. Setting range Default aN: Enabled, af F: Disabled oFF

Setting EH Related Parameters See Bank * alarm value 1 to 3 (bank setting level): Page 211, 212, 213 — Bank * alarm value upper limit 1 to 3 (bank setting level): Page 212, 213, 214 Bank * alarm value lower limit 1 to 3 (bank setting level): Page 212, 213, 214 Alarm 1 to 3 type (initial setting level): Page 231 to 234 Standby sequence reset: Page 244, Auxiliary output * open in alarm: Page 245, HB ON/OFF: Page 246, Alarm 1 to 3 hysteresis: Page 233 (advanced function setting level) Event input assignment 1 to 4 (initial setting level): Page 238 HB ON/OFF: Page 246, PF setting: Page 273 (advanced function setting level) PRLE Move to Protect Level Time + This parameter sets the key pressing time required to move to the protect | level from the operation level, the adjustment level, bank setting level, PID setting level, or monitor/setting item level. Function Setting range Unit Default 1 to 30 Second 3 Setting EH Related Parameters See Operation/adjustment protect, Initial setting/communications protect, Setting — change protect (protect level): Page 172 = Alarm 1 must be assigned, but not to SERa Input Error Output 2 work bit output. ON for input errors. Note For details on input errors, refer to Error Displays on page 304. - The alarm 1 output is an OR output between alarm 1, HB alarm/HS alarm, heater overcurrent alarm, and input error. + Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level, communi- Setting cations setting level, advanced function setting level, or calibration level. " + When this parameter is set to ON, the output assigned for alarm 1 turns Function

Setting range Default aN: Enabled, af F: Disabled GFF Cut Cold Junction Compensation Method Input type must be thermocouple. - This parameter specifies whether cold junction compensation is to be per- l formed internally by the Controller or to be performed externally when the input type setting is 5 to 28. Function + The cold junction compensation external setting is enabled when the tem- peraiure difference is measured using two thermocouples. Setting range Default C) ke Internally, af F: Externally ET Setting EH Related Parameters See Input type (initial setting level): Page 224 . . . Communications must be supported. RLRY MB Command Logic Switching CompoWay/F must be selected as the protocol.

+ This parameter switches the logic of the MB command (communications writing switch) for the SYSWAY communications protocol + The MB command (communications writing switch) is the equivalent of the MB command (remote/local switch) of the E5L 1. + The setting indicated by the shaded cell indicates the default (same logic as E5LU). Set Text data of MB command value 0000 0001 OFF Communications writing enabled | Communications writing disabled (remote mode selection) (local mode selection)

Communications writing disabled (local mode selection) Communications writing enabled (remote mode selection) (Terms in parentheses () are the terms used on the ESL NW.) EH Related Parameters Communications writing (adjustment level): Page 193 Protocol setting (communications setting level): Page 281

Function Use the PV color change function to change the color of the PV display (No. 1 display). There are three display colors, orange, red, and green, and you can select from the following three modes and eight types. + Constant: This mode displays orange, red, or green all the time. + Linked to Alarm 1: This mode switches the PV display color from red to green when alarm 1 turns ON or from green to red when alarm 1 turns ON. + Linked to PV stable band: This mode switches the PV display color between red outside the PV stable band and green within PV stable band, or between green outside the PV stable band and red within PV stable band. Set the PV stable band in the PV Stable Band parameter in the advanced function setting level. + The default is FEd (red). The following table shows the display functions that can be set using the PV color change function. Setting Mode Setting | Function PV change color Application example Constant |af£ Orange Constant: Orange To match the display color with other Controller models REd Red Constant: Red To match the display color with other Controller models CRN Green Constant: Green To match the display color with other Controller models Linked to Alarm alarm 1 value

ALM1 ON ALM1 Application example OFF R-G Red to Red Green To display the PV reached Green signal G-R Green to Green Red To display error signals Red

Mode Setting | Function PV change color Application example Linked to Within Within PV stable PV stable PV stable band band band Li: Low i Wiähin High

Low PV stable band |High Application example R-LR Red to Red Green Red To display stable status Green to Red G-aR Green to Green |Orange Red To display stable status Orange to Red auf Orange to |Orange | Green Red To display stable status Green to Red EH Related Parameters See PV stable band (advanced function setting level): Page 254 PY-b PV Stable Band This parameter sets the PV stable band width within which the PV display color is changed. + When the mode to link to the PV stable band is selected with the PV Function Change Color parameter, the PV display color will change according to whether the present value (PV) is lower than, within, or higher than the PV stable band, as shown in the following figure. - There is a hysteresis of 0.2 (°C or °F). PV stable , PV stable ; band band : Low (| Within | High : ! > PV F À f

0.2 (°C or °F) SP 0.2 (°C or °F)

When analog inputs are used: 0.02 (%FS) @ Models Setting range Unit Default Controllers with Thermocouple/Resis- |0.1 to 999.9 °Cor°F 5.0 Setting tance Thermometer Universal Inputs (See note.) Controllers with Analog Inputs 0.01 to 99.99 %FS 5.00 Note Set “None” as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inpuits. EH Related Parameters See PV change color (advanced function setting level): Page 253

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-10 Alarm 1 must be assigned, and the A lon Alarm 1 ON Delay alarm 1 type must not be 0, 12, or : Alarm 2 must be assigned, and the ReoN Alarm 2 ON Delay alarm 2 type must not be 0, 12, or L Alarm 3 must be assigned, and the R3oN Alarm 3 ON Delay alarm 3 type must not be 0, 12, or Alarm 1, 2, or 3 outpuis are prevented from turning ON until after the delay l times set in these parameters have elapsed. + Set the time for which the ON delay is to be enabled. Function + To disable the ON delay, set O. Setting Setting range Unit Default 0 to 999 Second 0 EH Related Parameters See Alarm 1 to 3 type (initial setting level): Pages 231 to 234 . Alarm 1 must be assigned, and the A loF Alarm 1 OFF Delay alarm 1 type must not be 0, 12, or L Alarm 2 must be assigned, and the ReoF Alarm 2 OFF Delay alarm 2 type must not be 0, 12, or L Alarm 3 must be assigned, and the R3oF Alarm 3 OFF Delay alarm 3 type must not be 0, 12, or

Alarm 1, 2, or 3 outputs are prevented from turning OFF until after the delay times set in these parameters have elapsed. + Set the time for which the OFF delay is to be enabled. l + To disable the OFF delay, set O. Function Setting range Unit Default C\ 0 to 999 Second 0 Setting EH Related Parameters See Alarm 1 to 3 type (initial setting level): Pages 231 to 234

This parameter executes robust tuning (RT). + When AT or ST is executed with RT selected, PID constants are automat- ically set which make it hard for control performance to degenerate even when control object characteristics are changed. Function + Even when hunting occurs for PID constants when AT or ST is executed in normal mode, it is less likely to occur when AT or ST is executed in RT mode. Setting range Default C} aN: RT function OFF, oFF: RT function ON oFF Setting EH Related Parameters See AT execute/cancel (PID setting level): Page 192 + PID * proportional band (PID setting level): Page 217 PID * integral time (PID setting level): Page 217 PID * derivative time (PID setting level): Page 217 PID ON/OFF (initial setting level): Page 228 ST (initial setting level): Page 228 Heater burnout, HS alarms, and HSU HS Alarm Use heater overcurrent detection must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned.

HSE HS Alarm Latch Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON.

Function Setting See + When this parameter is set to ON, the HS alarm is held until any of the fol- lowing conditions is satisfied. a The HS alarm current is set to 50.0 A. b The power is cycled. c The latch is cancelled by the PF Key. (PF Setting = LAT: Alarm Laich Cancel) d The latch is cancelled by an event input. (Event Input Assignment 1 to 4 = LAT: Alarm Latch Cancel) + Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level, communi- cations setting level, advanced function setting level, or calibration level. Setting range Default aN: Enabled, aFF: Disabled OFF EH Related Parameters HS alarm use (advanced function setting level): Page 257 Event input assignment 1 to 4 (initial setting level): Page 238 HB ON/OFF: Page 246, PF setting: Page 273 (advanced function setting level) HSH HS Alarm Hysteresis Heater burnout and HS alarms must be supported. Alarm 1 must be assigned. The HS Alarm parameter must be set to ON. The HS Alarm Latch parameter must be set to OFF.

LbA LBA Detection Time Alarm 1 must be assigned. The alarm type must be set to 12 (LBA). ON/OFF control must be used.

Function This parameter enables or disables the LBA function and sets the detection time interval. + Set the time interval for detecting loop burnouts. - To disable the LBA function, set O. Setting range Unit Default 0 to 9999 Second 0 Setting EH Related Parameters See Alarm 1 type (initial setting level): Page 231 PID* LBA detection time (PID setting level): Page 219 LBA level: Page 259, LBA band: Page 260 (advanced function setting level) Alarm 1 must be assigned. LbAL LBA Level The alarm type must be set to 12 (LBA). The LBA detection time must not be 0. (See note.)

Function Setting See Note - This parameter sets the LBA level. - If the deviation between the SP and PV exceeds the LBA level, a loop burnout is detected. Note For ON/OFF control, the LBA Detection Time parameter (advanced function setting level) must not be set to 0. For 2-PID control, the LBA Detection Time parameter must not be set to 0 for any of PID sets 1 to 8. Models Setting range Unit Default Temperature input 0.1 to 3240.0 °Cor°F 8.0 Analog Input 0.01 to 99.99 %FS 10.00 Set “None” as the unit for Controllers with Analog Inputs. EH Related Parameters Process value/Set point (operation level): Page 177 Alarm 1 type (initial setting level): Page 231 PID * LBA detection time (PID setting level): Page 219 LBA detection time, LBA band: Page 219 (advanced function setting level)

Lbfb LBA Band Alarm 1 must be assigned. The alarm type must be set to 12 (LBA). The LBA detection time must not be

+ This parameter sets the LBA band. - If a control deviation greater than the LBA band is not reduced when the LBA level is exceeded, an loop burnout is detected. Note For ON/OFF control, the LBA Detection Time parameter (advanced function setting level) must not be set to 0. For 2-PID control, the LBA Detection Time parameter must not be set to 0 for any of PID sets 1 to 8. Models Setting range Unit Default Temperature input 0.0 to 3240.0 °Cor°F 3.0 Analog input 0.00 to 99.99 %FS 0.20 EH Related Parameters Process value/Set point (operation level): Page 177 Alarm 1 type (initial setting level): Page 231 LBA detection time, LBA level (advanced function setting level): Page 259

Control Output 1 Assignment There must a transfer output, or if there is no transfer output, control output 1 must not be a linear output or if it is a linear output, the transfer output type must be set to OFF.

Work bit 1 (See notes 2 and 4.)

Work bit 2 (See notes 2 and 4. ES]

Work bit 3 (See notes 2 and 4.

Work bit 4 (See notes 2 and 4.

Work bit 6 (See notes 2 and 4.

Work bit 7 (See notes 2 and 4. SBBBREREREE

Work bit 5 (See notes 2 and 4.)

Work bit 8 (See notes 2 and 4. (1) If£-0 is assigned for standard control, a value equivalent to 0% is output. (2) Can be selected for a relay output, voltage output (for driving SSR), or SSR output only. (3) Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF, but the function will be disabled. (4) WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used. EH Related Parameters Standard or heating/cooling: Page 228, Program pattern: Page 229, Transfer output type: Page 235 (initial setting level)

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-10 There must a transfer output, or if there is no transfer output, control output 1 must be a linear output or oute Control Output 2 Assignment ou, À cn Dub 4 pea near ear output and control output 2 is a linear output, the transfer output type must be set to OFF. Pa - This parameter sets the function to be assigned to control output 2. Function Setting range Default CC) NaNE: No function is assigned to control output 2. Nan! ë: Heating control output is output. (See note Settng £-a: Cooling control output is output. (See note 1.) 5) AL" !: Alarm 1 is output. (See note 2.) ALME: Alarm 2 is output. (See note 2.) ALM3: Alarm 8 is output. (See note 2.) PÆNd: Program end is output. (See notes 2 and 3.) RALM: Control output ON/OFF count alarm (See note 2.) WAR 1: Work bit 1 (See notes 2 and 4.) WA: Work bit 2 (See notes 2 and 4.) WA: Work bit 3 (See notes 2 and 4.) WR4: Work bit 4 (See notes 2 and 4.) WARS: Work bit 5 (See notes 2 and 4.) WRG: Work bit 6 (See notes 2 and 4.) HR: Work bit 7 (See notes 2 and 4.) WRE: Work bit 8 (See notes 2 and 4.) Note (1) If £-0 is assigned for standard control, a value equivalent to 0% will be output. (2) Can be selected for a relay output, voltage output (for driving SSR), or SSR output only. (3) The setting will be ignored when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF. (4) WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used. (5) If the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter is set to heating/cooling control, control automatically switches to £ -a. EH Related Parameters See Standard or heating/cooling: Page 228, Program pattern: Page 229, (initial — setting level)

SUB | Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Auxiliary output 1 must be assigned.

Wi Work bit 1 (See note 4.) WA: Work bit 2 (See note 4.) WAR: Work bit 3 (See note 4.) WR4: Work bit 4 (See note 4.) WARS: Work bit 5 (See note 4.) WRG: Work bit 6 (See note 4.) WA: Work bit 7 (See note 4.) WRE:_ Work bit 8 (See note 4.) Setting range Default NSNE: No function is assigned to auxiliary output 1. ALT ë: Heating control output is output. Si note

(1) If £-0 is assigned for standard control, a value equivalent to 0% will be output. (2) Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF, but the function will be disabled. (3) If a setting is changed when the Program Pattern parameter is not set to OFF, control automatically switches to P.ENd. (4) WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used. EH Related Parameters Program pattern (initial setting level): Page 229

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-10 SUbe Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment Auxiliary output 2 must be assigned. [— + This parameter sets the function to be assigned to auxiliary output 2. Function Setting range Default NGNE: No function is assigned to auxiliary output 2. ALNE ë: Heating control output is output. Si note £-8: Cooling control output is output. (See note 1.) ° AL !: Alarm 1 is output. ALME: Alarm 2 is output. ALM3: Alarm 8 is output. PÆNd: Program end is output. (See note 2.) RALM: Control output ON/OFF count alarm WAR 1: Work bit 1 (See note 4.) WA: Work bit 2 (See note 4.) WAR: Work bit 3 (See note 4.) WR4: Work bit 4 (See note 4.) WARS: Work bit 5 (See note 4.) WRG: Work bit 6 (See note 4.) WA: Work bit 7 (See note 4.) WRE:_ Work bit 8 (See note 4.) Note (1) If £-0 is assigned for standard control, a value equivalent to 0% will be output. (2) Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF, but the function will be disabled. (3) If the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter is set to heating/cooling control when there is no control output 2 (E5CN-H), control automatically switches to [-a. (4) WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used. EH Related Parameters See Standard or heating/cooling: Page 228, Program pattern: Page 229, (initial — setting level)

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-10 ili h Auxiliary output 3 must be assigned SUb3 Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment (ESAN-H and ESEN-H oniy). Pa + This parameter sets the function to be assigned to Auxiliary output 3. Function Setting range Default a NGNE: No function is assigned to auxiliary output 3. ALA3 ü Heating control output is output. Setting E-8: Cooling control output is output. (See note 1.) AL !: Alarm 1 is output. ALME: Alarm 2 is output. ALM3: Alarm 8 is output. PÆNd: Program end is output. (See note 2.) RALM: Control output ON/Off count alarm WAR 1: Work bit 1 (See note 8.) WA: Work bit 2 (See note 8.) WAR: Work bit 3 (See note 8.) WR4: Work bit 4 (See note 8.) WARS: Work bit 5 (See note 8.) WRG: Work bit 6 (See note 8.) WAR: Work bit 7 (See note 8.) WRB:_ Work bit 8 (See note 8.) Note (1) If £-0 is assigned for standard control, a value equivalent to 0% will be output. (2) Can be selected when the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF, but the function will be disabled. (3) WR1 to WR8 are not displayed when the logic operation function is not used. EH Related Parameters See Standard or heating/cooling: Page 228, Program pattern: Page 229, (initial — setting level) CSEL Character Select + This parameter switches the characters to be displayed. | The following two types of characters can be displayed. 11-segment display Function 7-segment display Setting range Default ah: 11-Segment display, af F: 7-segment display ET Setting When set to a\, an 11-segment display is used.

Function Setting range Default a M: Minutes, H: Hours # Setting EH Related Parameters See Program start, Soak time remain (operation level): Page 184 Bank * soak time, Bank * wait band (bank setting level): Page 215 Program pattern (initial setting level): Page 229 Alarm 1, 2, and 3 functions must be assigned. The SP Ramp Set Value parameter ñ must not be set to OFF. ALSP Alarm SP Selection The ST parameter must be set to OFF. The alarm type must be set to 1, 2,3, 4,5,6, or 7. This parameter sets whether the set point that triggers a deviation alarm dur- ing SP ramp operation is to be the ramp SP or target SP. + Set whether the set point that triggers a deviation alarm is the ramp SP or | target SP. Function Setting range Default SP-M: Ramp SP, 5P: SP SP Setting EH Related Parameters See Bank * SP ramp set value (bank setting level): Page 211 — ST (initial setting level): Page 228 nl The ST parameter must be set to RSPU Remote SP Enable OFF. + When this parameter is set to ON, you can switch between a remote SP l and local SP (by specifying one or the other in the SP Mode parameter). The Set Point During SP Ramp parameter is always enabled. Function

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-10 + When this parameter is set to OFF, only the local SP can be used. In addi- tion, the Set Point During SP Ramp parameter is enabled only when the SP ramp function is set to ON. Setting range Default ON: Enabled, OFF: Disabled oFF Setting EH Related Parameters See Set point during SP ramp (operation level): Page 180 SP mode (adjusiment level): Page 193 PGPH Remote SP Upper Limit The ST parameter must be set to ne OFF. The Remote SP Enable param- RSPL Remote SP Lower Limit eter must be set to ON. + This parameter sets the upper and lower limits for a remote SP. An upper l limit of 20 mA and a lower limit of 4 mA are supported. Set the upper limit in the Remote SP Upper Limit parameter, and set the lower limit in the Function Remote SP Lower limit parameter. RSP Upper limit Louer init TT Input (mA)

+ When ïhe SP Upper Limit or SP Lower Limit parameter setting is changed, the remote SP upper or lower limit is forcibly changed to that setting. Setting Setting range Unit Default Setting Remote SP SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU 1300.0 Upper Limit Remote SP SP lower limit to SP upper limit EU -200.0 Lower Limit EH Related Parameters See Decimal point (initial setting level): Page 226 — SP upper limit, SP lower limit (initial setting level): Page 227 Remote SP enable (advanced function setting level): Page 266

+ This parameter specifies the operation for when the mode is changed from Remote SP Mode to Local SP Mode. + When this parameter is set to ON, Local SP Mode inherits the remote SP. Function + When this parameter is set to OFF, the local SP is not affected by the remote SP. Setting range Default à ON: Enabled, OFF: Disabled oFF Setting EH Related Parameters See Set point during SP ramp (operation level): Page 180 SP mode (adjusiment level): Page 193 The ST parameter must be set to OFF. RGES Remote SP Input The Remote SP Enable parameter Error Output must be set to ON. Alarm 1 must be assigned, but not to a work bit output.

+ When this parameter is set to ON, the output to which alarm 1 is assigned turns ON when a remote SP input error occurs. Note For details on input errors, refer to 4-23 Using a Remote SP Func- tion. - The output is an OR output between alarm 1, the heater burnout/HS/ heater overcurrent alarm, the input error, and the RSP input error status. + The output turns OFF when switching to the initial setting level, advanced function setting level, communications setting level, or calibration level. Setting range Default ON: Enabled, OFF: Disabled GFF EH Related Parameters Remote SP upper limit, Remote SP lower limit (advanced function setting level): Page 267 SP mode (adjusiment level): Page 193

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-10 Pidi Pcdh PID Set Automatic Selection Data qre control must be set to 2-PID PID Set Automatic Selection Hysteresis one

Function Setting See + For position-proportional models, control is executed with the process value equal to the set point when the process value is within the PV dead band. - This function prevents unnecessary outputs when the process value approaches the set point. Setting range Unit Default 0 to 32400 EU 0.0 EH Related Parameters Closed/floating (initial setting level): Page 239 Moîtor calibration (initial setting level): Page 240 Travel time (initial setting level): Page 240 Position proportional dead band (adjustment level): Page 207 Open/close hysteresis (adjustment level): Page 207

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-10 The control must be set to 2-PID control. Close control (position-proportional models) must be used. MANL Manual MV Limit Enable This parameter sets whether the MV Upper Limit and MV Lower Limit param- l eters are to be enabled for manual MV in manual mode. Function Setting range Default aN: Enabled, aFF: Disabled OFF Setting EH Related Parameters See PID * MV upper limit, PID * MV lower limit (PID setting level): Page 217 Direct Setting of Position Close control (position-proportional PM d . models) must be used. Proportional MV + When this parameter is set to ON, valve opening can be specified in the MV at Stop, MV at PV Error, and Manual MV Limit Enable parameters. Function Setting range Default a aN: Enabled, aFF: Disabled OFF Setting EH Related Parameters See MV at stop (adjustment level): Page 204 + MV at PV error (adjustment level): Page 204 Manual MV (manual control level): Page 221

PYRP PV Rate of Change Calculation Period Alarms 1, 2, and 3 must be assigned. The alarm type must be set to 13.

Function + The change width can be found for PV input values in any set period. Dif- ferences with previous values in each set period are calculated, and an alarm is output if the results exceed the alarm value. + The PV rate of change calculation period can be set in units of 60 ms (sampling period). Setting range Unit Default 1 to 999 Sampling period 7(=17 x 60 ms = 1020 ms) Setting EH Related Parameters See Process value, Process value/set point (operation level): Page 177 Alarm 1 to 3 type, (Initial setting level): Pages 231, 233, 234. rer Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjust- The control must be set to heating/ CSCR cooling control and 2-PID control. ment Function

[L_] Setting See + By setting the Automatic Cooling Coefficient Adjustment parameter to ON, autotuning can be executed during heating/cooling control to auto- matically calculate the cooling coefficient at the same time as the PID parameters. |f there is strong non-linear gain for the cooling characteris- tics, such as when cooling water boils for cooling control, it may not be possible to obtain the optimum cooling coefficient with this function, and control may take the form of oscillating waves. If that occurs, increase the proportional band or the cooling coefficient to improve control. Setting range Default aN: Enabled, aFF: Disabled OFF EH Related Parameters PID * cooling coefficient (PID setting level): Page 219

Function Setting range Default aN: Enabled, aFF: Disabled [ON Setting Heater burnout, HS alarms, and _ heat t detecti t bé ac Heater Overcurrent Latch Supported (wo CT) Alarm 1 must be assigned. + When this parameter is set to ON, the HS alarm is held until any of the fol- l lowing conditions is satisfied. a Heater overcurrent detection is set to 50.0 A. b The power is cycled. c The latch is cancelled by the PF Key. (PF Setting = LAT: Alarm Laich Cancel) d The latch is cancelled by an event input. (Event Input Assignment 1 to 4 = LAT: Alarm Latch Cancel) + Output is turned OFF when switching to the initial setting level, communi- cations setting level, advanced function setting level, or calibration level. Function Setting range Default aN: Enabled, afF: Disabled [OFF Setting EH Related Parameters See Heater overcurrent detection 1, Heater overcurrent detection 2 (adjustment — level): Pages 195, 196 Heater overcurrent use (advanced function setting level): Page 272 Heater overcurrent hysteresis (advanced function setting level): Page 273 Event input assignment 1 to 4 (initial setting level): Page 238 HB ON/OFF: Page 246, PF setting: Page 273 (advanced function setting level)

acH Heater Overcurrent Hysteresis Heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent detection must be supported, and alarm 1 must be assigned. The Heater Overcurrent Use parameter must be set to ON, and the Heater Overcurrent Latch parameter must be set to OFF.

- This parameter sets the hysteresis for heater overcurrent detection. Function = Setting range Unit Default @ 0.1 to 50.0 A 01 Setting EH Related Parameters See Heater overcurrent use (advanced function setting level): Page 272 PF PF Setting The PF Key must be supported (ESAN/EN-H).

Setting + This parameter sets the function of the PF Key. The default setting is A-M (Auto/Manual). Set value Setting Function OFF: aff Disabled Does not operate as a function key. RUN: FUN RUN Specifies RUN status. STOP: 5taP |STOP Specifies STOP status. R-S: F-5 Reversing RUN/STOP Specifies reversing RUN/STOP opera- operation tion status. AT-2: AE -2 100%AT Specifies reversing 100% AT Execute/ Execute/Cancel Cancel status. (See note 1.) AT-1:8E- 1 40%AT Specifies reversing 40% AT Execute/ Execute/Cancel Cancel status. (See notes 1 and 2.) LAT: LAE Alarm Latch Cancel Specifies canceling alarm latches. (See note 3.) A-M: AH Auto/Manual Specifies reversing Auto/Manual status (See note 4.) PFDP: PFdP | Monitor/Setting Item Specifies the monitor/setting item dis- play. Select the monitor/setting item using the Monitor/Setting Item 1 to 5 parameters (advanced function setting level). BANK: BAN: | Bank No. Specifies switching to the bank number +1. Note (1) When AT cancel is specified, it means that AT is cancelled regardiess of whether the AT currenily being executed is 100% AT or 40% AT.

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-10 (2) The setting of this function will be ignored for heating/cooling control or position-proportional (floating) control. (3) Alarms 1 to 3, heater burnout, HS alarms, and heater overcurrent latches are cancelled. (4) For details on auto/manual operations using the PF Key, refer to 4-13 Per- forming Manual Control. EH Related Parameters See Monitor/setting item 1 to 5 (advanced function setting level): Page 274 LI i ï fr The PF Setting parameter must be PFd' Monitor/Setting Item * (*: 1 to 5) set to PFDP. Function

- This parameter sets the PV/SP Screen No. 3 display and order of display. + The default is 4. Function Set value Display contents 0 Only PV/SP is displayed (with no No. 3 display). Setting 1 PV/SP/Bank No. and PV/SP/MV are displayed in order. (See note.) 2 PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Bank No. are displayed in order. (See note.) 3 Only PV/SP/Bank No. is displayed. 4 PV/SP/MV is displayed (See note.) 5 PV/SP/Bank No. and PV/SP/Soak time remain are dis- played in order. 6 PV/SP/MV and PV/SP/Soak time remain are displayed in order. (See note.) 7 Only PV/SP/Soak time remain is displayed. Note The MV for heating and cooling control is set in the MV Display Selection parameter. EH Related Parameters See Process value/set point (operation level): Page 177 MV display selection (advanced function setting level): Page 275 The No. 3 display must be supported (ESAN/ENH). Heating and cooling control must be adst MV Display Selection used. The PV/SP Display Screen Selection parameter must be set to 1,2, 4, or 6, or the Monitor/Setting Item 1 to 5 parameter must be set to 2.

Setting + This parameter selects the MV display for PV/SP/MV during heating and cooling control. Either heating MV or cooling MV can be selected. Setting range Default : MV (heating) -a: MV (cooling)

- The PV in the No. 1 display for the PV/SP, PV, or PV/Manual MV (Valve Opening) Screen is alternately displayed in 0.5-s cycles with the control and alarm status specified for the PV status display function. Monitor range Default FF: No PV status display ET NU: MANU is alternately displayed during manual control. SEaP: STOP is alternately displayed while operation is stopped. LM !: ALMI is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status. ALMe: ALML is alternately displayed during Alarm 2 status. AL": ALMB is alternately displayed during Alarm 3 status. LM: ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1, 2, or 3 is set to ON. HA: HA is alternately displayed when a heater burnout alarm, HS alarm, or heater overcurrent alarm is ON. EH Related Parameters Process value/set point, PV (operation level): Page 177 PV/MV (manual MV) (manual control level): Page 221

Monitor See - The SP, Blank, or Manual MV in the No. 2 display for the PV/SP, PV, or PV/Manual MV (Valve Opening) Screen is alternately displayed in 0.5-s cycles with the control and alarm status specified for the SV status display function. Monitor range Default aFF: No SV status display *ANU: MANU is alternately displayed during manual control. SEaP: STOP is alternately displayed while operation is stopped. AL" 1: ALM is alternately displayed during Alarm 1 status. ALMe: ALML is alternately displayed during Alarm 2 status. AL": ALMB is alternately displayed during Alarm 3 status. AL": ALM is alternately displayed when Alarm 1, 2, or 3 is set to ON. HA: HA is alternately displayed when a heater burnout alarm, HS alarm, or heater overcurrent alarm is ON. GFF EH Related Parameters Process value/set point, PV (operation level): Page 177 PV/MV (manual MV) (manual control level): Page 221 Display Refresh Period Function

Monitor + This parameter delays the display refresh period for monitor values. Only display refreshing is delayed, and the refresh period for process values used in control is not changed. + This function is disabled by setting the parameter to OFF. Setting range Unit Default OFF, 0.25, 0.5, 1.0 |Second 0.25

Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count Monitor Control output 1 must be supported. A relay output, voltage output (for driving SSR), or SSR output must be used. The Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count Alarm Set Value parameter must not be set to 0. Function

Monitor - This parameter monitors the number of times that control output 1 is turned ON and OFF. - This function is not displayed when the set value is 0, or when the control output is a linear output. Monitor range Unit 0 to 9999 100 times RAC Control Output 2 ON/OFF Count Monitor Control output 2 must be supported. Relay, voltage outputs (for driving SSR), or SSR output must be used. The Control Output 2 ON/OFF Count Alarm Set Value parameter must not be set to 0.

- This parameter monitors the number of times that control output 2 is turned ON and OFF. - This function is not displayed when the set value is 0, or when the control output is a linear output. Monitor range Unit 0 to 9999 100 times

Advanced Function Setting Level Section 5-10 RAR! Control Output 1 ON/OFF Count Alarm sono is “ Spore elay, voltage outputs (for driving Set Value SSR), or SSR output must be used. Function + An ON/OFF count alarm occurs when the ON/OFF counter exceeds the value set for this parameter. - Itis possible to assign ON/OFF count alarms to auxiliary outputs and to have them displayed on the screen. - This function is disabled when the set value is 0. D | Setting range Unit Default 0 to 9999 100 times 0 Monitor EH Related Parameters See Control output 1 ON/OFF count monitor (advanced function setting level): — Page 278 Pre Control Output 2 ON/OFF Count Alarm Col output 2 must be supported. Relay, voltage outputs (for driving Set Value SSR), or SSR output must be used.

Monitor See + An ON/OFF count alarm occurs when the ON/OFF counter exceeds the value set for this parameter.

• Itis possible to assign ON/OFF count alarms to auxiliary outputs and to have them displayed on the screen. - This function is disabled when the set value is 0. Setting range Unit Default 0 to 9999 100 times 0 EH Related Parameters Control output 2 ON/OFF count monitor (advanced function setting level): Page 278

Function Setting range Default à 0: Disable the counter reset function. 0 eset the control output 1 ON/OFF counter. Setting 2: Reset the control output 2 ON/OFF counter. Note After the counter has been reset, the set value will be automatically returned to 0. EH Related Parameters See Control output 1 ON/OFF count monitor, Control output 2 ON/OFF count mon- itor (advanced function setting level): Page 278 CMoY Move to Calibration Level Initial seting/communications protect This parameter sets the password to move to the calibration level. + Set the password to move to the calibration level. The password is 1201. / + Move to the calibration level either by pressing the 2] Key or [O] Key or by Function waiting for two seconds to elapse. EH Related Parameter See Initial setting/communications protect (protect level): Page 172

Communications Setting Level

5-11 Communications Setting Level PSEL Protocol Setting Communications must be supported. U-Na Communications Unit No. bP5 Communications Baud Rate LEN Communications Data Length CompoWay/F must be selected as the protocol. Sbct Communications Stop Bits CompoWay/F must be selected as the protocol. PRE Communications Parity Sdh Send Data Wait Time + Each parameter is enabled when the power is reset. - Match the communications specifications of the ESLIN-H and the host computer. |f multiple devices are connected, ensure that the communica- tions specifications for all devices in the system (except the Communica- tions unit number) are the same. Item Symbol Set values Settings Default Protocol setting PSEL CKF, Mod CompoWay/F ONF (SYSWAY), Modbus Communications Ü-Na 0 to 99 0 to 99 ! Unit No. Communications BP 1.2, 2.4,4.8,96, 12, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 96 baud rate 19.2, 38.4, or 57.6 19.2, 38.4, or 57.6 (kbps) (kbps) Communications LEN 7 or 8 bits 7 or 8 bits 7 data length Stop bits SbCE 1 or2 bits À or 2 bits ë Communications PREY NGNE, EVEN, dd None, Even, Odd EYEN parity Send data waittime |SdME 0 to 99 0 to 99 (ms) En EH Related Parameter See Communications writing (adjustment level): Page 193

Communications Setting Level Section 5-11

Parameter Structure Section 6-1 6-1 Parameter Structure + To execute user calibration, enter the password “1201” at the Move to Cal- ibration Level parameter in the advanced function setting level. The mode will be changed to the calibration mode, and Ad! will be displayed. + The Move to Calibration Level parameter may not be displayed. If this happens, set the Initia/Communications Protect parameter in the protect level to O before moving to the advanced function setting level. (The default setting is O.) + The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF. - The parameter calibrations in the calibration mode are structured as shown below. Controllers with Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Universal Inputs Advanced Function Setting Level Moves automatically according to input type.

User Calibration Section 6-2 When calibration has been performed after purchase, the user calibration information shown in the following illustration will be displayed when moving to the calibration level.

2 (NL EE 30 A dot is displayed. 6-2 User Calibration The ESLIN-H is correctly calibrated before it is shipped from the factory, and normally need not be calibrated by the user. 1f, however, it must be calibrated by the user, use the parameters for calibrat- ing temperature input and analog input. OMRON, however, cannot ensure the results of calibration by the user. Also, calibration data is overwritten with the latest calibration results. The default calibration settings cannot be restored after user calibration. Perform user calibration with care. 6-2-1 Calibrating Inputs The input type selected in the parameter is used for calibration. The input types are as follows: Controllers with Thermocouple, Resistance Thermometer, Analog Universal Inputs + Thermocouple: 19 types + Analog input: 5 types + Platinum resistance thermometer: 6 types 6-2-2 Registering Calibration Data The new calibration data for each item is temporarily registered. lt can be offi- cially registered as calibration data only when all items have been calibrated to new values. Therefore, be sure to temporarily register all items when you perform the calibration. When the data is registered, it is also recorded that user calibration has been performed. Prepare separate measuring devices and equipment for calibration. For details on how to handle measuring devices and equipment, refer to the respective instruction manuals. 6-3 Thermocouple Calibration (Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Input) + Calibrate according to the type of thermocouple: thermocouple 1 group (input types 5, 7, 11, 12, 15, 19, 20) and thermocouple 2 group (input types 6, 8, 9, 10, 13, 14, 16, 17, 18, 21, 22, 28). + When calibrating, do not cover the bottom of the Controller. Also, do not touch input terminals/pins (terminals 4 and 5 on the E5CN-H, and pins 19 and 20 on the E5AN/EN-H) or compensating conductors.

STV Cold junction compensator 0°C/32°F

Input power supply Le. Compensating conductor Cold junction compensator 0°C/32°F Compensating conductor + Set the cold junction compensator designed for compensation of internal thermocouples to 0°C. Make sure that internal thermocouples are dis- abled (i.e., that tips are open). + In the above figure, STV indicates a standard DC current/voltage source. + Use the compensating conductor designed for the selected thermocou- ple. When thermocouples R, S, E, B, W, or PLII is used, the cold junction compensator and the compensating conductor can be substituted with the cold junction compensator and the compensating conductor for ther- mocouple K. EH Connecting the Cold Junction Compensator Correct process values cannot be obtained if you touch the contact ends of the compensating conductor during calibration of a thermocouple. Accord- ingly, short-circuit (enable) or open (disable) the tip of the thermocouple inside the cold junction compensator as shown in the figure below to create a con- tact or non-contact state for the cold junction compensator. Cold junction compensator

TO—0 Compensating conductor Short-circuit Cold junction compensator 0°C/32°F Open O—0 Compensating conductor

Thermocouple Calibration (Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Input) Section 6-3 In this example, calibration is shown for a Controller with a thermocouple set as the input type. 1,2,3... 1. Connect the power supply.

2. Connect a standard DC current/voltage source (STV), precision digital

multimeter (DMM), and contact junction compensator (e.g., a zero con- troller as in the figure) to the thermocouple input terminals, as shown in the figure below. STV DMM ER Leave open. NV [z —{_ controller OUTPUT INPUT x Compensating conductor of currently selected thermocouple Use K thermocouple compensating conductor for E, R, S, B, W, and PLII thermocouples.

3. Turn the power ON.

4. Move to the calibration level.

[m] (=. Adi This starts the 30-minute aging timer. This timer provides an approximate Bien [nl timer for aging. After 30 minutes have elapsed, the No. 2 display changes = to 0. You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if O is not displayed. Input types 5, 7, 11, 12, 15, 19,20: 5. When the © Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. =] The No. 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in L LU : Ë L £ 1 hexadecimal. Set the STV as follows: E 2 BE 945 Input types 6, 8, 9, 10, 13, 14, 16, 17,18, 21, 22, 23: Input types 5, 7, 11, 12, 15, 19, 20: Set to 54 mV. Input types 6, 8, 9, 10, 13, 14, 16, 17, 18, 21, 22, 28: Set to 24 mV. Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the E E c4 M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. = c32n If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will ESc _E con flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered. a] 6. When the €) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. BE -£ Set the STV to -6 mV. Es 2988 Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the ==) : : Les à M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered. ES rnnn 7. Press the F2 Key. The display changes as shown on the left. Set the STV © L ILILI to 700 mV. De b8 !3 Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered.

8. Press the F2 Key. The display changes as shown on the left.

[Un Set the STV to 400 mV. = ÊQhE Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered. =] = 9. When the €) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. E his EE 1588

10. Change the wiring as follows:

Open in non-connected state STV DMM Short-circuit Zero TJ controller Tu OUTPUT INPUT Compensating conductor of currently selected thermocouple Use K thermocouple compensating conductor for E, R, $, B, W and PLII thermocouple. Disconnect the STV to enable the thermocouple of the cold junction com- pensator. When doing this, be sure to disconnect the wiring on the STV side.

11. Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the

M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. [=] 7 12. When the ES Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. (a £ E T The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete. Re NG Press the [A] Key. The No. 2 display changes to 4E 5. Release the key and wait two seconds or press the Key. This stores the temporarily regis- tered calibration data to EEPROM. To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EEPROM, press the Fe] Key (while Na is dis- played in the No. 2 display) without pressing the [A] Key.

13. The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF.

For Controllers that have a transfer output (E5AN/EN-HU IF), transfer output calibration continues to be performed. For details on the settings, refer to 6-6 Calibrating the Transfer Output on page 292.

Platinum Resistance Thermometer Calibration (Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Input) Section 6-4 6-4 Platinum Resistance Thermometer Calibration (Thermocouple/Resistance Thermometer Input) In this example, calibration is shown for Controller with a resistance thermom- eter set as the input type. Use connecting wires of the same thickness. 1,2,3... 1. Connect the power supply.

2. Connect a precision resistance box (called a “6-dial” in this manual) to the

platinum resistance thermometer input terminals, as shown in the follow- ing diagram. E5CN-H Input power supply — AG ELO) 6-dial ESAN/EN-H Input power supply —@ A 8" 6-dial

3. Turn the power ON.

E] nl 4. Move to the calibration level. E Hdi This starts the 30-minute aging timer. This timer provides an approximate Bien [H timer for aging. After 30 minutes have elapsed, the No. 2 display changes = to 0. You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if O is not displayed. Input type 0: 5. Execute calibration for the main input. =] Press the € Key to display the count value for each input type. E P29f The No. 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in Eine LIN hexadecimal. Set the 6-dial as follows: Don HE + Input type 0: 390 Q Input types 1, 2, 8, 4, 24: + Input type 1, 2, 8, 4 or 24: 280 Q BE PSE Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the (=) 5 ui M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. BE Ecbh If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered. Input type 0: Press the ?] Key to display the count value for each input type. E F2 nr The No. 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in (a: LILI hexadecimal. Set the 6-dial as follows: Ecx 9399 + Input type 0: 200 Q + Input type 1, 2, 8, 4 or 24: 140 Q Input types 1, 2, 3, 4, 24: Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the =] un M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. G P Tilt If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will ex Erbb flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered.

6. When the €) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left.

EF 10 Set the 6-dial to 10 Q. Bee 643 Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered. a] 7. When the €) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. E £ E kR The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete. De NG Press the [A] Key. The No. 2 display changes to 4E 5. Release the key and wait two seconds or press the Key. This stores the temporarily regis- tered calibration data to EEPROM. To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EE- PROM, press the FI Key (while Na is displayed in the No. 2 display) with- out pressing the Key.

8. The calibration mode is quit by turning the power OFF.

For Controllers that have a transfer output (E5AN/EN-HCT FF), transfer output calibration continues to be performed. For details on the settings, refer to 6-6 Calibrating the Transfer Output on page 292. 6-5 Calibrating Analog Input (Analog Input) 6-5-1 Calibrating a Current Input In this example, calibration is shown for a Controller with a current input set as the input type. 1,2,3... 1. Connect the power supply.

2. Connect an STV and DMM to the current input terminals, as shown in the

Input power supply Input power supply STV STV DMM DMM

3. Turn the power ON.

=] 7 n 4. Move to the calibration level. E Adi; This starts the 30-minute aging timer. This timer provides an approximate Bien Hi timer for aging. After 30 minutes have elapsed, the No. 2 display changes = to 0. You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if O is not displayed. E] ñ 5. When the €) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. a] pal UE The No. 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in Bien Caen hexadecimal. Set the STV to 20 mA. Oo LU ü Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered.

6. When the €) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left.

Set the STV to 1 mA.

Ecx 097 Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered. a] 7. When the €) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. E £ E / The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete. = NG Press the [A] Key. The No. 2 display changes to 4E 5. Release the key and = wait two seconds or press the Key. This stores the temporarily regis- tered calibration data to EEPROM. To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EE- PROM, press the €] Key (while Na is displayed in the No. 2 display) with- out pressing the Key.

8. The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF.

For Controllers that have a transfer output (E5AN/EN-HU IF), transfer output calibration continues to be performed. For details on the settings, refer to 6-6 Calibrating the Transfer Output on page 292. 6-5-2 Calibrating a Voltage Input In this example, calibration is shown for a Controller with a voltage input set as the input type. 1,2,3... 1. Connect the power supply.

2. Connect an STV and DMM to the voltage input terminals, as shown in the

Input power supply Input power supply STV STV DMM DMM

3. Turn the power ON.

a] n 4. Move to the calibration level. E Ædi! This starts the 30-minute aging timer. This timer provides an approximate Een 0 timer for aging. After 30 minutes have elapsed, the No. 2 display changes = to 0. You can advance to the next step in this procedure even if O is not displayed. Input type 27 or 28: 5. When the €) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. =] The No. 2 display at this time shows the currently entered count value in E 4 £ hexadecimal. Set the STV as follows: (el 1 ex £103 + Input type 27 or 28:5 V + Input type 29: 10V Input type 29: . _ Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the BE 1, 1 M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. (=) y 10 If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will BE b O4 flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered.

Calibrating the Transfer Output Section 6-6 Input type 27 or 28: 6. When the €) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. En n Set the STV to 1 V. Ë [12 0 Allow the count value on the No. 2 display to fully stabilize, then press the ex SALE M1 Key to temporarily register the calibration settings. If this count value is outside of the specified range, the No. 2 display will Input type 29: flash and the count value will not be temporarily registered. [m] 14 ! G cÿ EEs 449 a] 1 7. When the €) Key is pressed, the status changes as shown to the left. Ë £ E F The data to be temporarily registered is not displayed if it is not complete. De NG Press the [A] Key. The No. 2 display changes to 4E 5. Release the key and wait two seconds or press the Key. This stores the temporarily regis- tered calibration data to EEPROM. To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EE- PROM, press the €] Key (while Na is displayed in the No. 2 display) with- out pressing the Key.

8. The calibration mode is ended by turning the power OFF.

For Controllers that have a transfer output (E5AN/EN-HU IF), transfer output calibration continues to be performed. For details on the settings, refer to 6-6 Calibrating the Transfer Output on page 292. 6-6 Calibrating the Transfer Output For Controllers that have a transfer output (E5CIN-HCILIF), the Transfer Output Calibration Screen will be displayed after input calibration has been completed. Advanced Function Setting Level 5 fdu EEs 39 Main Input Input calibration Calibration display

iTransfer Output 1 Note: This is displayed only for 1Calibration _ _ } Controllers that have a El transfer output (E5AN/EN- HO). Use the following procedure for calibration.

1. Connect the DMM to the transfer output terminal.

Calibrating the Transfer Output Section 6-6 E] 2. Press the #] Key to switch to the Transfer Output Screen. (= £ L kR H En FE Wa E] Tr) 3. The 20 mA Calibration Screen will be displayed. Use the El and F1 Keys to adjust E: He DE the DMM monitor value to 20 mA, and then press the [2] Key. The contents of the Eee GORE calibration will be temporarily registered. E] 4. The 4 mA Calibration Screen will be displayed. Use the and Keys to adjust E: RUE the DMM monitor value to 4 mA, and then press the & Key. The contents of the Eee HHEU calibration will be temporarily registered. =] 7 5. _ Press the [A] Key. The No. 2 display changes to 4€ 5. Release the key and wait two a] £ E T E seconds or press the el Key. This stores the temporarily registered calibration data E LA. g ERs, NG to EEPROM. To cancel the saving of temporarily registered calibration data to EEPROM, press the © Key (while Na is displayed in the No. 2 display) without pressing the Æ Key.

6. The calibration mode is quit by turning the power OFF.

Checking Indication Accuracy Section 6-7 6-7 Checking Indication Accuracy - After calibrating the input, be sure to check the indication accuracy to make sure that the calibration has been executed correctily. + Operate the ESLIN-H in the process value/set point monitor mode. + Check the indication accuracy at the following three values: upper limit, lower limit, and mid-point. 6-7-1 Thermocouple + Preparations The diagram below shows the required device connections. Make sure that the ESCN/AN/EN-H and cold junction compensator are connected by a compensating conductor for the thermocouple that is to be used during actual operation. ESCN-H Input power Suppl pui power EUppIy Cold junction compensator Ç sv

Compensating conductor ESAN/EN-H Input power suppl PHCPOWer EUPPy Cold junction compensator

Compensating conductor + Operation Make sure that the cold junction compensator is at 0°C, and set the STV output to the voltage equivalent of the starting power of the check value. The cold junction compensator and compensation conductor are not required when an external cold junction compensation method is used. 6-7-2 Platinum Resistance Thermometer + Preparations The diagram below shows the required device connections. E5CN-H Input power Supply — AG B(@) 6-dial Ten ESAN/EN-H Input power supply 1 A 8 6-dial

+ Operation Set the 6-dial to the resistance equivalent to the check value.

Checking Indication Accuracy Section 6-7 6-7-3 Analog Input + Preparations The diagram below shows the required device connections. (The connection terminals depend on the model and input type.) Current Input for a Controller with an Analog Input ESCN-H Input power supply nase

STV ESAN/EN-H Input power supply

+ Operation Set the STV output to the voltage or current equivalent to the check value.

Checking Indication Accuracy Section 6-7

Appendix Specifications Ratings Supply voltage 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz |24 VAC, 50/60 Hz/24 VDC Operating voltage range 85% to 110% of rated supply voltage Power consump- |E5CN-H |8.5 VA 5.5 VA/3.5 W tion ESAN-H |12VA 8.5 VAS.5 W E5EN-H |12 VA 8.5 VA/5.5 W Sensor input (See note 1.) Temperature input Thermocouple: K, J, T, E, L, U, N, R, S, B, W, PLII Platinum resistance thermometer: Pt100, JPt100 Controllers with Analog (See note 2.) Current input: 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 20 mA (Input impedance: 150 Q max.) Voltage input: 1 to 5 V, O to 5 V, O to 10 V (Input impedance: 1 MQ max.) Control output (See note 3.) | Relay output E5SCN-H | Relay output: SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical dura- bility: 100,000 operations Min. applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA E5AN-H | Relay output: Open and close E5SEN-H SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 1 A (including inrush current), elec- trical durability: 100,000 operations Min. applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA Voltage output |E5CN-H | Output voltage 12 VDC +15% (PNP), max. load current 21 mA, with short-circuit protection circuit Current output |E5CN-H |4 to 20 mA DC, 0 to 20 mA DC, Load: 600 Q@ max., Resolution: approx. 10,000 Linear voltage E5CN-H |0 to 10 VDC, output Load: 1 kKQ min., Resolution: approx. 10,000 SSR output E5SAN-H |75 to 250 VAC , 1A (resistive load) E5SEN-H Auxiliary output E5CN-H SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 100,000 operations Min. applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA E5AN-H SPST-NO, 250 VAC, 3 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 100,000 E5EN-H operations Min. applicable load: 5 V, 10 mA Control method 2-PID or ON/OFF control Setting method Digital setting using front panel keys Indication method 11-segment/7-segment digital display and single-lighting indicator Other functions Depend on the model Ambient temperature —10 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing); with 3-year guarantee: -10 to 50°C Ambient humidity 25% to 85% Storage temperature -25 to 65°C (with no condensation or icing) Altitude 2,000 m or less Recommended fuse T2A, 250 VAC, time lag, low shut-off capacity Installation environment Installation Category Il, Pollution Class 2 (IEC 61010-1 compliant) Note (1) For the setting ranges for each sensor input, see page 335. (2) When connecting the ES2-THB, connect it 1:1. (3) The E5SAN-H and E5EN-H Output Units are sold separately. Refer to the following table.

Appendix E5AN-H/EN-H Output Unit Ratings Model Output type Output form Specifications E53-RN Relay ON/OFF 250 VAC, 5 A (resistive load), electrical durability: 100,000 opera- tions E53-QN Voltage (PNP)_|ON/OFF PNP type, 12 VDC, 40 mA (with short-ircuit protection) E53-Q3 Voltage (NPN)_ |ON/OFF NPN type, 24 VDO, 20 mA (with short-cirouit protection) E53-Q4 Voltage (PNP) | ON/OFF PNP type, 24 VDC, 40 mA (with short-circuit protection) E53-C3N 4to 20 mA Linear 4to 20 mA DC, Load: 600 Q max., Resolution: approx. 10,000 E53-C3DN 0 to 20 mA Linear 0 to 20 mA DC, Load: 600 Q max., Resolution: approx. 10,000 E53-V34N Oto5V Linear 0 to 10 VDC, Load: 1 kQ max., Resolution: approx. 10,000 E53-V35N Oto10V Linear 0 to 5 VDC, Load: 1 kKQ max., Resolution: approx. 10,000 HB, HS, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms (for E5CN/AN/EN-H Controllers with Heater Burnout, HS, and Heater Overcurrent Alarms) Max. heater current 50 À AC Input current readout accuracy 25% FS +1 digit max. Heater burnout alarm setting range

0.1 to 49.9 A (0.1 A units)

0.1 to 49.9 A (0.1 A units)

0.0 A: HS alarm output turns ON.

50.0 A: HS alarm output turns OFF.

Min. detection OFF time: 100 ms (See note 2.) Heater overcurrent alarm setting range

0.1 to 49.9 A (0.1 A units)

0.0 A: Heater overcurrent alarm output turns ON.

50.0 A: Heater overcurrent alarm output turns OFF.

Min. detection OFF time: 100 ms Note (1) When the control output 1 ON time is less than 100 ms, heater burnout detection, heater overcurrent detection, and heater current measurement are not performed. (2) When the control output 1 OFF time is less than 100 ms, HS alarm, and leakage current measure- ment are not performed. Characteristics (ambient temperature of Indication accuracy Thermocouple (See note 1.): 23°C) Platinum resistance thermometer: Analog input: +0.1% FS +1 digit max. CT input: +5% FS +1 digit max. (+0.1% of indication value or +1°C, whichever is greater) +1 digit max. (+0.1% of indication value or +0.5°C, whichever is greater) +1 digit max. Temperature variation Thermocouple (R, S, B, W, PLII) influence (See note 2.) (41% of PV or +10°C, whichever is greater) +1 digit max. Other thermocouples: (41% of PV or +4°C, whichever is greater) +1 digit max. *K thermocouple at -100°C max: +10°C max. Voltage variation influence Platinum resistance thermometer: (See note 2.) (41% of PV or +2°C, whichever is greater) +1 digit max. Analog input: +1% FS +1 digit max. Hysteresis Temperature Input 0.1 to 3240.0°C or °F (in units of 0.1°C or °F) Analog Input 0.01% to 99.99% FS (in units of 0.01% FS)

Appendix Proportional band (P)

0.1 to 3240.0°C or °F

(in units of 0.1°C or °F) Temperature Input Analog Input 0.1% to 999.9% FS (in units of 0.1% FS) Integral time (l) Standard, heating/cooling, position proportional (closed): 0.0 to 3240.0 Position proportional (floating): 0.1 to 3240.0 (in units of 0.1 s) Derivative time (D)

0.0 to 3240.0 (in units of 0.1 s)

Control Period 0.5, 1 to 99s (in units of 1s) Manual reset value 0.0% to 100.0% (in units of 0.1%) Alarm setting range -19,999 to 32,400 (decimal point position depends on input type) Sampling period 60 ms Insulation resistance 20 MQ min. (at 500 VDC) Dielectric strength 2,300 VAC, 50/60 Hz for 1 min between terminals of different charge Malfunction vibration 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s? for 10 min each in X, Y and Z directions Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz, 20 m/s? for 2 hr each in X, Y, and Z directions Malfunction shock 100 m/s?, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions Shock resistance 300 m/s?, 3 times each in X, Y, and Z directions Weight E5CN-H | Approx. 150 g Adapter: approx. 10 g Terminal cover: approx. 10 g E5AN-H | Approx. 310 g Adapter: approx. 100 g Terminal cover: approx. ESEN-H | Approx. 260 g 1.6 g per cover Degree of protec- | E5CN-H | Front panel: IP66 tion E5AN-H | Rear case: IP20 ESEN-H | Terminals: IPOO Memory protection EEPROM (non-volatile memory) (number of writes: 1,000,000) Note (1) The indication accuracy of K thermocouples in the -200 to 1,300°C range, T and N thermocouples at a temperature of -100°C or less, and U and L thermocouples at any temperature is +2°C #1 digit maximum. The indication accuracy of B thermocouples at a temperature of 400°C to 800+3°C or less is not specified. The indication accuracy of R and S thermocouples at a temperature of 200°C or less is +3°C +1 digit maximum. The indication accuracy of W thermocouples is (the larger of +0.8% or +3°C) +1 digit maximum and the indication accuracy of PLII thermocouples is (the larger of +0.3% or +2°C) +1 digit maximum. (2) Ambient temperature: -10°C to 23°C to 55°C Voltage range: -15 to +10% of rated voltage

Appendix Rating and Characteristics of Options Event inputs Contact Input ON: 1 kQ max., OFF: 100 kQ@ min. Non-contact Input ON: Residual voltage 1.5 V max.; OFF: Leakage current 0.1 mA max. Communications Transmission path: RS-485/232C/RS-422 Communications method: RS-485 (2-wire, half duplex), RS-232C or RS-422 (4-wire, half duplex) Synchronization: Start-stop Baud rate: 1.2, 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 38.4, or 57.6 kbps Transfer output 4 to 20 mA DC, Load: 600 Q@ max., Resolution: Approx. 10,000, Accuracy: +0.3% Current Transformer (CT) ltem Specifications Model number E54-CT1 E54-CT3 Max. continuous current |50 À 120 A (See note.) Dielectric strength 1,000 VAC (for 1 min) Vibration resistance 50 Hz, 98 m/s? Weight Approx. 11.5g Approx. 50 g Accessories None Armature (2), Plug (2) Note The maximum continuous current of the E5[ IN-H is 50 A. External Dimensions E54-CT1

Appendix E58-CIFQ1 USB-Serial Conversion Cable Item Specifications Applicable OS Windows 2000/XP/Vista Applicable software CX-Thermo version 4.00 or higher Applicable models OMRON E5AN/EN/CN-H Digital Controllers USB interface rating Conforms to USB Specification 1.1 DTE speed 38,400 bps Connector specifications Computer end: USB (type A plug) Digital Controller end: Serial Power supply Bus power (5 VDC supplied from USB host controller) Current consumption 70 mA Ambient operating temperature | 0 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing) Ambient operating humidity 10% to 80% Storage temperature —20 to 60°C (with no condensation or icing) Storage humidity 10% to 80% Altitude 2,000 m max. Weight Approx. 100 g Compatible Operating Environment A personal computer that includes the following specifications is required. + USB port + CD-ROM drive + Windows 2000/XP/Vista Appearance and Nomenclature Appearance (Unit: mm) (2,100) 250 1,765 J USB connector (type À plug) \ LED (RD) Serial connector LED Indicator Display Indicator Color Status Meaning SD Yellow Lit Sending data from USB-Serial Conversion Cable Not lit Not sending data from USB-Serial Conversion Cable RD Yellow Lit Receiving data from the USB-Serial Conversion Cable Not lit Not receiving data from the USB-Serial Conversion Cable

Appendix E58-CIFIR USB-Infrared Conversion Cable Specifications Item Specifications Applicable OS Windows 2000/XP/Vista Applicable software CX-Thermo version 4.0 or higher Applicable models OMRON E5AN/EN-H Digital Controllers USB interface rating Conforms to USB Specification 1.1 DTE speed 38,400 bps Connector specifications Computer end: USB (type A plug) Power supply Bus power (5 VDC supplied from USB host controller) Current consumption 80 mA max. Ambient operating temperature 0 to 55°C (with no condensation or icing) Ambient operating humidity 10% to 80% Storage temperature —20 to 60°C (with no condensation or icing) Storage humidity 10% to 80% Altitude 2,000 m max. Weight Approx. 130 g (including mounting adapter) Accessories Instruction Sheet, Setup Manual, driver CD-ROM, mounting adapter Compatible Operating Environment A personal computer that includes the following specifications is required. + USB port + CD-ROM drive + Windows 2000/XP/Vista Appearance and Nomenclature Appearance (Unit: mm) With Mounting Adapter Connected (2000) __54 œ _ 8 —4(| FT F ol CES — = USB connector (type À plug) sl LED (RD) LED (BD) al Ÿ 18.5 Mounting adapter œ TE + —__— è a = è a) 23.1 a 5) LED Indicators Indicator Color Status Meaning SD Yellow Lit Sending data from personal computer to Digital Controller. Not lit Not sending data from personal computer to Digital Controller. RD Yellow Lit Personal computer receiving data from Digital Controller. Not lit Personal computer not receiving data from Digital Controller.

Appendix Error Displays When an error occurs, the error contents are shown on the No. 1 or the No. 2 display. This section describes how to check error codes on the display, and the actions to be taken to remedy the problems. ( GERR Input Error Meaning The input value has exceeded the control range. (See note.) Note Control Range Resistance thermometer, thermocouple input: Temperature setting lower limit -20°C to temperature setting upper limit +20°C (Temperature setting lower limit -40°F to temperature setting upper limit +40°F) Analog input -5% to +105% of scaling range Action Check the wiring of inputs for miswiring, disconnections, and short-circuits and check the input type. If no abnormality is found in the wiring and input type, turn the power OFF then back ON again. If the display remains the same, the Controller must be replaced. If the display is restored, then the probable cause is electrical noise affecting the control system. Check for electrical noise. Note With resistance thermometer input, a break in the A, B, or B' line is regarded as a disconnection. Operation at Error After an error occurs, the error is displayed and the alarm outputs function as if the upper limit has been exceeded. When the Input Error Output parameter in the advanced function setting level is set to ON, the output assigned to the alarm 1 function turns ON whenever an input error occurs. An error message is displayed when the PV, PV/SP, or PV/MV is displayed. Note The control output turns OFF. When the manual MV, MV at stop, or MV at PV error is set, however the control output corresponds to the set value. Display Range Exceeded

Meaning Though this is not an error, it is displayed if the process value exceeds the display range when the control range is larger than the display range. The display ranges are shown below (with decimal points omitted). + When less than -19,999 cccc + When more than 32,400 3223

Appendix Action Control continues, allowing normal operation. The message is displayed when the PV, PV/SP, or PV/MV is dis- played. Resistance thermometer input (Except for models with a Resistance thermometer input (Except for models with a setting range of -199.9 to 500.0°C) setting range of -1999. to 500.0°C) Thermocouple input (Except for models with a setting range of Thermocouple input (Except for models with a setting range of

Meaning There is an error in internal circuits. Action First, turn the power OFF then back ON again. If the display remains the same, the Controller must be repaired. If the display is restored, then the probable cause is electrical noise affecting the control system. Check for electrical noise. Operation Control output and alarm output turn OFF. [ Eli Memory Error ) Meaning Internal memory operation is in error. Action First, turn the power OFF then back ON again. If the display remains the same, the Controller must be repaired. If the display is restored, then the probable cause is electrical noise affecting the control system. Check for electrical noise. Operation at Error Control output and alarm output turn OFF. (Current output is approx. 0 mA). [ FFFEF Current Value Exceeds ) Meaning This error is displayed when the heater current value exceeds 55.0 A.

Appendix Action Control continues, allowing normal operation. An error message is displayed when the following items are dis- played. Heater current 1 value monitor Heater current 2 value monitor Leakage current 1 monitor Leakage current 2 monitor FL I == Heater B t FL eater Burnou LLE HS Alarm LEA! Heater Overcurrent

LERe Meaning When heater burnout, HS alarm, or heater overcurrent occurs, the No. 1 display in the applicable setting level flashes. Action When a heater burnout, HS error, or heater overcurrent is detected, the HA indicator lights and the No. 1 dis- play flashes for the applicable Heater Current 1 Value Monitor, Heater Current 2 Value Monitor, Leakage Cur- rent 1 Monitor, or Leakage current 1 Monitor parameters in the operation level and adjustment level. Control continues, allowing normal operation. ( == Potentiometer Input Error ) Meaning When an input count value error occurs or the converted valve opening is not between -10% and 110%, the valve opening monitor value will be displayed as “- - - -’ Action Check the wiring of the potentiometer. Operation The control outputs will turn OFF or will output the MV value set for errors. Operation will be normal if floating control is being used. The valve opening monitor value will be displayed as “- - - -

Appendix Troubleshooting Checking Problems 1f the Digital Controller is not operating normally, check the following points before requesting repairs. If the problem persists, contact your OMRON representative for details on returning the product. Timing Status Meaning Countermeasures Page Turning ON the |Temperature unit ST (self-tuning) is in |This is not a product fault. The temperature |62 power for the (C/°F) is flashing. progress (default unit (°C/°F) flashes while ST (self-tuning) is first time setting: ON). being performed Temperature error is | Input type mismatch | Check the sensor type and reset the input |49 large. type correctly. Input error (S.Err dis- |Thermometer is not _|Checkthe thermometer installation location |28 play) installed properly. and polarity and install correctly. Communications are | Non-recommended | Make sure that the connected device is not | Section 1 of not possible. adapter is being faulty. Communi- used. cations Manual During opera- Overshooting ON/OFF control is Select PID control and execute either ST 60 tion Undershooting enabled (self-tuning) or AT (auto-tuning). Hunting When using self-tuning, turn ON the power supply to the Digital Controller and load (heater, etc.) at the same time, or turn ON the load power supply first. Accurate self- tuning and optimum control will not be pos- sible if the power supply to the load is turned ON after turning ON the power sup- ply to the Digital Controller. Control cycle is Shorten the control cycle. A shorter control |52 longer compared cycle improves control performance, but a with the speed of cycle of 20 ms minimum is recommended in rise and fall in tem- | consideration of the service life of the perature relays. Unsuitable PID con- | Set appropriate PID constants using either |60 stant of the following methods. + Execute AT (autotuning). + Set PID constants individually using man- ual settings. HS alarm operation | Use breeder resistance if the problem is 71 fault due to leakage current. Also investigate the errors detected by the HS alarm function. Temperature is not | Specified operation | Select either forward or reverse operation |52 rising is unsuitable for depending on the required control. Reverse required control operation is used for heating operations. (default: Reverse operation) Heater is burnt out or | Check whether heater burnout or deteriora- | 71 deteriorated. tion have occurred. Also investigate the errors detected by the heater burnout alarm. Insufficient heater Check whether the heater's heating capac- |--- capacity ity is sufficient. Cooling system in Check whether a cooling system is operat- |--- operation. ing. Peripheral devices | Set the heating prevention temperature set- | --- have heat preven- ting to a value higher than the set tempera- tion device operat- |ture of the Digital Controller. ing.

Appendix Timing Status Meaning Countermeasures Page During opera- Output will not turn | Set to STOP Set the RUN/STOP mode to RUN. If STOP |185 tion (continued) |ON (default: RUN) is lit on the display, control is stopped. Specified operation | Select either forward or reverse operation |52 is unsuitable for depending on the required control. Reverse required control operation is used for heating operations. (default: Reverse operation) A high hysteresis is | Set a suitable value for the hysteresis. 57 set for ON/OFF oper- ation (default: 1.0°C) Digital Controller will | Set to STOP Set the RUN/STOP mode to RUN. If STOP |185 not operate (default: RUN) is lit on the display, control is stopped. Temperature error is | Thermometer has Check whether the thermometer has burnt |--- large burnt out or short-cir- | out or short-circuited Input error (S.err dis- | cuited. play) Thermometer lead | Wire the lead wires and power lines in sep- |-—- wires and power arate conduits, or wiring using a more direct lines are in the same | path. conduit, causing noise from the power lines (generally, dis- play values will be unstable). Connection between | Connect the thermocouple's lead wires — the Digital Controller | directly, or connect a compensating conduc- and thermocouple is |tor suitable for the thermocouple. using copper wires. Installation location | Check whether the location of the thermom- | --- of thermometer is eter is suitable. unsuitable. Input shift is not set | Set a suitable input shift. If input shift is not |87 correctly (default: required, set the input shift value to 0.0. 0°C) Keys will not operate | Setting change pro- |Turn OFF setting change protect. 106 tect is ON. Cannot shift levels Operations limited Set the operation/adjustment protect, initial |106 due to protection. setting/communications protect, and set- ting change protect values as required. After long ser- |Control is unstable | Terminal screws may | Retighten terminal screws to a torque of 30 vice life be loose. 0.74 to 0.90 N-m. The internal compo- |The Digital Controller's internal electrolytic |--- nents have reached | capacitor depends on the ambient tempera- the end of their ser- |ture, and load rate. The structural life vice life. depends on the ambient environment (shock, vibration). The life expectancy of the output relays varies greatly with the switch- ing capacity and other switching conditions. Always use the output relays within their rated load and electrical life expectancy. If an output relay is used beyond its life expectancy, its contacts may become welded or burned. Replace the Digital Con- troller and all other Digital Controllers pur- chased in the same time period.

Appendix Symptom: Cannot Communicate or a Communications Error Occurs Meaning Countermeasures The communications wiring is not correct. Correct the wiring. The communications line has become dis- connected. Connect the communications line securely and tighten the screws. The communications cable is broken. Replace the cable. The communications cable is too long. The total cable length is 500 m maximum for RS-485 and 15 m maximum for RS-232C communications. To extend the communications distance for RS-232C communications, use OMROM's Z3R Optical Interface. The wrong communications cable has been used. Use a shielded, twisted-pair AWG24 to AWG14 (cross-sectional area of

0.205 to 2.081 mm?) cable for the communications cable.

More than the specified number of communi- cations devices are connected to the same communications path for RS-485/RS-422 communications. When 1:N RS-485/RS-422 communications are used, a maximum of 32 nodes (including the host node) can be connected. An end node has not been set at each end of the communications line for RS-485/RS-422 communications. Set or connect terminating resistance at each end of the line. RS-485 connections: If the ESCN-H, ESAN-H, or E5EN-H is the end node, use 120-Q (1/2-W) terminating resistance. The combined terminating resistance with the host device must be at least 54 Q. RS-422 connections: If the E5AN-H or E5EN-H is the end node, use 240-Q (1/2-W) terminating resistance. The combined terminating resistance with the host device must be at least 100 ©. The specified power supply voltage is not being supplied to the Controller. Supply the specified power supply voltage. The specified power supply voltage is not being supplied to an Interface Converter (such as the K3SC). Supply the specified power supply voltage. The same baud rate and communications method are not being used by all of the Con- trollers, host devices, and other devices on the same communications line. Set the same values for the baud rate, protocol, data length, stop bits, and parity on all nodes. The unit number specified in the command frame is different from the unit number set by the Controller. Use the same unit number. The same unit number as the Controller is being used for another node on the same communications line for RS-485 communica- tions. Set each unit number for only one node. There is a mistake in programming the host device. Use a line monitor to check the commands. Check operation using a sam- ple program. The host device is detecting the absence of a response as an error before it receives the response from the Controller. Shorten the send data wait time in the Controller or increase the response wait time in the host device. The host device is detecting the absence of a response as an error after broadcasting a command (except for SYSWAY). The Controller does not return responses for broadcast commands. The host device sent another command before receiving a response from the Control- ler. The response must always be read after sending a command (except for broadcast commandés). The host device sent the next command too soon after receiving a response from the Controller. After receiving a response, wait at least 2 ms before sending the next command.

Appendix Meaning Countermeasures The communications line became unstable | Initialize the reception buffer in the host device before sending the first when Controller power was turned ON or command and after turning OFF the power to the Controller. interrupted, and the host device read the unstable status as data. The communications data was corrupted Try using a slower baud rate. from noise from the environment. Separate the communications cable from the source of noise. Use a shielded, twisted-pair cable for the communications cable. Use as short a communications cable as possible, and do not lay or loop extra cable. To prevent inductive noise, do not run the communications cable parallel to a power line. If noise countermeasures are difficult to implement, use an Optical Inter- face. Note For details on errors, refer to ESCN-H/ESAN-H/ESEN-H Digital Controllers Communications Manual Advanced Type (Cat. No. H159).

Appendix (2) Unless the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF, the bank number will be from 0 to the value set for the Valid Program Bank parameter. Adjustment Level ature Input Shift Value Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Adjustment Level LAdu Display AT Execute/Cancel |fE OFF: AT Cancel oFF, OFF None AT-2: 100%AT Execute RE, AT-1: 40%AT Execute (See RE- 1 note 3.) Communications CANE OFF, ON oFF, a OFF None Writing Infrared Communica- | LFd# OFF, ON oFF, a OFF None tions Use SP Mode SPHd LSP, RSP LSP, RSP LSP None Heater Current 1 CET 0.0 to 55.0 A Value Monitor Heater Burnout Hb 1 0.0 to 50.0 0.0 A Detection 1 Heater Overcurrent |G£ ! 0.0 to 50.0 50.0 A Detection 1 Heater Current 2 CEe 0.0 to 55.0 A Value Monitor Heater Burnout Hbe 0.0 to 50.0 0.0 A Detection 2 Heater Overcurrent |G£e2 0.0 to 50.0 50.0 A Detection 2 Leakage Current 1 LER! 0.0 to 55.0 A Monitor HS Alarm 1 HS 0.0 to 50.0 50.0 A Leakage Current2 |LCRe 0.0 to 55.0 A Monitor HS Alarm 2 LENS 0.0 to 50.0 50.0 A Heater Burnout Hb 1 0.0 to 50.0 0.0 A Detection 1 Heater Burnout Hbe 0.0 to 50.0 0.0 A Detection 2 SPO SP-0 SP lower limit to SP upper 0 EU limit SP 1 SP! SP lower limit to SP upper 0 EU limit sP2 SP-e SP lower limit to SP upper 0 EU limit SP 3 SP-3 SP lower limit to SP upper 0 EU limit Temperature Input CNS —199.99 to 32400 0.00 °Cor°F Shift Upper Limit Temper- | CNGH 199.99 to 32400 0.00 °Cor°F ature Input Shift Value Lower Limit Temper- | [NS —199.99 to 32400 0.00 °Cor°F

%FS Integral Time (See note 1.) Standard, heating/cooling, position proportional (closed):

Position proportional (floating): 0.1 to 3240.0

Second Derivative Time (See note 1.)

Hysteresis (Heating) Temperature input: 0.1 to

OFF %FS MV at Stop Standard: -5.0 to 105.0 Heating/cooling: -105.0 to

MV at PV Error Standard: -5.0 to 105.0 Heating/cooling: -105.0 to

SP Ramp Set Value (See note 2.) SPRÈE OFF or 1 to 9,999 oFF, {to

Appendix Root Low-cut Point Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value MV Upper Limit ot-H Standard: MV lower limit (0.1 105.0 % (See note 1.) to 105.0 Heating/cooling: 0.0 to 105.0 Position proportional (closed): MV upper limit (0.1 to 105.0) MV Lower Limit ob-t Standard: -5.0 to MV upper -5.0 % (See note 1.) limit -0.1 Heating/cooling: -105.0 to 0.0 -105.0 Position proportional (closed): -5.0 -5.0 to MV upper limit -0.1 MV Change Rate oRt 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 %ls Limit (0.0: MV Change Rate Limit Disabled) Position Propor- db Position proportional (closed): 4.0 % tional Dead Band 0.1 to 10.0 Position proportional 2.0 (floating): 0.1 to 10.0 Open/Close Hystere- | al -H 0.1 to 20.0 0.8 % sis Extraction of Square | 5FF 0.0 to 100.0 0.0 % Note (1) The parameters in the current PID set will be accessed. (2) The parameters in the current bank will be accessed. (3) Not displayed for heating/cooling control or floating control (for models with position-proportional control).

Analog input: OFF, 0.01to |aFF, DU! to 99.39 %FS

Analog input: OFF, 0.01 to |afF, 0.0 {to 99.99 %FS

Bank 5 SP SLSP SP lower limit to SP upper 0.0 EU limit

Analog input: OFF, 0.01 to |aFF, DE !to 99.39 %FS

Bank 6 SP BLSP SP lower limit to SP upper 00 EU limit

Analog input: OFF, 0.01 to |afF, 0.0 {to 99.99 %FS

Bank 7 SP TLSP SP lower limit to SP upper 0.0 EU limit

Analog input: OFF, 0.01 to |afF, 0.0 {to 99.99 %FS

Note The current bank is displayed. If the bank is changed with the Up or Down Key, monitor functions will be lost.

Position proportional (floating):

Appendix Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Scaling Upper Limit_[EN-H Scaling lower limit + 1 to 100 None Scaling Lower Limit [CNE =19,999 to scaling upper limit 0 None Decimal Point dP Oto3 0 None Temperature Unit -Ù °C, °F CF °C None SP Upper Limit SE-H Temperature input: SP lower 1300.0 EU limit + 1 to input range upper limit Analog input: SP lower limit + 1 to Scaling upper limit SP Lower Limit SE-E Temperature input: Input -200.0 EU range lower limit to SP upper limit —1 Analog: Scaling lower limit to SP upper limit -1 PID ON/OFF CNEL ON/OFF 2-PID oNaF,Pid |PID None Standard or Heating/ | 5-HE Standard or heating/cooling |5ENd, H-[ | Standard None Cooling ST SE OFF, ON oFF, a ON None Program Pattern PERN OFF, STOP, CONT, LOOP oFF, SEoP, |OFF None Can! Valid Program Bank |PBNK Oto7 7 None Control Period CP 0.5 or 1 to 99 85, {to 99 |20 Second (Heating) Control Period (Cool- | -EP 0.5 or 1 to 99 85, {to 99 |20 Second ing) Direct/Reverse GREY Reverse operation, direct 08-R, a#-d | Reverse None Operation operation operation

Appendix Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Transfer Output ER-E See note 6. See note 6. | See note 6. Lower Limit Linear Current Out- |àa{-E 4-20: 4 to 20 mA 4-28, 0-20 |4-20 None put 0-20: 0 to 20 mA Bank Numbers Used | £#-b Oto2 1 None 0 to 3 (Only when four event inputs are supported) Event Input Assign- |E#- 1 None: None NaNE NONE None ment 1 STOP: RUN/STOP Ska? MANU: Auto/Manual MANU PRST: Program Start (See |PRGE note 3.) DRS: Invert Direct/Reverse |dRS Operation AT-2: 100% AT Execute/Can- |AE-2 cel AT-1: 40% AT Execute/Cancel | AE - ! WTPT: Setting Change NEPE Enable/Disable CMWT: Communications CANE Write Enable/Disable LAT: Alarm Latch Cancel LAE Event Input Assign- |E#-2 None: None NaNE STOP None ment 2 STOP: RUN/STOP Ska? MANU: Auto/Manual MANU PRST: Program Start (See |PRGE note 3.) DRS: Invert Direct/Reverse |dRS Operation AT-2: 100% AT Execute/Can- |AE-2 cel AT-1: 40% AT Execute/Cancel | AE - ! WTPT: Setting Change NEPE Enable/Disable CMWT: Communications CANE Write Enable/Disable LAT: Alarm Latch Cancel LAE Event Input Assign- |[E7-2 Same as for Event Input NGNE NONE None ment 3 Assignment 1. Event Input Assign- |E#-4 Same as for Event Input NaNE NONE None ment 4 Assignment 1. Closed/Floating CLFE FLOT: Floating Floë, FLOT None CLOS: Closed [Los Motor Calibration [CALE OFF, ON GFF, OFF None

Travel Time MoË 1 to 999 30 s Extraction of Square | 58F OFF, ON oFF, OFF None Root Enable oN Move to Advanced Aa —1999 to 9,999 0 None function Setting Level Note (1) Displayed when there is a remote SP input. (2) If the PV is selected, the remote SP will be output as long as the SP Mode is set to the Remote SP Mode. (3) This setting is ignored for position-proportional control models. (4) This setting is ignored for models with standard or position-proportional control. (5) Displayed only when there is a potentiometer input for a model with position-proportional control.

Appendix (6) Refer to the following table. Transfer output Setting (monitor) range Default (transfer output Unit type upper/lower limits) (See note 6.1.) Set Point SP lower limit to SP upper limit | SP upper limit/lower limit EU Set Point During SP | SP lower limit to SP upper limit | SP upper limit/lower limit EU Ramp Pv Temperature input: Input set- Input setting range upper/ EU ting range lower limit to input lower limit setting range upper limit Analog input: Scaling lower limit | Scaling upper/lower limit EU to scaling upper limit MV Monitor Standard: -5.0 to 105.0 100.0/0.0 % (Heating) Heating/cooling: 0.0 to 105.0 MV Monitor 0.0 to 105.0 100.0/0.0 % (Cooling) Valve Opening -10.0 to 110.0 100.0/0.0 % (6.1) Initialized when the transfer output type is changed. Initialized if the input type, temperature unit, scaling upper/lower limit, or SP upper/ lower limit is changed when the transfer output type is SP, ramp SP, or PV. (7) The setting of PRST (program start) will be ignored if the Program Pattern parameter is set to OFF. (8) Can be selected only for models with the remote SP function. (2) This setting will be ignored for heating/cooling control or for floating control (for models with position- proportional control). (10) Displayed only for models with communications. (11) The parameter will be “NONE” for models with event inputs 3 and 4. Manual Control Level Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Manual MV -5.0 to 105.0 (standard) (See note 1.) -105.0 to 105.0 (heating/cool- ing) (See note 1.) —0.5 to 105.0 (position propor- tional) (See notes 1 and 2.)

Note limit to the MV upper limit. (2) The valve opening will be monitored for floating control or close control when the Direct Setting of Position Proportional MV parameter is set to OFF. Monitor/Setting Item Level (1) When the Manual MV Limit Enable parameter is set to ON, the setting range will be the MV lower The contents displayed vary depending on the Monitor/Setting 1 to 5 (advanced function setting level) setting. Advanced Function Setting Level Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Parameter Initializa- | CN OFF, FACT oFF, FACE [OFF None tion SP Ramp Time Unit | SPF S: EU/second 5 M None (See note 1.) M: EU/minute " H: EU/hour H Standby Sequence |FESE Condition A, condition B f,b Condition A | None Reset HB ON/OFF Hbt OFF, ON oFF, a ON None

Appendix Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Auxiliary Output 1 SE IN N-O: Close in alarm N-a,N-C N-O None Open in Alarm N-C: Open in alarm Auxiliary Output 2 SbEN N-O: Close in alarm N-a,N-C N-O None Open in Alarm N-C: Open in alarm Auxiliary Output 3 SbIN N-O: Close in alarm N-a,N-C N-O None Open in Alarm N-C: Open in alarm Heater Burnout HbE OFF, ON oFF, où OFF None Latch Heater Burnout Hys- | HbH 0.1 to 50.0 0.1 A teresis ST Stable Range SE-b 0.1 to 3240.0 15.0 °Cor°F œ ALFA 0.00 to 1.00 0.65 None AT Calculated Gain |AE-G 0.1 to 10.0 0.8 None AT Hysteresis RE-H Universal input: 0.1 to 3240.0 0.8 °Cor°F Analog input: 0.01 to 9.99 0.20 %FS Limit Cycle MV LCHA 5.0 to 50.0 20.0 % Amplitude Input Digital Filter [CM 0.0 to 999.9 0.0 Second Additional PV Dis- PYAd OFF, ON oFF, où OFF None play MV Display o-dP OFF, ON oFF, où OFF None Automatic Display REE OFF or 1 to 99 oFF, {to OFF Second Return Time ÉEI Alarm 1 Latch AILE OFF, ON oFF, a OFF None Alarm 2 Latch ABLE OFF, ON FF, OFF None Alarm 3 Latch A3LE OFF, ON oFF, a OFF None Move to Protect PRLE 1to 30 3 Second Level Time Input Error Output SERa OFF, ON oFF, où OFF None Cold junction Com- |£uf OFF, ON oFF, ah ON None pensation Method MB Command Logic |F£R# OFF, ON oFF, où OFF None Switching PV Change Color Car Orange, Red, Green oRG, REd, |RED None CAN GRN Red to Green: When ALM1 is |P-& ON, Green to Red: When ALMA is |G-R Red to Green to Red R-LR Within PV stable band: Green Outside stable band: Red Green to Orange to Red G-af Within PV stable band: Green Outside stable band: Green, Red Orange to Green to Red o-0R Within PV stable band: Green Outside stable band: Green, Red PV Stable Band |P7-b Temperature input: 0.1 to 5.0 “Cor °F 3240.0 (See note Analog input: 0.01 to 99.99 5.00 %FS

Appendix Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Alarm 1 ON Delay |A IGN 0 to 999 (0: ON delay dis- Q Second abled) Alarm 2 ON Delay |A2N 0 to 999 (0: ON delay dis- 0 Second abled) Alarm 3 ON Delay |A35N 0 to 999 (0: ON delay dis- 0 Second abled) Alarm 1 OFF Delay |A 16F 0 to 999 (0: OFF delay dis- 0 Second abled) Alarm 2 OFF Delay |FeaF 0 to 999 (0: OFF delay dis- 0 Second abled) Alarm 3 OFF Delay |F30F 0 to 999 (0: OFF delay dis- 0 Second abled) Input Shift Type CSEP INST: Temperature input 1 [CAS f, CASE |INST None point shift INS2: Temperature input 2- point shift MV at Stop and Error |} 5E OFF, ON oFF, a OFF None Addition Auto/Manual Select |AMAd OFF, ON oFF, a OFF None Addition RT RE OFF, ON oFF, a OFF None HS Alarm Use HS OFF, ON oFF, a ON None HS Alarm Latch HSE OFF, ON oFF, où OFF None HS Alarm Hysteresis | H5H 0.1 to 50.0 0.1 A LBA Detection Time |LbA 0 to 9999 (0: LBA function dis- 0 Second (See note 2.) abled) LBA Level LbAt Temperature input: 0.1 to 8.0 °Cor°F Analog input: 0.01 to 99.99 10.00 %FS LBA Band LEA Temperature input: 0.0 to 30 °C or°F Analog input: 0.00 to 99.99 0.20 %FS

Appendix Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Remote SP Enable |F5P4 OFF, ON oFF, a OFF None Remote SP Upper |F5PH SP lower limit to SP upper 1300.0 EU Limit limit Remote SP Lower |F5PL SP lower limit to SP upper —200.0 EU Limit limit SP Tracking SPER OFF, ON oFF, a OFF None Remote SP Input RSEa OFF, ON oFF, a OFF None Error Output PID Set Automatic |Pidc PV: Process Value 2 PV None Selection Data DV: Deviation di ‘ P SP: Set point 5 PID Set Automatic PCdH 0.10 to 99.99 0.50 %FS Selection Hysteresis PV Dead Band P-d& 0 to 32400 0.0 EU Manual MV Limit MANE OFF, ON oFF, a OFF None Enable Direct Setting of PMd OFF, ON oFF, a OFF None Position Propor- tional MV PV Rate of Change |PFFP 1 to 999 17 Sampling Calculation Period period Automatic Cooling |£SER OFF, ON oFF, ah OFF None Coefficient Adjust- ment Heater Overcurrent |a£t OFF, ON oFF, a ON None Use Heater Overcurrent |a£L OFF, ON oFF, a OFF None Latch Heater Overcurrent |G£H 0.1 to 50.0 0.1 A Hysteresis PF Setting PF OFF: Not assigned GFE AM None

AT-2: 100% AT Execute RE -e AT-1: 40% AT Execute RE- 1 LAT: Alarm Latch Cancel LAE A-M: Auto/manual ui PFDP: Monitor/setting item PFdP BANK: Bank selection bANI Monitor/Setting Item |PFd ! 0: Disabled 1 None 1 1: PV/SP/Bank No. 2: PV/SP/MV 3: PV/SP/Soak time remain 4: Proportional band (P) 5: Integral time (1) 6: Derivative time (D) 7: Alarm value 1 8: Alarm value upper limit 1 9: Alarm value lower limit 1 10: Alarm value 2 11: Alarm value upper limit 2 larm value lower limit 2 larm value 3 larm value upper limit 3 larm value lower limit 3 16: Bank No. PFde Same as for Monitor/Setting 0 None Monitor/Setting Item

Appendix Level Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Monitor/Setting Item |PFd3 Same as for Monitor/Setting 0 None 3 liem 1. Monitor/Setting Item |PFd44 Same as for Monitor/Setting 0 None 4 liem 1. Monitor/Setting Item |PFd45 Same as for Monitor/Setting 0 None 5 liem 1. PV/SP Display SPdP 0: PV/SP 4 None Screen Selection 1: PV/SP/Bank No. PV/SP/MV 2: PV/SP/MV, PV/SP/Bank No. 3: PV/SP/Bank No. 4: PV/SP/MV 5: PV/SP/Bank No., PV/SP/ Soak Time Remain 6: PV/SP/MV, PV/SP/Soak Time Remain 7: PV/SP/Soak Time Remain MV Display Selec- |od5t O: MV (Heating) ü 0 None tion C-O: MV (Cooling) £-a PV Decimal Point PYdP OFF, ON oFF, a ON None Display PV Status Display PYSE OFF: OFF oFF OFF None Function MANU: Manual MANU STOP: Stop SEaP ALM1: Alarm 1 AEN ALM2: Alarm 2 ALNe ALM3: Alarm 3 ALNI ALM: Alarm 1 to 3 OR status |AL# HA: Heater alarm HA SV Status Display SYSE OFF: OFF oFF OFF None Function MANU: Manual MANU STOP: Stop SEaP ALM1: Alarm 1 AEN ALM2: Alarm 2 LM ALM3: Alarm 3 ALNI ALM: Alarm 1 to 3 OR status |AL# HA: Heater alarm HA Display Refresh REF OFF, 0.25, 0.5, 1.0 OFF 0.25 Second Period &e5

Control Output 1 ON/| FA #4 0 to 9999 100 times OFF Count Monitor Control Output 2 ON/| RARE 0 to 9999 100 times OFF Count Monitor Control Output 1 ON/| FA 0 to 9999 0 100 times OFF Count Alarm Set Value Control Output 2 ON/|RA2 0 to 9999 0 100 times OFF Count Alarm Set Value ON/OFF Counter RAC Oto2 0 None Reset Move to Calibration | £Ma# —1999 to 9,999 0 None

Appendix Note (1) The parameters in the current PID set will be accessed. (2) Displayed for ON/OFF control. (3) The setting range depends on whether control output 1 is a linear output (relay output, current out- put, or linear voltage output) or an ON/OFF output (voltage output (for driving SSR) or SSR output. (4) The setting range depends on whether control output 2 is a linear output (relay output, current out- put, or linear voltage output) or an ON/OFF output (voltage output (for driving SSR) or SSR output. (5) This setting is ignored if the Program Pattern parameter is OFF. (6) WR1 to WR8 are not displayed if logic operations are not used. Protect Level Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Move to Protect level | Pa’ —1999 to 9,999 0 None Operation/Adjust [aAPE 0to3 0 None ment Protect Initial Setting/Com- |LCPE Oto2 0 None munications Protect Setting Change Pro- | NEPE OFF, ON oFF, où OFF None tect PF Key Protect PFPE OFF, ON oFF, où OFF None Parameter Mask PASK OFF, ON oFF, où ON None Enable Password to Move to | PRLP —1999 to 9,999 0 None Protect Level Communications Setting Level Parameters Characters Setting (monitor) value Display Default Unit Set value Protocol Setting PSEL CompoWay/F (SYSWAY), ENF Mod [Compo- |None Modbus (See note 1.) Way/F (SYSWAY) Communications U-Na 0 to 99 1 None Unit No. Communications bPS 1.2, 24, 4.8, 9.6, 19.2, 388.4, | Le, ed, 9.6 kbps Baud Rate or 57.6 48,96, 132,384,

Communications LEN 7,8 7 Bit Data Length Communications SbcE 1,2 2 Bit Stop Bits Communications PREY None, Even, Odd NGNE, Even None Parity EVEN, add Send Data Wait SdWE 0 to 99 20 ms Time Note (1) When setting CWF, either CompoWay/F or SYSWAY can be used as the communications protocol. (CompoWay/F and SYSWAY are automatically identified by the command frames.)

control and FB input Models with

control and FB input, close control SP Upper Limit, SP Lower Limit Set Point Bank No. RUN/STOP

Proportional Band (See note 16.) Integral Time (See note 16.) Derivative Time (See note 16.) MV Upper Limit, MV Lower Limit M at Stop — e = = e = MV at PV Error = e = = e = Manual MV e - e _ Transfer Output Upper Limit, Transfer Output Lower Limit {See note 5.) © (See notes 3 and5 SP Mode Remote SP Enable Remote SP Upper Limit, Remote SP Lower Limit Control Output 1 Assignment Control Output 2 Assignment Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment Auxiliary Output 3 Assignment Event Input Assignment 1 © (See note 18. Event Input Assignment 2 © (See note 18. Event Input Assignment 3 © (See note 18. Event Input Assignment 4

Appendix Related initialized parameters Changed | Transfer Output parameter Type Floating/Closed Bank Numbers Used PID Set Automatic Selection Data Direct Setting of Position Proportional MV Password to Move to Protect Level Related parameter initialization — execution condition Models with position- proportional control and FB input, close control Bank 1 to 7 SP Bank 0 to 7 Wait Band = PID 1 to 8 Proportional Band = {See note 16.) PID 1 to 8 Integral Time (See note 16.) | — PID 1 to 8 Derivative Time = {See note 16.) PID 1 to 8 MV Upper Limit, = PID 1 to 8 MV Lower Limit PID 1 to 8 Automatic Selection Range | Upper Limit @ (See note 14.) Note (1) Initialized to input setting range upper and lower limits, or scaling upper and lower limits. (2) Initialized to SP upper and lower limits. (3) Clamped by SP upper and lower limits. (à) Initialized only when the input type is changed to analog input when RT turns ON. The defaults are as follows: RT: OFF (5) Initialization is performed as shown below according to the transfer output type setting. The initial- ization differs depending on the changed parameter and the output type setting. (6) Initialized as follows according to the Standard or Heating/Cooling parameter setting. SP: SP upper and lower limits Ramp SP: SP upper and lower limits PV: Input setting range upper and lower limits or scaling upper and lower limits MV (Heating): 100.0/0.0 MV (Cooling): 100.0/0.0 Valve Opening: 100.0/0.0 (5.1) Initialized only when the transfer output type is set to SP, Ramp SP, or PV. (5.2) Initialized only when the transfer output type is set to MV (Heating) or MV (Cooling). (5.3) Initialized to the above default values regardless of the settings for changing the transfer output type. MV Upper Limit: 105.0 MV Lower Limit: Standard -5.0, heating/cooling -105.0 (7) For standard models, initialized to control output (cooling) for heating/cooling control, according to the following. (The defaults for standard control and for models with position-propotional control are the defaults in the parameter list.) With control output 2: The Control Output 2 Assignment parameter is initialized to control output (cooling). Without control output 2 and ESCN-H: The Auxiliary Output 2 Assignment parameter is initialized to control output (cooling). (8) When the program pattern is OFF, the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter is initialized to alarm output 1. When the program pattern is not OFF, the Auxiliary Output 1 Assignment parameter is initialized to program end output. (9) When the program pattern is changed to OFF, if the Program Start parameter is assigned it is ini- tialized to “not assigned” (10) If the password is changed, it will be initialized to the new password.

(11) Initialized to 4.0 for close control and to 2.0 for floating control. (12) f the ST is changed to ON, the SP Mode will be initialized to LSP and the remote SP function will be disabled. (13) If the remote SP function is disabled, the SP Mode will be initialized to LSP. (14) The default values are as follows: Temperature Input Depends on the setting of the PID Set Automatic Selection Data parameter and the upper and lower limits for the input setting range (which depends on the temperature unit). + PID Set Automatic Selection Data = PV: Upper limit + 20°C (40°F) + PID Set Automatic Selection Data = DV: Upper limit - Lower Limit + 20°C (40°F) + PID Set Automatic Selection Data = SP: Upper limit Analog Input The default is 105.0 (regardless of the setting of the PID Set Automatic Selection Data parameter. (15) Initialized when the input type is changed from a temperature input to an analog input or from an analog input to a temperature input. (16) The proportional band, integral time, and derivative time are initialized when the input type is changed from a temperature input to an analog input or from an analog input to a temperature input. (17) Initialized to 233 if the integral time is O and the Close/Floating parameter is set for floating control. (18) Event input assignments used for bank selection are initialized to NONE. They are also initialized to NONE when only event inputs 3 and 4 are supported (ï.e., when only two event inputs are support- ed). (19) Ifthe ST is enabled, the SP Mode is initialized to LSP and the remote SP function is disabled. (20) Initialized to 0.8 when the temperature unit is °C, and to 1.4 when the temperature unit is °F. (21) When the program valid bank is exceeded and the Program Pattern parameter is not OFF. (22) Initialized to Stop if the Program Pattern parameter is not OFF.

According to Platinel Il Electromotive Force Table by Engelhard Corp.

Appendix Control Range + Resistance thermometer and thermocouple input Temperature lower limit -20°C to temperature upper limit +20°C, or temperature lower limit -40°C to temperature upper limit +40°C + Analog input -5% to +105% of scaling range Setting Levels Diagram This diagram shows all of the setting levels. To move to the advanced function setting level and calibration level, you must enter passwords. Some parameters are not displayed depending on the protect level setting and the conditions of use. Control stops when you move from the operation level to the initial setting level. Manual mode Note

Power ON | Start in manual mode. KL Start in automatic mode. Operation }—: Adjustment | | Level Level Press Press the me os Press the [OI Key orthe PF Key for at least 1 5. #4 O1 Key less than 1 S. Presse | [KES EL Press the (Pikey less] Gaat SE O1 Key less than 1 s. (Display will flash after 1st second) Press the [O Key for at least 3 s while H-f is displayed. {A-A wil flash after st second) Bank Setting Level PID Setting Level Press the Key less than 1 5. Press the PF Key Protect Level Manual for at leastil s.#4 Control Level Monitor/Settingl PF Key #5 Item Level Note: The time taken to move to the protect level can be adjusted Press the [O] Key for at by changing the Press the [OI Key least 3 s. (Display wil flash “Move 15 protect level for at least 1 s. after 18t second.) time” setting. : (Communica® Control stops. Initial Setting tions Setting Level Se] Press the Key for less than 1 s. Input password while AMaf is displayed (Set value -169) Press the [D] Key for at least 1 s. Advanced Function Setting Level Input password [==] Control in progress © Control stopped Calibration Level [I] Not displayed for some models —— = Loc change (1) You can return to the operation level by executing a software reset. (2) ltis not possible to move to other levels from the calibration level by operating the keys on the front panel. lt can be done only by first turning OFF the power. (3) From the manual control level, key operations can be used to move to the operation level only.

Appendix ntrol Level Press the Key or the PF Key for at least Press the PF Key for at least 1 s.

gs Care NV at PV Error uv Monier (Cotingi Lasag curn 2 D pee Lin PF Kay (See not 2) Monitor/Setting Item Level] (ESAVEN-H on) En on pe Lys 0 F— pa 4 PF Kay (Sce not 2) Note:

Appendix Press the [O] Key for at least 1 s. Press Ihe LC Key for atleast 3 s PET Press the C1 Key less than 1 5 Press the [Key less than 1 s. Protect Level En RSS

( Operation pl “Love

main functions, 8 indication accuracy, 294 indicators explanation, 3 operation, 3 initial setting level, 13, 223 parameter operation list, 318 initial setting/communications protect, 106 initial settings, 46 examples, 46, 47, 48 initialization, 244 Input Error (error display), 304 input sensor types, 8, 224 input shift, 87 one-point shift, 87 two-point shift, 88 input types, 49 list, 49 setting, 49 inputs wiring, 30 installation, 18, 21 ESAN/ESEN-H mounting the terminal cover, 22, 23 mounting to the panel, 23 ESCN-H mounting the terminal cover, 22 mounting to the panel, 21 panel cutout ESAN-H, 19 ESCN-H, 19 ESEN-H, 20 removing from case ESAN-H, 25 ESCN-H, 23 ESEN-H, 25

keys down key, 4 key operations, 11 level key, 4 mode key, 4 operations, 4 up key, 4

No. 1 display, 3 No. 2 display, 3

ONVOFF control, 51, 228 setting, 58 one-point shift, 88 operation level, 12, 175 parameter operation list, 311 operation/adjustment protect, 106 output functions assignments, 53 output limits, 141 output periods, 230 output specifications setting, 52

AT calculated gain, 248 AT execute/cancel, 192 AT hysteresis, 248 auto/manual select addition, 256 auto/manual switch, 178 automatic cooling coefficient adjustment, 271 automatic display return time, 250 auxiliary output * open in alarm, 245 auxiliary output 1 assignment, 263 auxiliary output 2 assignment, 264 auxiliary output 3 assignment, 265 bank (0 to 7) PID set No., 210 bank (0 to 7) SP, 210 bank * alarm value 1, 211 bank * alarm value 2, 212 bank * alarm value 3, 213 bank * alarm value lower limit 1, 212 bank * alarm value lower limit 2, 213 bank * alarm value lower limit 3, 214 bank * alarm value upper limit 1, 212 bank * alarm value upper limit 2, 213 bank * alarm value upper limit 3, 214 bank 0 to 7 SP ramp set value, 211 bank No., 179 bank numbers used, 237 bank soak time, 215 bank wait band, 215 character select, 265 closed/floating, 239 cold junction compensation method, 252 communications baud rate, 281 communications data length, 281 communications parity, 281 communications stop bits, 281 communications Unit No., 281 communications writing, 193 control output 1 assignment, 261 control output 1 ON/OFF count alarm set value, 279 control output 1 ON/OFF count monitor, 278 control output 2 assignment, 262 control output 2 ON/OFF count alarm set value, 279 control output 2 ON/OFF count monitor, 278 control period (cooling), 230 control period (heating), 230 cooling coefficient, 201 dead band, 201 decimal point, 226 derivative time, 200 direct setting of position proportional MV, 270 directreverse operation, 231 display bank selection, 210 display PID selection, 216 display refresh period, 277 event input assignment *, 238 extraction of square root enable, 240 extraction of square root low-cut point, 207

ratings, 207 removing from case ESAN/ESEN-H, 25 ESCN-H, 23 reverse operation, 52, 231 RT (robust tuning), 64, 257 run/stop control, 98

scaling upper and lower limits for analog inputs, 92 self-tuning (ST), 62, 228 sensor input control range, 335 indication range, 335 setting range, 335 sensor types, 224 set point (SP), 56 limiter, 100 limiting change rate, 102 lower limit, 102 ramp, 102 setting, 56, 59 setting upper and lower limits, 100 upper limit, 101 setting change protect, 106 setting level configuration, 11 setting levels diagram, 336 settings cooling coefficient, 95 dead band, 95 event input, 96 HB alarm (heater burnout alarm), 78 moving to advanced function setting level, 78 heating/cooling control, 95 HS alarm, 80 moving to advanced function setting level, 79, 80 hysteresis, 59 LBA detection time, 115 password, 108

saving, 14 SP lower limit, 102 SP upper limit, 101 shifting input values, 87 simple program function, 132 controlling start, 99 Starting, 134 soak time, 135 SP ramp, 102 alarm operations, 104 operation at startup, 103 restrictions, 103 specifications, 297 Current Transformer (CT), 300 output, 52 USB-Serial Conversion Cable, 302 ST (self-tuning), 62 ST stable range, 64 Startup conditions, 63 standard control, 228 Standby sequence, 90 startup conditions, 63 operation, 103 support software port, 40

Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual. Cat. No. H157-E1-02 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the previous version. Revision code Date Revised content 01 January 2008 | Original production o1A March 2008 |Page dded case color information to the model number legend. Page dded model number legend for Output Units. 02 March 2009 | Pages xii and xiv: Added information on shipping standards. Pages 26, 32, 34, 72, 138, 213, 279, 295, 306, 313, and 314: Made minor correc- tions. Page 29: Replaced graphic. Pages 73 to 77: Made minor corrections to graphics. Page 89: Replaced graphic and changed step 2.

Authorized Distributor: